A.—No. Sb.
FURTHER PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES. (In continuation of Papers presented 5th July, 1870.)
PRESENTED TO BOTH HOUSES OE THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY, BT COMMAND OE HIS EXCELLENCY.
WELLINGTON.
1870.
A.—No. Bb.
FURTHER PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
No. 1. Memorandum by Major Eopata Wahawaha. The chiefs of Te Arawa and myself have had a consultation with Mr. McLean in reference to all orders connected with the movements of the Native forces at Waikare. It is arranged that the Maori chiefs shall assume the entire command, are to have the management of the military operations, and that they are to make their reports to the Government of the names of the killed and wounded in the engagements in these districts ; whether at Waikare-Moana, Euatahuna, or elsewhere, the same action is to be taken. No Europeans are to take part in any of these movements, lest confusion should arise from there being two different commands; and moreover the Maoris are very impatient, and incapable of obeying and carrying out the instructions or commands of European officers while engaged in field operations. Tauranga, 11th Eebruary, 1870. Na Meiha Eopata Wahawaha.
No. 2. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Mohi Ttjeeieei. Eriend Mohi, — Auckland, 18th Eebruary, 1870. Salutations to you. Eopata Wahawaha is on board the " Sturt." He intends to go to Wai-kare-Moana ;he and his companions are going to pursue these murderers, Te Kooti and others. I have arranged that Eopata alone shall lead the force, and that there shall be no European. He will go to your place to obtain some men to assist him. Mohi, this is my idea: these murderers ought to be exterminated as soon as possible, so that the quietness, prosperity, and peace of the former days may return. Your friend, To Mohi Tureirei. Donald McLean.
No. 3. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Major Eopata Wahawaha. Eeiend Majoe Eopata,— Auckland, 19th February, 1870. Salutations. This is my word to you : You are to go by the " Sturt," to make arrangements with your tribe, the Ngatiporou, about going to hunt for Te Kooti and Kereopa, at Waikare-Moana. You alone are to have the management and to give orders to your tribe; there will be no European over you. If you should succeed in catching that bad man. five thousand pounds (£5,000) will be given to you and your tribe ; if you do not, there will be no payment. It will be for you to explain these words to your soldiers. There are provisions on board the " Sturt" for your soldiers. Should fighting actually take place, remember to save the women and children. There is no other word to you, because you know the objects of the fighting: that evil is to be exterminated, so that peace may be in our places. If you are agreeable that a European should accompany you, very well; speak to Mr. Locke and Major Westrup. Show this letter to them both. Erom your friend, To Major Eopata Wahawaha, Auckland. Donald McLean.
No. 4 The Hon. the Defence Minister to Major Kemp. Eeiend Kemp,— Auckland, 19th February, 1870. Salutations. This is a word of mine to you : The management of the fighting against Te Kooti is given by me into the hands of you the Maori chiefs, for you know his tactics ; so I have said that only you, the Maoris, are to pursue him. I have instructed Colonel McDonnell that he and the Europeans are not to go. If that murderer, Te Kooti, is caught by you, the Government will make some arrangement with you, the chiefs; and the European people will praise you, and make you great. I have selected the chiefs who are to have the conduct of the fighting, viz., you and Topia Turoa for your own party, and Eopata Wahawaha to be the leader of his own tribe, the Ngatiporou; they will come by way of Waikare-Moana. The chiefs of Ngatikahungunu will lead their own men. "Well, my desire is that you, the chiefs of these tribes, should work together in unity. Do not be jealous of one another, but do the work well, so that that bad man may soon disappear from our sight.
A.—No. 8b
4
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
I enclose to you the copy of a letter I have received from Wiremu Pukapuka; look at what he says. All letters which you may write to me send direct, that I may the sooner see them. Your friend, To Major Kemp. Donald McLean. Similar Letter to Topia Turoa.
No. 5. Heta Tauranga to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Mb. McLean,— Okania, 24th February, 1870. My parent, salutations to you, you who saw our departed friend. Notwithstanding that he has gone, his doings are still within my breast, and hence it is that our love remains the same towards you. Notwithstanding that the sky is sometimes overcast, there are winds to clear away the gloom, and allow the sun to shine upon the earth. This then corresponds with the way in which the Governor and yourself are seeking to dispel the troubles which are now hanging over us and our children. My heart was gladdened on the arrival of Tana te Waharoa with your joint message. Enough of this. I accompanied Colonel McDonnell as far as Tauranga and Te Papa, and having done so I then returned to see where the Ngatiraukawa were, and I found them in the forest ranges, Te Kooti having left them because they were determined not to join him. They have returned with me to Patetere—to their own settlement. They number about 100 persons, including women and children, and the two Chiefs Wiremu Haurui and Maihi Te Mata. I saw no other people strangers during this time. This is the end of my address. Na Heta Taueanga.
No. 6. The Hon. the Defence Ministee to Majors Kemp and Topia. To Kemp and to Topia,— Auckland, 3rd March, 1870. Eriends, salutations to you both and to all of you. In my letters of the 19th Eebruary I informed you that I had given up to you the conduct of the pursuit after Te Kooti, the man who continues to do evil in our Island ; for, according to what the Maori chiefs say, the reason why Te Kooti has not been caught is the complication caused by European officers. Te Pokiha has come here to inquire as to the thoughts of the Government. The arrangement for this work is a lump sum of money. If Te Kooti is caught or killed, five thousand pounds (£5,000) will be given. It matters not if another tribe should catch him; this money will still be paid, for all who will have taken part in the work. All that the Government are considering about is food for the road. Your friend, Donald McLean.
No. 7. Major Kemp to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Mr. McLean, Minister,— Ohiwa, 4th March, 1870. Health to you. We have received the letter addressed by you to Topia and myself, urging us to go in pursuit of Te Kooti, —good. Having now completed the arrangements which detained me here, waiting also for my party left behind at Tapapa, and making arrangements with the people of this East Coast, that is to say, the tribes of the Ngatipukeko, Ngatiawa, Whakatohea, Ngaitai, Te Whanau-apanui, and other tribes, and Ngatikereru. On this clay the march has commenced by the road to Waimana and thence to Maungapowhatu. These are the two roads that lead direct from Whakatane to Buatahuna, and from Ahikereru to Euatahuna. Ido not know if they have moved on or not, as Eox is now with you. The party which accompanies me consists of 428. Then Ngatipukeko, Ngatiawa —they will move by the other road. I do not know how many men will move by that road, but I will report to you as soon as I see them on their march through this rough, precipitous country; but the Europeans have seen and can describe the nature of this country. Erom your sincere friend, The Hon. the Defence Minister. Major Kemp Bangihiwinui.
No. 8. The Hon. the Defence Ministee to Aeawa Chiefs. Auckland, 3rd March, 1870. To Tuhourangi, to Te Kepa, to Bangitihi, to Arama Karaka, to Ngatipikiao, to Matene, to Te Mapu, to Tuwharetoa, to Hohepa, in fact to all the Chiefs of Te Arawa,— Eriends, salutations to you. On the 18th of Eebruary I wrote to you, telling you, in accordance with your own request, all the matters connected with the fighting. With reference to that letter, you sent Te Pokiha to inquire as to details: My reply to him was: You who carry on matters are to arrange these affairs, because my plan is a lump sum, whether the time is long or short. If Te Kooti is caught, I will pay five thousand pounds (£5,000). If other tribes catch him I will still give you that money, if you help to do the work. However, the daily rate of pay is to cease. This is my intention with regard to all the tribes in respect of this work.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A.—No. Bb.
5
Eopata Wahawaha has gone. Now, if you do not consent to this arrangement, let each hapu go to his own place. That is all. Your friend, Donald McLean.
No. 9. Hohaia Matatehokia to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Me. McLean, — Whakatane, Bth March, 1870. Salutations to you. Your letter of the 3rd day of this month has reached us. That is informing us of the giving over of the pursuit of Te Kooti to the Maori Chiefs, to be pursued according to the mode of warfare of our ancestors, and the non-payment per day during the time we are engaged in pursuing him, and that when Te Kooti is caught, then the Government will have consideration for us (reward us). Friend, our parent, perhaps your orphan children who are here will not be clear (will not be willing) to carry out this view of you and the chief who proposed those plans to you. But as you and the chief have determined on that plan, let him pursue Te Kooti, and if he captures him, well; but these children do not approve of this mode of service. Let the words to you end. From your friend, Hohaia Matatehokia.
No. 10. Te Kepa Banoipuawhe to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Friend Me. McLean,— Te Ariki, March 11th, 1870. Greetings. On the 10th inst. we received your letter stopping tho daily pay, and stating that the war parties that are pursuing Te Kooti are to serve for the payment, upon completion of service, of £5,000. On our seeing this word, our hearts were quite perplexed, because you told us when we saw you in the Civil Commissioner's Office at Te Papa, on the 18th February, 1870, that £5,000 would be the payment given to us by the Government, above (besides) the four shillings which is paid per diem. On the 18th of that February we received your letter, giving over to the Maori the conduct of the war. The Europeans all remained, and there was no word from you to us in that letter respecting the pay. We then, these tribes (Tuhourangi, Tuwharetoa, and Ngatirangitihi), commenced immediately to proceed in pursuit of Te Kooti. As to the going of Te Pokiha, he was not asked or deputed by the Arawa to go, but he went of his own accord. On the day which McDonnell spoke the word about his (Colonel McDonnell's) returning, then I and Hohepa Tamamutu agreed that we should go with Te Pokiha. I then sent the war party on. When we two heard of the talk of Mr. Clarke, we two assented to come back, and Te Pokiha proceeded thither upon his persistence to reach you. As we were going direct to Buatahuna, your letter of the 3rd day of March came forth, stopping the daily pay, and the heart became quite sad in consequence of this new thought; but we did not cease proceeding in pursuit, and chanced whether he should be caught by others, or whether we should be thoroughly opposed by the Hauhaus on the way, and we should deliberate. Now this is a word from the chiefs of these hapus (of Tuhourangi, Tuwharetoa, and Ngatirangitihi) : that the love of the Government be given back to these hapus that are desirous of pursuing Te Kooti; that is to say, that the four shillings per day be again given. Mr. McLean, let love on your part again arise. Ngatiwhakaue, and the other hapus of the Arawa, with Ngatipikiao, have remained. I and my two hundred men are still desirous of carrying out the word of the Government, and are anxious to meet Whanganui and Ngatiporou, who are coming by the other roads. Here is another affliction of ours —having no food. The reason why we delay to enter Buatahuna is, we have heard three reports —that, during the days of March Te Kooti will return to Botorua, to fetch Te Tahau, and then they will proceed to Taupo, his permanent place. x These are the only subjects which we wish to speak to you about. Let another letter be written to us when this reaches you, that we may be clear. By me, Te Kepa Te Bangipuawhe.
No. 11. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Te Kepa Bangipuawhe. My Feiend Te Kepa Bangipuawhe,— Auckland, 23rd March, 1870. Salutations to you, my friend. I have received your letter of the 11th of March. I have looked at the words contained therein. Well, this matter, the lump sum, is not a mere idea ; it has been carefully considered in Council, and has been agreed to by other tribes. Friends, my love for my tribe, the Arawa, will not cease. It is not new, it is from olden time, from the time of the old men who are dead, and the thought is still the same, for the great deeds have been seen during the past times. My last word is this :If Te Kooti is caught by Te Arawa, the Government will settle with them without any trouble. This is another word about food, that is to say, the subsistence for the road while the work is going on : 0 friend, I consent that the Government should issue food for the subsistence of those who work in the battles. You ask Mr. Clarke. Your friend, Donald McLean. 2
A.—No. Bb,
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
6
No. 12. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. Hamlin. Sic, — Napier, 15th February, 1870. I have already acquainted you verbally with the desire of the Government that you should proceed to Wairoa and raise a Native force for the occupation of Onepoto, and for taking such action against the enemy as you may find possible. Tho duty which is intrusted to you is I am well aware difficult, but your knowledge of the Natives and of the country will materially assist you in it. You will on arrival at the Wairoa make known to Faora Te Apatu and Tamihana the object of your mission, and personally communicate as speedily as possible with Ihaka Whaanga, whose aid will be of great assistance. You will, from your knowledge of the Wairoa Natives, be well able to select the most efficient force that district can furnish, and you are authorized to employ 150 to 200 Natives for the objects of the expedition. In the general management of what is to be done, you will consult with the chiefs and work with them, which, as the expedition is to be entirely composed of Natives, is essential. The transport of food is a most difficult feature of the operations, and you must explain to the Natives that the Government cannot do more than transport food for them to Te Ariki, which will be done ; from thence they will have to fetch what they require. A post at Te Ariki, and another at Te Kapu, will be held by the Constabulary, mainly for the protection of the supplies. You are aware of the different forces that are advancing into the TJrewera county, and it will be the main object of the force that will occupy Onepoto to keep the command of the roads in the vicinity, and prevent the enemy escaping either towards Poverty Bay, or the Wairoa, or Mohaka. The boats that were concealed and sunk by Lieut.-Colonel Herrick should if possible be raised, as they would be of great service on the Lake. Sub-Inspector Newland will be instructed to send two of the men of his force with you, to show the spot where the boats were sunk, and to assist in any way you require. He will also issue on your requisition such ammunition as you may require for the use of the expedition. You will please use the utmost exertions practicable in organizing this expedition, and getting it into position, as the other forces must be far on their road into the Urewera country. Belying upon your well-known zeal and alacrity in cases like the present, I have, <&c, F. E. Hamlin, Esq., Napier. J. D. Ormond.
No. 13. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Officer Commanding, Wairoa. Sir, — Napier. 15th February, 1870. I notified to you by the overland mail that Te Kooti had escaped to the Urewera country, and I have now to inform you that our forces are pursuing him in considerable strength by the Waimana and Ahikeruru roads, whilst Major Eopata Wahawaha advances upon Maungapowhatu by way of Poverty Bay. A very large force will speedily be concentrated on the Waikare-Moana and Maungapowhatu positions, and I am directed by the Hon. the Defence Minister to take steps for occupying Onepoto at Waikare-Moana with a Native force. Mr. Hamlin proceeds to-morrow upon this service, and you will please assist him in any way in your power. He has full instructions for his guidance ; and as the expedition is purely a Native one, it is not wished that any of the force under your command should accompany it, except two smart men, whom you will please select and place at Mr. Hamlin's disposal, for assisting to keep account of food supplied, &c. They must be men who know the place, and were present when the boats were sunk in the Lake. Although the Constabulary will not be moved to Onepoto, it will be necessary to avail of their services in connection with the expedition; and you will please at once take steps for the occupation of Te Kapu by twenty men, and of a post at Te Ariki by other twenty men of the Constabulary under your command. This will ensure the safety of the supplies, and will still leave a few men to hold the blockhouse at Wairoa, and to scout from there. Quartermaster Bower informs me that you will have no difficulty in arranging for the supply of tho men at Te Kapu, but that the men at Te Ariki will require to have their supplies forwarded to them. This you will please arrange in the best way you are able ; and I may state that it is not expected the present operations will last more than a very short time, and any arrangements made must be of a temporary character. A supply of flour, biscuit, and groceries, as well as ten kegs of ammunition, are being forwarded to your address by schooner by the Quartermaster. You will be good enough to make the necessary arrangements for the transport of such food as may be required for the Natives to Te Ariki. The Government boat can take the stores from Wairoa to Te Kapu, and a crew must be furnished from the twenty men who will be stationed there ; from there to Te Ariki I gather that you can arrange for canoe transport at from £2 to £3 a ton, and the Natives employed on the expedition will receive delivery of such stores as Mr. Hamlin may make requisition for at that place. You will also supply such ammunition for the use of the expedition as Mr. Hamlin may make requisition for. It has been named to me that it will be requisite to form a post at Te Ariki, on the side of the river from whence the supplies will be taken; but a very small work will secure twenty men, and this will require to be done. You will please send early information of any intelligence of importance that may reach you ; and should it be of sufficient importance, you are authorized to employ a special messenger for the purpose.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
7
A.—No. Bb.
I think I have communicated to you the main points upon which you will have to act, and the Government rely upon your doing all in your power to assist the operations. I have, &c„ The Officer Commanding, Wairoa. J. D. Ormond.
No. 14 His Honor J. D. Ormond to Ihaka Whaanga. Friend, — 15th February, 1870. This goes to you by Mr. Hamlin ; he will tell you of the news, and that Te Kooti has been hunted back to the Urewera; also of the plans Mr. McLean and the Government have made for following him there, and making an end of him, and the other disturbers of the peace of the country who have gone there with him. Friend, we rely on you to do your share in this work, and Hamlin will consult with you as to the steps to be taken. My word to you is to be careful in the selection of the men you take, and to be quick in your movements. The work at Te Onepoto will be left in the hands of the chiefs, assisted by Mr. Hamlin. From your friend, To Ihaka Whaanga. J. D. Ormond.
No. 15. His Honor J. D. Oemond to Mr. Locke, B.M. Sic,— Napier, 15th February, 1870. I have to request that you will proceed by the steamer " Coomerang " to Poverty Bay, for the purpose of assisting and furthering the operations in course of progress under Major Eopata, for an advance into the Urewera country against To Kooti. You will please do your utmost to get Major Bopata's force to start on the expedition with as little delay as possible, and it will be well for you to accompany them until they enter the mountains, to insure that object. In the event of any trouble arising from the use of spirits, you will at once take the responsibility of closing the public-houses at Turanga, and preventing the issue of liquor. It will also be well that you should place yourself in communication with the Boverty Bay Natives, and recommend them to take such steps as you may consider nceessary to insure safety from any inroad the enemy may make into their districts, which, though unlikely, may be possible. Having seen Eopata well off on his expedition, and held the necessary communication with the Boverty Bay Natives, you will please proceed to the Wairoa, and use your influence in directing the Wairoa Natives to take similar precautions to those recommended in the case of Boverty Bay. Mr. Hamlin, who proceeds to Wairoa to-morrow, will, on his arrival there, raise a force for the occupation of Onepoto, and it is the intention to leave the entire direction of any operations that may take place there to the Native chiefs, assisted by Mr.) Hamlin. It is unnecessary for me to give any further instructions ; you are thoroughly aware of the objects and general plans of the Government in the operations now being undertaken, and will, I know, further them to the utmost of your power. I have, Ac, S. Locke, Esq., Eesident Magistrate. J. D. Ormond.
No. 16. The Hon. tho Defence Minister to Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell. General Government Offices, Sic, — Auckland, 18th February, 1870. As it has been decided to intrust the conduct of the Waikare-Moana expeditionary force to the Native chiefs, I have the honor to acquaint you that Major Drummond Hay's services are no longer required. I have, &c, Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell, Commanding Eield Force. Donald McLean.
No. 17. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Captain Faiechild. General Government Offices, Sic, — Auckland, 19th February, 1870. I have the honor to request you to proceed to-day to the Bay of Plenty, taking with you Major Eopata, who is instructed to take an expeditionary force of Natives to Waikare-Moana. You will be good enough to land Major Eopata at Hick's Bay, or any other place along the coast, for the purpose of embarking as many Natives as he may wish to enrol for the above service. It will most likely be necessary to make two trips, as it is probable that about 600 Natives will be required for the expedition. So soon as you have landed the whole of the force at Poverty Bay, you will then be good enough to proceed to Napier and report your arrival to His Honor Mr. Ormond, the General Government Agent, from whom you will receive further instructions. I have, &c, Captain Fairchild, p.s. " Sturt," Auckland. Donald McLean.
A.—No. Bb,
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
8
No. 18. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Major Westrup. General Government Offices, Sic,— Auckland, 19th February, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that Major Eopata Wahawaha has been instructed to land his Native force, en route for Waikare-Moana, at Poverty Bay. You will therefore be good enough to assist him by every means in your power. Major Eopata has named Lieutenant Borter, of the Volunteer Cavalry, Poverty Bay, as an officer he would like to accompany the expedition, and I have no objection to his doing so, provided that he volunteers for the service. The force being composed exclusively of Natives, I do not consider that it would be judicious that Europeans should form part of the expedition. You will be good enough to report to me the date of the arrival and departure of the force from Boverty Bay. Inspector C. D. Pitt has been appointed, and proceeds this day to assume charge of the Armed Constabulary in the Sub-District of Poverty Bay, but you will continue to command the district as heretofore. I have, &c, Major Westrup, Commanding Militia and Volunteers, Donald McLean. Boverty Bay.
No. 19. Mr. Locke, E.M., to the Hon. the Peemier. Sic, — Turanganui, 19th February, 1870. I have the honor to inform you of my arrival at Poverty Bay on the evening of the 18th. No information whatever has yet been received from Major Eopata; it is believed here that he is in Auckland ; therefore I have sent messengers up the coast with letters to Te Mokena, Captain Hotene, and Major Eopata, requesting them to push on with Ngatiporou as quickly as possible. I have also desired Mr. Campbell, 8.M., who goes with his family to Waiapu by the " Coomerang," to see Eopata and the Ngatiporou chiefs. The Europeans and Maoris here are on the alert. I have, &c, S. Locke, The Hon. William Fox, Auckland. Eesident Magistrate.
No. 20. Major Westrup to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sic, — Turanganui, Poverty Bay, 24th February, 1870. I have the honor to report the arrival at this post of Major Eopata Wahawaha, with about 300 men of Ngatiporou Tribe, by the " Sturt." Lieutenant Porter and Mr. Blackstock will accompany the expedition as volunteers, but no other Europeans. I will assist Mr. Locke in getting the expedition started as soon as possible. Inspector C. D. Bitt, A.C., has arrived to take charge of the Constabulary stationed here. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister. Chas. Westeup, Major.
No. 21. Major Westrup to the Hon. the Defence Ministee. Sic,' — Turanganui, Boverty Bay, 27th February, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that Major Eopata Wahawaha, with the Natives under his command, started for their destination yesterday afternoon, all the men in high spirits. The expedition will not proceed far up to Monday, but after that day it will push forward witji all speed. The force numbers about 400 men. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. Chas. Westeup, Major.
No. 22. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Major Westeup. General Government Offices, Sis,— Auckland, 16th March, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 27th ultimo, reporting that Major Eopata, with 400 Natives, had started on their expedition, and am pleased to hear that the force were in such higji spirits. I have, &c, Major Westrup, Poverty Bay. Donald McLean.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A.—No. Bb.
9
No. 23. His Honor J. D. Oemond to the Hon. the Colonial Seceetaey. Sir,— Napier, sth March, 1870. Having received information from the Wairoa that the expedition which Mr. Hamlin had been sent to arrange had not started, and that some difficulties had arisen, I thought it best to proceed to Wairoa myself, and accordingly left here at midnight on the 3rd instant. I found on arrival at Wairoa that the Natives were assembling, but that further delay might occur. Mr. Hamlin, who was sent to organize this expedition, had used his best efforts to get the expedition started, and had been assisted lately by Mr. Locke ; but delay was still occurring, partly from dissatisfaction at the change from daily pay when on service, to which they were accustomed, and partly to one large hapu being on unsatisfactory terms with the Government, in consequence of their refusal to give up to custody a prisoner who was released, or rather who escaped, some time ago from the Wairoa Lock-up. Deeming it of considerable importance that an expedition should start, and establish without delay a post at Onepoto, on the Wairoa side of Waikare-Moana Lake, both for purposes of communication, and also as support to the other advancing expeditions, who might, in the absence of this expected support, be much dissatisfied, I at once arranged to meet the Natives, and took steps for obtaining the surrender of the escaped prisoner; before I met the Natives I had the satisfaction to hear that the prisoner had come in and surrendered himself. I found on meeting the Natives that no great difficulties stood in the way of the expedition, and that what was mostly required was to hasten their movements. I am glad to report that the proceedings of the meeting were very satisfactory, and that on its termination a considerable section of the Natives present shouldered their arms and moved off to To Kapu ; the remainder are to follow to-day, and the whole expedition will move from Te Kapu on Monday; it will number about 200 men. The Natives understand that they receive no daily pay; but that if the expeditions are successful, they will all be rewarded in proportion to the services rendered. Another expedition, numbering about eighty men, moves on Monday for Mohaka; they will scout the southern shores of the Waikare-Moana Lake, and join the Wairoa expedition at Onepoto. After that the combined expedition will act upon the enemy as found practicable, and endeavour to communicate with the Ngatiporou and other expeditions acting against Te Kooti and the Urewera. The expeditions from this side will require more assistance in the shape of food than those advancing from other directions. The country between Wairau and Waikare-Moana is destitute of cultivations, and the necessity of holding a post at Onepoto entails feeding the party so employed ; as however all communication with the advancing expeditions must come through there, I have deemed it necessary to arrange this; no expensive means of transport are however being provided. What I have arranged is as follows : —The Constabulary hold posts at Te Kapu and Te Ariki, the latter about thirty miles up the Wairoa Biver, and the other an intermediate post. The Constabulary take such supplies as may be needed to Te Kapu by boat, and thence to Ariki they are to be conveyed up the river by canoes at £3 per ton. From Te Ariki the Natives are to fetch themselves what may be required. Mutton is to be supplied at Te Ariki and at Waikare-Moana at 4^d. per pound. I have further instructed Mr. Hamlin that he is only to issue food when it is fouml impossible to obtain supplies from the enemy's country, and that he should endeavour to feed the expedition upon the enemy as much as possible. You will gather from this report that no serious expenditure is to be incurred, and that which I have arranged is absolutely necessary for securing the success of the operations now going on. Small advances for the purchase of clothing, &c, were in some cases necessary, but the total amount on this account is very trifling. I have taken measures for obtaining speedy information at Wairoa of anything that takes place in the Waikare-Moana country, and think it advisable that, if possible, the " Sturt" should be at my disposal to keep up communication with that place. I trust what I have done will meet the approval of the Government. I have, &c, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary, Wellington. J. D. Ormond.
No. 24 The Hon. the Colonial Seceetaey to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Colonial Defence Office, Sir,— Wellington, Bth March, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge receipt of your letter of the sth instant, in which you detail the arrangements you have made for starting the Native expedition under Mr. Hamlin to WaikareMoana, holding the post of Onepoto, and supplying the force with food, &c.; and to convey to your Honor the approval of the Government of the steps you report having taken, and also to express their satisfaction at the energy and discretion shown by you on this, as on other occasions. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, &c, Napier. W. Gisboene.
No. 25. Major Mate, 8.M., to Mr. 11. T. Claeke, Civil Commissioner. Sic, — Civil Commissioner's Office, Tauranga, 11th March, 1870. I have the honor to report upon Native matters in the Bay of Plenty District. About the 4th instant, the Ngatihau, under Kemp, left Ohiwa for Maungapowhatu, with about 150 Bawhiti Natives, including 40 Whakatohea. Hori Kawakura with 60 Ngatiawa marched up the 3
A.—No. 8b
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
10
Whakatane to join Kemp at Te Waimana. Ngatipukeko, influenced, it is said, by Ngatipikiao, decline to go. No news from this expedition has come in. On the 7th instant a party of Hauhaus came down the Waiaua Valley, near Opotiki, and surprised the inhabitants (Whakatohea); most of them escaped by the sea to the eastward, but a number of women and children are supposed to have fallen into the hands of the enemy. Captain Walker made a demonstration, and two of his party, Arawa from Ohiwa, were killed. Later information received by the officer commanding here makes it appear that the Whakatohea Pa, Omarumutu, is occupied by the Hauhaus. I attach a copy of letter from Captain Walker ; the news furnished is very meagre. The burning of the Eangitaiki Mill by a party of Hauhaus on the 28th ultimo, was in all probability intended as a draw to attract attention in that direction while the Opotiki move was made. From the Birirakau I learn that Tahau's party, numbering about 50 all told, are at Okania, waiting for Te Kooti's promised return to those parts. A portion of the Batetere people are with Tahau; a few are at Te Tahawai, at the back of the Whakamarama, and Tana is said to have given shelter to the rest. He is evidently trying to get a number of people about him, with a view to making himself more conspicuous. Mr. Gundry has returned from his exploration of the Oropi line of road to Eotorua. He informs me that he has sent in a report for your information. I regret to have to inform you that Colonel Fraser died last night. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Auckland. W. G. Mair, E.M.
Enclosure in No. 25. Captain Walker to Major Mair, E.M. Sir,— Opotiki, 7th March, 1870. A party of the Urewera are at Opape. They have come down to tamper with the Whakatohea, and have taken some of them prisoners whom they met with. Banapia and the others have abandoned the settlement. He has gone by sea to Torere, and others to the Kaha, so that if tho Hauhaus go there they will be warmly received. Their numbers are not known, but I should say they are not in force. The Whakatohea seem to have bolted at the first appearance of the Hauhaus, most of their young men being with Kemp. I have sent to Ohiwa for 100 of the Whanganui Natives, to try and intercept them if possible. Bareka tells me that he saw Bakuraku's brother. I have, &c, Major Mair, Tauranga. G. B. Walker.
No. 26. Major Kemp to the Hon. the Defence Ministee. To Mr. McLean,— Opotiki, 13th March, 1870. Salutations to you. On the sth instant we reached Te Waimana at 4 o'clock in the morning, but did not see any Hauhaus. In the forenoon, or later in the morning, Topia and his tribe and the Arawa also came back to Opotiki; we proceeded and reached Otara, where the Hauhaus asked "Who are you?" The question was not answered, and they fired down their guns at us from the top of the precipice, and we fired up. They retreated: we then went on and slept at Motuohau, in consequence of the heaviness of the rain on that day. The next day we proceeded, and slept at Ngatuoha ; the Biver Waimana was flooded. Three days elapsed and the flood in the river subsided. On the following day we reached Tauwharemanuka, and all the chiefs of my war party —Te Hata, Te Kani, Wiremu Kingi, Kcrei Kawakura, and others— held a consultation as to sending a messenger to Tamaikowha. I assented to their word, and he was sent to those people, i.e., Tamaikowha and his people. On his arrival he found they had scattered about on the same day that they fired down on us. Afterwards those people came, and I said to them, "Where is Te Kooti?" He, Tamaikowdia, said, " I have not seen him, but I heard he had gone to Waioeka, and do you go back quickly; soon he will arrive to capture the Whakatohea, Ngaitai, and Whanaua-Apanui, and kill them and the Europeans of Opotiki." I said, " Where are the Urewera ?" He replied, " They have been taken thither by (gone with) Te Kooti, as they think they will be put to death by Government. The chiefs only remained. Bakuraku has separated from Te Kooti." I said, "Have you no thought (desire) to make peace?" He said, "I am willing ; that is the reason why I questioned down to you on the day that you were fired down at by us, for I heard that that was Topia Turoa's war party, because we belong to the King party." However, lam unable to write to you all that was said. The followdng day we returned to the Waimana, and we saw the place where Te Kooti had encamped. I said, " Why did not the Arawa and Topia and party, when they saw this encampment, send men up to me, because we came along here at night." We then slept there. The next day we arrived at Ohiwa, at 9 o'clock at night. A letter from Captain Walker reached me to come here to Opotiki. I wrote to him telling him that I would leave at 4 o'clock in the morning. The next news I heard about Te Kooti was that Te Whakatohea had been captured, and that Topia had gone and was aiding Ngaitai. This morning I sent Te Hata, Te Kani, and Wiremu Kingi and their tribe. Should the messenger from them arrive to-day, we shall march into the forest. Enough. From your friend, Major Kepa Bangihiwinui.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A—No. Bb,
11
No. 27. Sub-Inspector Gascoigne to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sic— Tauranga, 13th March, 1870. I have the honor to forward the enclosed letters received from Captain Walker, Commanding at Opotiki, for your information. I have, &c, J. W. Gascoigne, Sub-Inspector, In charge of Armed Constabulary, Tauranga. The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland.
Enclosure 1 in No. 27. Captain Walker to Lieut.-Colonel Feasee. Sic— Opotiki, 7th March, 1870. I have the honor to report that I have just received information to the effect that a party of the Urewera have made their appearance at Opepe. They fell in with some of the Whakatohea, whom they asked to join them, and on their refusing were made prisoners. The Whakatohea have abandoned their settlements, some taking to the bush, and the remainder have gone by sea to Torere and Te Kaha. The object of the Hauhaus is evidently to try and get the friendlies to join them. I have sent to Ohiwa for 100 of the Whanganui Natives in order to intercept the party on their return, and in the meantime I proceed with a small mounted party to ascertain the track they have taken. I have, &c, Lieut.-Colonel Fraser, G. P. Walkee, Captain, Commanding Bay of Plenty District. Commanding Opotiki.
Enclosure 2 in No. 27. Opotiki, 7th March, 1870. This Address is to Ohiwa, as far as Whakatane, and to all the other Settlements northward. Feiends, — This is to inform you that the Hauhaus have made a descent on Opape. It was on Monday that they made the attack, and the people of that place have in consequence been obliged to fly. Some have gone to tho eastward, while others are wandering in the bush, and it is not yet known whether they will find their way here, or whether they will remain in the open bush country. This is the end of my address to you. To Topia, Ohiwa. Captain Walker.
Enclosure 3 in No. 27. Captain Walkee to Lieut.-Colonel Feaser. Sir,— Opotiki, Bth March, 1870. Acting on the information which I received (as stated in my report of yesterday's date), I proceeded to the Waihoua, where I was informed the Hauhaus were at 2 a.m. this morning, with 25 of the Arawa from Ohiwa (who arrived here last evening), and one sergeant and 17 men of the Militia on pay. The Whanganui Natives whom I had sent for, not having arrived till late at night, were unable to march through fatigue. My object in proceeding with so small a party was simply to ascertain the position of the enemy, or, if they had retired, to find out the direction they had taken, as I was apprehensive of the safety of William King's kainga at Torere, most of whose men were absent, doing duty in the field with Major Kemp, and whose pa is greatly weakened in consequence. After proceeding some distance up the Waihoua Valley, I found that the Arawa had returned and left me unsupported. We here found a Maori boy who had been hiding in the scrub, and by him I was told that both his parents had been killed by Te Kooti the night before, and that the Hauhaus were at a cultivation about two miles from where we then were, and that they were going back that morning. He also stated that Omarumutu Pa was occupied by the Hauhaus. At this time I heard some firing from the direction of the pa, and thinking that the Arawa were engaged, I returned to support them. On arriving at the beach I saw six or seven of the Arawa posted behind a sandhill about 300 yards in front of the pa, firing into it, without, however, their fire being returned, or seeing any sign of its being occupied. The rest of the Arawa were some distance from them, stationed on a point terminating the sandhills on to the beach. As the six Natives kept up their firing for a considerable time without its being returned, and no sign of life being visible in the pa, I ordered the Europeans to return to Opotiki, and stayed with the Arawa on the sandhill for nearly an hour. As there still continued to be no movement in the pa, I told the Arawa to return, some of them now having already followed the Europeans. They told me that two of their men had gone to the pa, and that they would return when they came back. I then left them, and, shortly after arriving in Opotiki, a Maori came in and reported that Hctaraka Mahi and Te Awaawa had been shot. The Arawa shortly after arrived with the bodies of the unfortunate men. It appears that they must have left the main body when proceeding up the Waihoua, and gone towards the pa, at the foot of which they were killed. The Arawa, on hearing the shots, must have returned ; but at the time of my leaving them they had no idea that such a melancholy event had happened. All accounts seem to agree that Te Kooti himself is with this body of Hauhaus, which is not
A.—No. Bb,
12
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
numerous, and that his main force is at Waioeka. The Whanganuis decline doing anything unless re-inforced, except sending out scouting parties, which I have prevailed upon Topia to do. My information says that 40 or 50 of the Whakatohea women and children are prisoners, which is not at all improbable, as there are few of them here, the majority, I am told, having taken to the bush on Te Kooti's first appearance, and the men, as I stated in my report of yesterday, having taken to their boats. No arms or ammunition have fallen into the enemy's hands, Eanapia having taken the precaution of putting them into the boats. The cultivations of the Whakatohea are likewise comparatively untouched. The enemy's retreat is towards Waioeka. I have, &c, Lieut.-Colonel Fraser, G. P. Walker, Captain, Commanding Bay of Plenty District. Commanding Opotiki District.
Return of Killed at Waiaua. Hetaraka Maihi, shot through head and tomahawked. Te Awaawa, shot through head, chest, and thigh. Thos. F. Baker, Assist.-Surgeon, A.C. • Bth March, 1870.
No. 28. Wieemu Kingi to Major Maie, B.M. To Me. Mair— 16th March, 1870. Friend, salutations to you. I wish to tell you that I have been to Tamaikowha's place. We have actually seen him and his companions. Feace was made with him by Major Kemp. Beace is now made with his tribe; there are fifty of his own tribe. It was through this that our force did not go to Maungapowhatu. It would take one night to get from Tauwharemanuka to Maungapowhatu. We came back from Tauwharemanuku. Tamaikowha said to me, in fact to all of us : " Beturn outside ; these are the days in which To Kooti is at work at Waihaua and Torere." Well, we returned from that place and slept at Waimana, from Waimana we came to Opotiki. There had been an attack at Waimana, some of Te Arawa fell at Omarumutu. The Whakatohea came down quietly. The only persons who ran away to Torere were Te Eanapia and Te Teira, and their hapu; however, their relatives among the Hauhau said that Te Eanapia and Te Teira should remain; that is why they were spared. Bawiri and all Ngatirua, and all Ngatingahere have been taken. Te Awanui and others number thirty ; it was through paying attention to a letter that they went in one party. Had they been at Waiaua they would still have been taken; however, they were ready to bolt. The reason why there was no attack made upon Torere, was that the Whakatohea reported there were a great many men there. Te Kooti asked : " How many men are there ? " That tribe replied " fifty," so it was not done. Also, Te Matenga and Henare and all the tribe were very steadfast. Well, we found them in the pa; the women have been driven into the bush. Friend, I have a great deal more to say ; let it wait until my work is finished, and then I will write again. I am very much pleased with Mr. Clarke, in fact with both of you, for placing fifty men at my settlement. Through that my tribe has been saved. Major Mair, B.M. Wiremu Kingi.
No. 29. Memorandum by Mr. Commissioner Claeke for the Hon. the Defence Ministee. Tauranga, 17th March, 1870. I wish to draw the attention of the Hon. the Defence Minister to the present unsatisfactory provision for the protection of the settlements inland of Matata. Kokohinau is a Ngatiawa pa, belonging to the old loyal chief Bangitukehu; unfortunately, the bulk of his people are not to be depended on. This pa is the key to all the settlements between Matata and Ohiwa, and, consequently, of the overland route to Opotiki. Unless this is held the Natives must either abandon the place or go over to the enemy for personal safety. Whakatakane and Ohope must also be abandoned on the one side, and Barawai and the Ngatimanawa settlement on the other. The enemy has already made a raid, and destroyed a Native mill erected at great cost, the property of the chief Tukehu. I would strongly recommend that Captain Preece be authorized to enrol ninety men from amongst the Arawa and Ngatiawa, and take up a position in the neighbourhood of Te Teko (a mile and a half above Kokohinau), and, after throwing up a redoubt, scout towards Fort Galatea on the one side and the Baungaehe Eoad on the other, and otherwise act in concert with Captain Mair, whose force should also be raised to eighty men. Captain Breece could detail some of his force to do the transport work necessary to supply his force from the Matata. Captains Breece and Mair to have the sole control of the men under their respective commands. The Hon. the Defence Minister. H. T. Claeke, Civil Commissioner.
No. 30. His Honor J. D. Oemond to the Hon. the Defence Ministee. Sic,— . Napier, 15th March, 1870. I have communicated to you by telegraph all proceedings of importance connected with the operations in progress against Te Kooti and the Urewera. Bopata marched from Ngatapa last
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
13
A.—No. SB-
Thursday week, the 3rd instant, for Maungapowhatu, where he expected to meet Kemp, and thence the combined force would move on Waikare-Moana. Nothing has been heard since of, or from, Eopata since he left Ngatapa, so that there is scarcely any doubt he is well into the Urewera country before now. I enclose copies of report of Mr. Hamlin ; also of Mr. Witty's last report of a scouting expedition from Mohaka, from which I gather that the enemy is not on the south side of the lake, and must be in force somewhere about the other side of Waikare-Moana, or at Buatahuna; and of letters sent by me to the Native chiefs. You will notice that I have requested Sub-Inspector Newland to take some of the Constabulary, if it be necessary, to induce the Native force to move. I hope that Onepoto will by some means be occupied; it would I fear have a bad effect, and prejudice the success of the operations, if our allies reached Waikare-Moana and found no support from this side. I shall go myself to Wairoa as soon as the Sturt's boiler is repaired, and see personally that no exertions are wanting in •opening up communication with Eopata. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister. J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure 1 in No. 30. Major Westeup to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir, — Turanganui, Poverty Bay, 3rd March, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 22nd February, enclosing copy of instructions from the Hon. the Defence Minister to Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell. The expedition under command of Major Eopata Wahawaha would be in the neighbourhood of Makaretu, near Ngatapa, last night. Eopata decided to push straight through to Maungapowhatu, and if he found no enemy there, he would proceed to Waikare-Moana. Two Native expeditions start to-day as corps of observation, one to Maungatu, up the main valley, the other to Waihau, Hungaroa, and towards Puketapu via Euakituri; this will blockade all the leading roads, and enable the survey party under Mr. Munro to push forward without fear. The only expense to the Government will be the cost of a few bags of biscuit. I have, &c, The General Government Agent, Napier. Charles Westrup, Major.
Enclosure 2 in No. 30. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to the Officer Commanding, Wairoa District. Sir,— Te Kapu, Bth March, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that I reached Te Marumaru at 1.30, and found the body of the friendly Native killed by the enemy yesterday. He was stripped of arms and accoutrements and .a new shawl, but was not mutilated. He was allowed to get within six feet before fired on, such was the nature of the enemy's concealment. The body we brought away. There were some signs of one of the enemy having been wounded, but not sufficient to warrant my saying that he was killed. Beyond & doubt, the enemy were, from all outward signs, full twenty strong, and had been lurking about for two or three days, but had not lit any fires, feeding on fruit, and well concealed. I went on as far as ■Omaruhakeke, and found the enemy had taken off to Orewha, a place a little distance in from the right bank of Euakituri. The leading chiefs, Ihaka, Paora, and others, having stayed behind, the rest of the force would not go on. I shall endeavour to get them to start up by Waiau to-morrow. I have, &c, The Officer Commanding, Wairoa District. E. E. Hamlin.
Enclosure 3 in No. 30. Mr. J. W. Witty to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Wairoa, 11th March, 1870. I have the honor to report for your information that my men at Mohaka were just going to start for Putere, and to form a junction with Mr. Hamlin, when I received news from the Wairoa that the expedition intended to start up the Wairoa had been abandoned, at any rate for a time. Under these circumstances I thought the best plan to adopt would be to take a small party and scout the Mohaka end of the lake, and I accordingly started with twenty-five men. On arriving at the Putere, from the general appearance of the place, the potatoes, apples, and peaches not having been touched, although in the greatest profusion, we could easily see that no Natives have visited this locality for some time past. At night we ascended the highest hill in the neighbourhood, from whence we could look down on the Putere, Putahi, Tukerangi, and Te Kiwi, and also the ranges on the opposite side of the Wairoa Lake ; here we kept sentry all night, but saw no signs of fire or smoke in any direction; it was a bright moonlight night (but bitterly cold at this exalted altitude), and, with the glass, could have seen & match lighted for miles in any direction this side of the lake, except Onepoto and the Waiau Biver, but, however, we saw no signs of life. The next day we visited some other cultivations on the Waiau and the Waihua Bivers, but saw no tracks of any description. Having heard that Hamlin's party had seen tracks crossing the Waiau in the direction of the Waihau Biver, I sent out four men, under Tepane, at the same time as I started ; these men remained on the high ranges above the Waihau all night, from where they could see Te Ariki and the part of the Waiau country which we could not see, and they report no smoke fires visible in that direction. As 4
A.—No. 8b
14
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
this is rather au important look-out, I have sent six more men up there to-day, and they will return-to-morrow night; from here, they command the Ohinepaka valley track. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond. James W. Witty.
Enclosure 4 in No. 30. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Sub-Inspector Newland. Sir,— Napier, 10th March, 1870. I send the p.s. " Sturt" to ascertain how affairs are progressing at the Wairoa. I trust the expedition has moved on towards Waikare-Moana; and in the event of that being tho case, my former instructions as to the disposal of the Constabulary will remain unaltered. In the event however of the expedition being checked, I have to convey to you other instructions, and to request you will carry the same out as far as practicable. Should tho Native force be checked, I shall wish you to confer with Mr. Hamlin, and ascertain whether the presence of a small body of Europeans would insure an advance to Onepoto. I believe that it would, and I should wish you to take every available man of the Constabulary essential to tho occupation of that post. Tho men would have to carry their rations with them ; and when the position was once gained, it would probably be easy to withdraw the Constabulary, whom it would be difficult to feed there wdthout the establishment of a transport service from Te Ariki, which is out of the question, as if once commenced we should have to provide for the entire force in that manner. In the event of your employing the Constabulary to promote the occupation of Onepoto, you are authorized to place twenty-five men of the Militia or Military Settlers on pay, for the purpose of occupying the blockhouse at Te Kapu, where you would place fifteen men, and at the redoubt at Clyde, where you would station the other ten ; and in the event of your requiring to take the Constabulary on with the expedition to Onepoto, Mr. Hamlin will arrange to leave, say, twenty Natives at Te Ariki, who with four or five Constabulary could hold that post during the temporary absence of the Constabulary. Should the expedition have received a check, I believe the course I have named will insure a forward move, and I would urge upon you that it is of the greatest importance that the Ngatiporou and Wanganui expeditions should not find, on arrival at Waikare-Moana, that no occupation from this side has taken place. It is unnecessary for me to add more. As I before stated, if the expedition is moving forward, and no delay in occupying outposts be likely to occur, then abide by the former instructions, and occupy Te Kapu and Te Ariki with the Constabulary; but if there be any hitch, do your utmost to lead the expedition on, by associating the Constabulary with them in the advance. I shall be obliged by your furnishing me with a statement of what ammunition you have on hand, as you may be called upon for a supply by Eopata or Kemp ; also, be good enough to state any other things which are likely to be required. I have directed to be sent to your address by this opportunity four tents and some breech-loading ammunition. If you find it necessary to take tho Constabulary to the front, please lose no time, and carry out what I have named, as the speedy occupation of Onepoto is essential to the success of the expedition into the Urewera country. I have, <fee, To Sub-Inspector Newland, Commanding, Wairoa. J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure 5 in No. 30. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Tamihana. Friend, — This goes to you by Mr. Hamlin, who will convey to you the news about Te Kooti, and how he has been hunted into the Urewera country ; also how Mr. McLean and the Government are sending forces there after him. He will also tell you what the Government ask you to do in assisting in crushing this reptile, the murderer of your brother and people. Friend, we rely on you to do your share in this work, and with Ihaka Whaanga and our other friends to end the trouble Te Kooti and the other bad men who are with him have brought upon the country. Be careful in the selection of the men you send to fight, in which Hamlin will assist you. Only Hamlin will accompany you and the people, and it will be for you, the chiefs, with him to arrange the plans against the enemy. From your friend, To Tamihana. J. D. Oemond. [Same letter to Paora A.patu, only leaving out reference to brother.]
No. 31. The Hon. the Defence Ministee to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir, — General Government Offices, Auckland, 21st March, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 15th instant, detailing the steps you had taken to get an onward movement made by the Constabulary and Native forces to the Urewera country. I regret very much the absence of zeal on the part of the Wairoa Natives, and I expect that the report with reference to Eopata's return to that district must have originated with those Natives, who have shown such an unwillingness to afford co-operation against the enemy. Mr. Locke and Mr. Hamlin appear to have used their best endeavours to induce the Natives to take some decided action. The instructions you have issued, and the course you have adopted under the very difficult circumstances in which you were placed, fully merit the approval of the Government. I quite recognize the
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A.—No. 8*
15
efforts you are using to get the Natives on your side to co-operate with Eopata and the other tribes who have taken the field against the enemy. His Honor J. D. Ormond, I have, &c,
General Government Agent, Napier. Donald McLean.
No. 32. The Hon. the Defence Minister to His Honor J. D. Oemond. Sic, — General Government Offices, Auckland, 21st March, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of Major Westrup's letter to you of the 3rd instant, in which he mentions the departure of the expedition under command of Major Eopata, who had decided to push straight through to Maungapowhatu and on to Waikare-Moana. I have also perused with much interest Mr. Witty's report of the movements of tho scouting party under his command, and feel gratified to find that the Mohaka Natives display so much zeal in the present movements against Te Kooti. I have also the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your instructions of the 10th instant to SubInspector Newland, Commanding at tho Wairoa, and to convey to you my entire approval of them. His Honor J. D. Ormond, I have, &c, General Government Agent, Napier. Donald McLean.
No. 33. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Napier, Ist April, 1870. I have the honor to, acknowledge your two letters of the 21st instant, written in reply to reports made by me respecting operations endeavoured to bo carried out from the Wairoa into the Urewera country, and I am gratified to find the course pursued by me has met with the approval of tho Government. I believe an expedition has now left the Wairoa for Waikare-Moana, composed of Constabulary, Mohaka Natives, and Hapimana's people, in all about 130 strong. The Natives were to be accompanied by Messrs. Hamlin and Witty, and the force would, I think, be able to ascertain whether the enemy are in any force at Waikare-Moana Lake, and what is going on in that district, —■ information which might be of considerable value at the present time. I have, <fee, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Ormond.
No. 3-1. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Napier, 19th March, 1870. I have the honor to enclose copies of correspondence respecting tho proposed expedition from Wairoa, and regret to have to report that the Natives have at length declined to go up to the lake. There is no doubt the fear that the enemy will come down upon their settlements in their absence is the main cause. The force of Constabulary was too small to attempt moving it to the lake, and I have had no option but to leave things as they are. I have sent a letter to the care of Sub-Inspector Newland, addressed to Eopata, in case he opens communication with Wairoa, telling him the reason he has not been supported, and that food and ammunition will be supplied on his requisition. lam inclined to believe Eopata will come out at Wairoa. I have requested Mr. Witty and the Mohaka Natives to make an expedition by way of Putere, to where they can look down upon Lake Waikare-Moana, and got what information they can of what is going on there. They went the other day to this position, and I have no doubt will go again, and they will probably ascertain whether there is any indication of Eopata being at WaikareMoana. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Oemond.
No. 35. The Hon. the Defence Minister to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir, — General Government Offices, Auckland, 23rd March, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated 19th March, informing me that the Wairoa Natives have declined to go up to Lake Waikare-Moana. I have directed Mr. Clarke, C.C. at Tauranga, to send 90 Arawas, under the command of Captain Preece, to take up a position at To Teko, two miles above Kokohinau. This will afford protection to the friendly Natives at the latter place, who have lately suffered from an attack of Te Kooti's party, aud will, moreover, be a great check on any movement of the enemy on Whakatano or Matata. Captain Mair's force at Kaiteriria has also been increased to eighty men, so that these two officers will be able to send out scouting parties from their respective posts. You will be good enough to let Major Eoberts know of these alterations, as it may be of great assistance to him if he moves towards Eangitaiki. I have directed Lieut.-Colonel St. John to proceed to Opotiki this day, and assume command of the force in that district. I have, &c, • His Honor J. D. Ormond, Donald McLean. General Government Agent, Napier.
Ai—No. Bb.
16
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
No. 36. His Honor J. D. Oemond to the Hon. tho Defence Ministee. Sic,— Napier, 19th March, 1870. I have the honor to enclose, for your information, copy of a letter from Poihipi, covering a letter he had received from Tamati Ngapora and Hauraki, and of my reply thereto. I send the letter as it is of some interest. The information Poihipi has received from the people who brought the letter is to the same effect as what is reported from other quarters. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Oemond.
Enclosure 1 in No. 36. Poihipi Tukaieangi to His Honor J, D. Oemond. Me. Oemond, — Tapuacharuru, 14th March, 1870. Friend, salutations to you. A messenger has arrived from Waikato (that is to say) from the King, requesting me to go and see him. I have sent an answer back to that request, that I would not go to Waikato. It is better for you to come to Taupo ;it is for the Governor to decide. He has expressed a very strong desire. lam trying to find out the reason —whether for the purpose of making peace. This is all on that subject. Their news is that Tahua and Te Waru, these are friends of Te Kooti's, have been left behind at Te Aroha. Manga, Bewi, Arahewa and Tahua are waiting for To Kooti, when they will all return to Taupo, here, and fight. They will attack this place on the 16th. This is their news. I will explain ; let the Europeans and Natives remain to fence, to guard, on the road, and not scatter all over Taupo, for fear they (the enemy) find it out and combine, and thereby gain strength. This is my idea, if fighting sholud take place here. However it is for you to decide. From your friend, Poihipi Tukaieangi.
Enclosure 2 in No. 36. Haieaki and Tamati Ngapora to Poihipi. To Poihipi,— Hingai, 12th March, 1870. Salutations to you. Iharaia has gone to your place to fetch you, so that you may come. Do not have any misgivings on account of my absence in not coming myself. Iharaia is the same as myself. When they arrive there, come ; do not stay away, or feel any misgivings because the King has not addressed you. The message is the one I took you before. These are sent purposely for you. Secondly, the King himself sent them purposely to bring you. For the future do not stay away ; come, and for the future come. Be no longer deaf, come. This is all. From Hairaki, Tamati Ngapora.
Enclosure 3 in No. 36. His Honor J. D. Oemond to Poihipi. "To Poihipi,— Napier, 19th March, 1870. Friend, I have your letter of the 14th March, with tho letter from Tamati Ngapora and Hairaki which accompanied it. Ido not understand that letter. Why are you asked to go away from Taupo at this time, when their news to you is that Taupo is to be attacked by Kooti and those other men they name. I consider your answer a good one, let them come to you as you have proposed. If the desire is peace, they will do so. Friend, my advice to you at this time is to be on your guard. I have told the soldiers to be so, for lam inclined to think Te Kooti will come out at Taupo. We are doing what you recommend, viz. guarding the road. Friend, continue to tell me your thoughts as they arise ;I am glad to hear them. These letters of yours that I am answering I have sent to Mr. Fox and Mr. McLean. I am your friend, Oemond.
No. 37. The Hon. the Defence Minister to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir, — General Government Offices, Auckland, 24th March, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your Honor's letter of the 19th instant, enclosing correspondence between Poihipi and yourself, relative to an invitation he has received from. Waikato to visit the (so-called) King, and to inform your Honor that I fully approve of your reply to Poihipi. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, Esq., Napier. Donald McLean.
No. 38. Major Mair, 8.M., to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sic,— Tauranga, 23rd March, 1870. In the ahsence of Mr. Clarke at Botorua, I have the honor to inform you that Eopata Wahawaha arrived at Ohiwi from Maungapowhatu on the 20th instant, and proceeded on the 21st to Opotiki. I am only in possession of the bare facts which 1 have related.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
17
A.—No. 8*
There is no other Native news of any importance. Captain Gundry is continuing his survey of the Botorua road without interruption. I have, &c, The Hon. D. McLean, Auckland. W. G. Mair, E.M.
No. 39. The Hon. tho Defence Minister to Major Male, E.M. Sic,— General Government Offices, Auckland, 2nd April, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge tho receipt of your letter, dated the 23rd ultimo, reporting the arrival of Major Eopata at Ohiwa, and his departure for Opotiki, and also that Captain Gundry is continuing his survey of the Eotorua road without interruption. I have, Ac, Major Mair, E.M., &c, Tauranga. Donald McLean.
No. 10. Lieut.-Colonel St. John to Lieut.-Colonel Lyon. Sir,— Opotiki, 30th March, 1870. 6 p.m. I have the honor to inform you that Mr. Porter has just arrived with the following intelligence. On the 25th instant Eopata attacked Maraetahi under the impression that there were only Whakatoheas there. From the slight resistance offered, it was not guessed Te Kooti was present. After an hour's firing the pa was abandoned, the fugitives from it falling into the hands of Kemp, who was marching down, after taking prisoners all the Whakatohea up river. The total number of killed on the enemy's side is nineteen, prisoners over 300. Among them are about twenty of Te Kooti's immediate followers, whom Topia refused to give up to Eopata for execution according to their merits. To Kooti himself has escaped with about twenty men. His track lies towards the Waimana, but he must have doubled back, as a following party reached Te Pongi, and found the Urewera had all deserted him. Eakuraku, Hira Te Popo, Kereopa, and Karanama have also got off, but Hakaraia is killed. Mr. Porter has a letter signed by Eanapia, showing the complicity of the friendly Wakatoheas, inasmuch as it announces a present of ammunition and caps. The prisoners and the whole of the force will be down the day after to-morrow r. I send this hurried letter in hopes of its catching the Tauranga steamer to-morrow, and beg to suggest that the majority be moved from here, as we have not supplies for such a force for any length of time. Besides this, I presume some investigation will take place about Banapia's complicity. I have, &c, J. H. H. St. John, Lieut.-Colonel Lyon, &c, Auckland. Lieut.-Colonel.
No. 11. Lieut. Poster to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Opotiki, 21st March, 1870. In accordance with the wishes of Major Eopata Wahawaha, I have the honor to report upon the proceedings of the expedition of Ngatiporou under his (Bopata's) command, and do so by the following extracts from the rough diary kept during the march. The expedition, 370 strong, marched from Turanga on the 28th February, following on the Ngatapa track and that followed by Te Kooti. Nothing of any importance transpired up to the sth March, wdien, on reaching an old camp of Te Kooti on the Hungaroa, we found the remains of three persons, a man, woman, and child, no doubt refugees from Ngatapa. Bth March. —ln a branch of tl>o Hungaroa we captured a woman and four children. The husband was absent at the time from his family. Woman reports herself as one of a bush tribe, Ngatikowhatu, having been absent over twelve months from the tribe. It appears that while at Maungapowhatu a letter from the Kawanatanga had reached the chiefs of Urewera, offering a rongo pai. The majority of the tribe were inclined to accept terms, but, influenced by Te Kooti, the chiefs refused. Acting upon this information, Eopata determined upon a plan of operations to test the sincerity of the Urewera. Eopata's intention was to take prisoners all those who did not resist, collecting them as we marched ; on reaching Waikare-Moana to send all the prisoners to Wairoa, and to uso Waikare as a base of operations to search for Te Kooti, having cleared his supporters from the Buatahuna and other places. 9th March. —Our advanced guard captured six more of Ngatikowhatu, two men, two women, and two children. Wlh March. —Found remains of three more of Te Kooti's victims. 13th March, —Before starting this morning two parties of 80 men were told of by Eopata, one commanded by himself and the other by me. Main body in charge of Henare Potao. Nearing Maungapowhatu our tracks diverged, I taking the direction of Te Eakiroa's pa, with orders to surprise, if possible, without firing. Approaching the pa, I divided my force into three, advancing by both flanks and by the centre, sending the guide in advance with flag. I charged the place from all sides ; took the whole of the occupants prisoners without firing a shot. Number of prisoners, 40—men, women, and children. Bakiroa was unfortunately absent with Te Kooti. While getting prisoners together, heard firing in direction of Toriatai, Bopata's position. On reaching Eopata's position I w ras informed that, when taking possession of the place, he found it evacuated, but that two of the men, while in search of food, had been fired at, and ono killed. Men were at once in pursuit, but could not succeed in finding the enemy. Among the prisoners taken were five men who were with Te Kooti as late as tho engagement at Eotorua. From one of them I have gained some important information, of which I make a separate 5
A. —No. 8b
18
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
report. One prisoner, Iharaira Motu, reports Major Kemp having gone back from Tawhana, and had left a rongo pai with Tamaikowha; Eopata appeared greatly annoyed at this proceeding of Kemp's. 14sth March. —The Urewera was sent by Bopata to the chiefs to obtain further information referring to Major Kemp's rongo pai. Eeturning at night he reports a party of Urewera. coming to attack us, but on getting Eopata's letter sent a meremere as a maunga rongo, also letter herewith attached. Eopata has been greatly perplexed by this proceeding of Major Kemp's, as all his plans are frustrated by the false peace. 16th March. —The, Urewera was here released by Eopata at Taueka. We have since heard it was he who murdered Bennett White, and took him to Maungapowhatu to eat him. 11th March. —Captured two of Tamaikowha's men, but were afterwards compelled to release them. Tawhana, Tamaikowha's Pa, was abandoned when we approached it. 20.7. March. — Beached Ohiwa. Bopata saw Kemp at the pa. 21st March. —Beached Opotiki, and found Major Kemp and force had started last night. We march to-morrow for the Waioeka, where Bopata fully expects to fall upon Tc Kooti. ■ During our march we could not obtain any information as to his whereabouts. Concluding this report, I have further to inform you that, during the whole march, only two days were allowed for rest, Bopata urging the men on to the utmost. T. W. Portee, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. Lieutenant, Poverty Bay Volunteers.
No. 12. Major Eopata to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Me, McLean,— Opotiki, 21st March, 1870. My parent! salutations to you. I have arrived at this place. I came by way of Turanga to Maungapowhatu. I have with me the people of Maungapowhatu: I myself have made peace with them. I did not treat them as those with whom Te Kepa made peace were treated. Peace was made and they were left in the bush. I believe that it [the peace] will be of no avail. My peace-making was not done in that way. I will take them to my own place, but I will not make slaves of them on account of this peace-making. That is all. My word to you is, do you decide that I alone am to have charge of them. The Ngatiporou want to get hold of them to be their slaves. You must say decisively that they are to be with me only. Had they been taken in battle, that would have been proper ; but as it is, peace was made. That tribe, Ngatikowhatu of Te Eeinga, Te Wairoa, I will leave here to be conveyed by the steamer to my place on the other side of Tuparoa —Mataahu. Let them all be taken —men, women, and children. But let a steamer come here to wait in the event of Te Kooti escaping when Igo to Waiocka. If he should go to Turanga, I can be conveyed thither by steamer, so that I can soon get there ; for we cannot exist in the bush. My biscuits have been eaten, the journey was so long. We thought that there was food here, but behold To Kepa's force has eaten it all up, the food being all of one sort. There is no meat in the bush. Should Te Kooti go to Turanga, I ought to be conveyed thither by steamer. Should he to Maungapowhatu, I. cannot go there for want of food, and also on account of the cold. If I cannot go there now, I will go by and by. Borter, my European friend who is with me, will tell you all about our present expedition, for I have put the matter into his hands. He will inform you of all, wdiether right or wrong, in this expedition. I have also to inform you that the captives are suffering from the effects of cold. I cannot help it. There are twenty-four adults, male and female ; and twenty-five children, male and female. They require blankets, shirts, trousers, gowns, and calico; also some spades with which to cultivate ground for food. That is all. Your friend, The Hon. the Defence Minister. Major Eopata.
No. 13. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Major Eopata. Friend Major Bgpata,— Auckland, 25th March, 1870. Salutations to you and to j _our young men. I have received your letter of the 21st of this month, informing me of a peace having been made with Ngatikowhatu, and your having arrived at Opotiki. Well, when I saw that letter, the heart greeted you who had made that long journey. Tho Government praise you for your energy and your great work. You have carried on matters very well. The .Ngatikowhatu will live with you. I am very glad to have received a letter from you. I intend going to where you now are, but perhaps I shall not find you. Your friend, Major Eopata, Opotiki. Donald McLean.
No. 11. Mr. Claeke, Civil Commissioner, to the Undee Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sic,— Tauranga, 20th March, 1870. I have the honor to transmit, for tho information of the Hon. the Native and Defence Minister, the enclosed original report from Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell, on the recent successes of Te Kooti in the neighbourhood of Opotiki. I would drawr your attention to the copy of a letter from the Whakatohea chiefs Eanapia and Biahama Tiwrai, which is one of the enclosures of Colonel McDonnell's report. And I. cannot forbear drawing a marked contrast between the conduct complained of, and the treatment by Major Kemp, of Wanganui. of the notorious Urewera murderer and cannibal Tamaikowha.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A.—No. 8m
19
I would also respectfully submit that the present position of the Military Settlers of Opotiki and •our faithful allies to the eastward and westward of that settlement is very critical, so long as Te Kooti remains in the Waioeka Valley, where there is little doubt he will for a time establish himself, unless driven out. The report that the Urewera have separated themselves from Te Kooti is only partially true, as it is clear a considerable number of them were present at the attack on Opape. Tamaikowha's party never joined Te Kooti at any time. I also enclose a copy of a letter from Wiremui Kingi, the principal chief of Ngaitai, in which he acknowledges that the reason why his settlement, Torere, was saved, was because it was garrisoned by a force of fifty men. I would also beg of the Government to accept with caution his remarks against the Whakatohea Tribe. There is and also has been a shade of bitterness existing between the Ngaitai and Whakatohea, respecting the occupation by tho latter of Opapo. But at the same time I shall not be surprised if tho Whakatohea men join Te Kooti, not because they are disloyal, but because he has secured their women and children. Some of the women have recently escaped, and they report that it is the intention of Te Kooti to make an example of three or four of the principal men now in his hands, who have taken active part against him. The enclosed letters, arrived in Tauranga just half an hour after the " Sturt" left, and I am now about to send them by special orderly, Peter Grant. Be good enough to direct that he be sent back to Tauranga as soon as possible. I have, &c, H. T. Claeke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.
Enclosure 1 in No. 11. Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, to Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir, — Tauranga, 15th March, 1870. From reports received from Opotiki, it appears that a portion of Te Kooti's followers made a raid upon Opape, one of the Whakatohea settlements in that neighbourhood, and carried off some men, women, and children ; but from the very meagre nature of those reports, it is impossible to arrive at a correct estimate of the exact position of matters in that district, or of the operations (if any) being carried on against the enemy. I have therefore the honor to request (unless the instructions you have received to proceed to Taupo are imperative), that you would be good enough to visit Opotiki, and from personal inspection and investigation furnish the Government with a full report, so as to enable it to take such measures as will be necessary to prevent further disasters to our allies on the shores of the Bay of Plenty. As I am unable to proceed to the spot at once, you will not only confer upon me a personal obligation by acceding to my request, but will do the Colony a good service. I have, &c, Henry T. Claeke, Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell, Tauranga. Civil Commissioner.
Enclosure 2 in No. 11. Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell to Mr. 11. T. Clark, Civil Commissioner. Sir,— Maketu, 19th March, 1870. I beg to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 15th instant, requesting me to proceed to Opotiki, and from personal observation collect such information for the Government as to enable it to take steps to prevent further disaster in the District. On receipt of your letter I proceeded without delay to Opotiki, and now report for the information ■of the Government. I returned here at 4 a.m. this morning, having left Opotiki at 11.30 a.m. yesterday, and now forward what I have been able to collect, and which can be relied upon. Major Kemp, with some of Ngatiawa (the latter headed by Hori Te Kawakura) and some of the Whakatohea headed by Tiwai, started up the Waimana from Ohiwa in search of Te Kooti on or about the 3rd instant, as well as I can make out; Hone having told Major Kemp that they were sure to come across Te Kooti's trail. After pushing through the bush for some distance they cut a trail made by a strong body of men, and leading in tho direction of Opotiki. This trail was not followed, but the force went on along a small bush track leading to Tamaikowha's place, ' Tauwharemanuka.' On reaching Otara, two shots were fired by Tamaikowha and another Native, as a warning to their people at Tauwharemanuka; these shots were replied to by volley after volley from Kemp. _ A messenger was then sent on by Kemp with a flag of truce, and proposals of peace. The force halted for the night and went on next morning, and Kemp had an interview with Tamaikowha, who told Kemp he accepted peace with him, but that if any Pakeha came up the Waimana, either to settle or survey, he would serve them the same way he had served Bennett White, Moore, Beggs, and others. Peace was then made, and Major Kemp presented him with a revolver and ammunition. Tamaikowha told them that Te Kooti was at Opape, which information proved to be too correct, and that if they went there they would be sure to fall in with him. The force remained here four days after this, but two days were taken up with making peace. Tamaikowha had eighteen men with him. Topia with 140 men did not accompany this expedition, but on receipt of information given to him at Ohiwa, that Te Kooti was advancing on Opotiki, he moved off to that settlement and then to Opape, afterwards returning to Opotiki. On Major Kemp's return to Ohiwa, from his interview with Tamaikowha, he followed onTopia's track, and reached Opotiki on or about the 9th instant,
A—No. Bb.
20
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
where he and his force have been ever since, up to this date, living on the cultivations of the unfortunate Whakatohea, and rations supplied by the storekeeper of that place, on his orders countersigned by Captain Walker. It would appear that while peace negotiations with Tamaikowha were going on, Te Kooti made a sudden swoop upon two of the Whakatohea settlements, and succeeded in making prisoners one hundred and fifty souls. Men capable of bearing arms thirty ; the remainder, old men, women and children, besides forty stand of arms and twro kegs of ammunition. All the caps were in a separate place, and a Native (Tieri) succeeded in getting off with them, and reached Opotiki in safety. These caps are now in the possession of Tiwai. Six men and nine women escaped from Te Kooti after having been made prisoners, and report Te Kooti intended killing the men. Tiwai informed me he gave Major Kemp information that Te Kooti's fresh trail lay in the bed of the Waiaua Stream. " I told him," he went on to say, " I had seen their (Te Kooti's) fires, and if we hasten on we will catch him before ho can get away." Kemp replied, " Good; but I have no men" (ho had 230 Wauganuis, and 160 Whakatohea, Arawa, Ngaitai, and Ngatiawa, able and willing to take the field, making a total of 390 men). Kemp said, "I will await the return of Topia (who was then absent at Opape with 140 men), and on his arrival here we will hurihuri, (discuss) tho question of going out." On tho 16th Topia arrived at Opotiki; and Topia said to Kemp, "I am now here." Kemp replied, " I sent for you that we might assemble together here, as I expect Mr. McLean in a day or two, so wo will now wait for his arrival; but you, Tiwai and the Whakatohea, go you and fetch us food from Opape (six or seven . miles distant). This work will take you two days to accomplish." Tiwai did not consent to this. After this Topia returned to Opape to get potatoes from the cultivations of the Whakatohea ; and on tho 16th instant had dug up 100 baskets of potatoes, and Wi King's whaleboats at Torere had been sent for to convey this food to Opotiki. I will state here that Wi King and people have returned to the Eawhiti, partly to protect their own settlements from Te Kooti, and partly in disgust at the conduct of the Whanganui under Major Kemp. Tiwai, Te Eanapia and others said to Kemp, "Te Kooti is at Waiaua." This was on or about the 16th. Kemp replied, " Where is Te Kooti likely to go to from there ?" He replied, " Waioeka." Kemp said, "We will attack that place;" but he has not yet started. Kemp's people were over three weeks at Ohiwa, but never attempted to get information, though they were repeatedly told that Te Kooti was at Euatoki, eleven or twelve miles distant; but although over 400 strong, no demonstration was made. It now turns out that, after inarching .Ngaitai and Ngatipikiao to Ohiwa, and, in conjunction with Ngatihau, who had been at Ohiwa for some ten days, I proposed to march on the 20th ultimo for the ranges at Euatoki. Had that march been continued, we could hardly have avoided falling in with Te Kooti's force. I returned, on my way to Auckland, in accordance with instructions, and advised Kemp to carry out this plan; but no movement was made afterwards, with the exception of the one that led to the meeting with Tamaikowha. A. party under the command of Captain Walker, composed of about eighteen Europeans and twenty-three Natives, went to Opape to reconnoitre. Seven young Arawa, including Wi Maihi's son, crossed the river, and went up to what was supposed to be a deserted village, without Captain Walker's knowledge, to look in, as is usual with Natives. Coming unexpectedly on a picquet of Te Kooti's, who, I believe, was waiting to pounce upon Opotiki, they fired aud killed young Marsh and another Native. Some of the Natives throw the whole blame on Captain Walker. This is the old custom with Natives. If one Pakeha accompanied 500 Natives to battle and they got worsted, the fault would be that of the one Pakeha; if six Natives accompanied 500 Pakehas to battle and were victorious, the six Natives would say (and all other Natives back them out), "We showed the Pakehas how to do it; and if we had only been 100 strong, an end would that day have been put to the wars." There is no occasion for my saying anything in Captain Walker's defence in connection with this affair, but I will simply record my opinion that ho appears to have behaved with great judgment; and had he been so unwise as to have attacked the enemy with so small a force, composed as it was, he w 7ould in all probability have lost most, if not all, of his men. Hori Kawakura of Ngatiawa, Tiwai and To Eanapia of the Whakatohea, especially the latter, who are mad at the loss of their women, children, and relations, are most thoroughly disgusted with the apathy displayed by Major Kemp. He is, they say, " Major of eating and fishing, hakas and pukanas." That this Ope has no chance of falling in with or capturing Te Kooti. Hoani Ngamu, of the Arawa, and others say the same. So do Wi Kingi's Natives ; and Kawana Paipai told me they were all at loggerheads. All concur in saying that they are disgusted with Native officers and majors, and that if the information which has been given from time to time to Ngatihau (particularly since the last raid of Te Kooti's) had been furnished to European officers, majors or colonels, they would have acted like men, and Te Kooti might have been caught like a rat, for he was gorged with his late capture of the Whakatohea. Eanapia, To Teira, Hunia, Paora Hare Nikora, Hetaraka, Tieri, and others, obtained advances from Mr. Kelly,- —goods, clothing, &c, to the amount of £270 worth. They, to pay this account, had planted extra crops, trusting to realize and discharge their debts. Their crops are now being destroyed by the force, and their pigs are being killed. These Natives and Kawakura's asked me to head them, and lead them, with the Europeans, against the enemy. I should only have been too glad to have done so, but did not feel myself at liberty. Potatoes in any quantity can be procured from the European settlers at Opotiki, at from £3 to £3 10s. per ton, but Ngatihau prefer Jiving on the Whakatohea. The Whakatohea say, "We would not object if they would only fight, or let us fight; but to see them sitting down hakaing and dancing while Te Kooti is near, makes our hearts darker than ever, and Te Kooti's heart will be marama Topia and Kemp are not pulling together, and the Whanganui apart from Topia's force are much disunited. Kemp has now, he appears to think, full powers and a separate command ; just what he has been trying for ever since he served with Colonel Whitmore —I won't say under that officer. He is now eaten up with vanity, and appears to have lost his head, and gives orders to the small tribes
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A.—No. Bb,
21
round him, causing much offence. I do not think things are at all improved by the counsels of Sergeant Austin, who is attached to his staff. In your letter, as you merely requested me to obtain, from personal inspection, a report for the Government, I have done so to the best of my ability; but have refrained from comments of my own, or suggesting any plan of action suitable to the state affairs seem to be in. Major Kemp gave a letter to Tamaikowha, to deliver to Major Eopata of Ngatiporou, should he come across him, telling him that he had made peace with him. I sincerely trust he may deliver the letter in person. I have also the honor to enclose a letter addressed to you from the Whakatohea. I also forward a copy a letter received by me from Ensign Eushton, 0.V.E., for the information of the Government I leave on Monday for Taupo. Te Kooti was at Waioeka a few days since, and is reported to be there still. A move to that place was in contemplation when I left. I believe it was to have left to-day. I have, &c., H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Titos. McDonnell, Tauranga. Lieut.-Colonel, A.M.
Sub-Enclosure 1 to Enclosure 2 in No. 44. Ensign Eushton to Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell. Sic,— Opotiki, 18th March, 1870. I have the honor to forward to you, for the information of the Government, the following particulars relative to Majors Kemp and Topia's movements since they arrived at Ohiwa. On the " Sturt's" arrival at Ohiwa, with orders to strike off pay all European officers, at Major Kemp's request you allowed me to remain with him, to be attached to the Ngaitai and Whakatohea, part of Kemp's force. From the above date till he moved into the Waimana, he did not even send out a single scout. On tho Ist of March he got information that the mill at Kokohinau was burnt down, and that Te Kooti with his force was at Euatoki, about eighteen miles up Whakatane Valley. I urged him to march immediately into the Waimana, and he (Kemp) never moved after the receipt of this information until three days after. Te Kooti, in the meantime, had crossed over into the track leading to the Waiaua. When they marched, Kemp saw Te Kooti's track ; and although he was told by the chiefs o Ngatiawa, Ngaitai, and Whakatohea, that this was Te Kooti's trail, he took no notice, but crossed it, and marched up tho Waimana. Two days after, Te Kooti had taken the Whakatohea prisoners, two kegs of powder, and thirty or forty stand of arms. If he (Kemp) had moved when he got information of Te Kooti's whereabouts, he would have fought him and stopped him from getting into the Waiaua. I think it my duty also to state that nothing has been done with the exception of marching up the Waimana, and making peace with Tamaikowha, who has murdered three Natives and three European in this district during the last three years. The force is now at Opotoki, living on Government rations and eating up the cultivations of the Whakatohea, although Te Kooti's track is well known both by Kemp and Topia. I have not time to say more. I have, &c, Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell, J. E. Ef/shton, Ensign, Commanding Field Force. Opotiki Volunteer Bangers.
Sub-Enclosure 2 to Enclosure 2 in No. 44. Feiend Claeke,— Opotiki, 17th March, 1870. Salutations to you. This is to inform you that wo have been surprised by Te Kooti, and our women and children taken captives by him ; the total number taken by him, including men, women, and children, amounts to 170 persons. This has made us very sorry, and our sorrow has been increased by the fact that, in addition to the loss of our women and children, our plantations and food have been taken by Kemp and Topia Turoa. We should not be surprised if To Kooti had done this, as he is an enemy, and not one of us. As it is, wo have been sufferers at the hands of two parties, viz., To Kooti, and Whanganui—l mean Major Kemp. On account of these things wo are much cast down. This is another subject we are going to speak upon : —The movements of this war-party seem to me to be conducted in a very foolish manner. We have several times accompanied European expeditions but we never saw anything like this. This is the first time we have seen this war-party; and if it is left to them to follow up To Kooti, they will never be able to come up with him. As things are, we are very much cast down. We grieve much for our children. Had we been two days earlier in reaching this place, while Te Kooti was still on his way, we should have been in a better position and known what to do. As it is, we are much cast down, on account of the proceedings of this war-party. By whom shall these our grievances be removed ? Should any person hasten to our relief, there may be hope to see the day dawn upon us. It rests with you to put down or remove these evils ; and when, that is done, then peace and prosperity will follow. Friend, Mr. Clarke, this matter is now in your hands. It is for you to remove the evil. To Kooti is at present at Waioeka. He has stated that the settlements he is anxious to attack are Opotiki, Torere, and Ohiwa. This is another subject we wish to bring before you. Send us instructions what to do. If you say that we are to remain at Opotiki, or remove to any other place, good. Mr. Clarke, this is another request: we, tho persons who escaped when Te Kooti made his attack, are anxious to be enrolled or attached to the expedition against Te Kooti, to assist in the work now going on, lest we make the same mistake as we made before. . . We have made this proposal to Major Kemp, and he expressed himself willing that we should do so. We asked him by whom we were to be paid, and he said by the Government. So it is that we 6
A—No. Bb,
22
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
ask you to enlighten us upon this subject. If you discover that this letter is of outplace, write and say so—if right, write also. This proposal is not on our own account alone, but on behalf of the whole expedition. We scarcely know how to act. When your letter is received, then the people of the eastern settlements, who are willing to join the expedition, will know what to do. The point upon which they are not clear is the statement 'c that payment will only be given when Te Kooti is really taken." If this be the case, then we, the people of these eastern settlements, will not be willing to join in the pursuit. What we wish is, that the old system of daily pay be continued. Had we known of this new arrangement, we should not have joined in this present expedition. This is the end. Now, friend, send us a quick reply fo this letter. Let there be no delay. Na Te Eanapia Waiheka, Na Piahama Tiwai.
Enclosure 3 in No. 44. WiEEMtr Kingi to Major Male, E.M. To Me. Male,— 18th March, 1870. Eriend, salutations to you. I write to inform you that I have been on a visit to Tamaikowha's place, and we have seen him and his companions. Peace has been made with him by Major Kemp. Peace has been made with that tribe, who number fifty persons. This is the reason why our war-party did not reach the settlement of Maungapowhatu. It would have taken a day and night to have gone from Tauwharemanuka to Maungapowhatu. We therefore returned from Tauwharemanuka. Tamaikowha said to me, to us all, " You had better return to the Coast, as this is about the time that Kooti will make an attack upon Waimana and Torere." So we returned and reached Waimana, where we encamped for the night. While on our march from Waimana to Opotiki, the enemy made an attack on Waiaua. Some of tho Arawa fell at Oharamutu. The Whakatohea retreated quietly and in good order. Te Eanapia and Te Teira with their people were the only ones who fled to the settlement of Torere. As it was, it was through their relatives among the Hauhaus that they escaped and were saved. Bawiri, the Ngatirua, and the Ngatingahere were taken. Te Awanui and thirty of his people joined us, having heard of our movements by letter. Had they been at Waiaua at the time the attack was, they also would have been taken ; but even now they also are disposed to fly. The reason why Te Kooti did not make an attack upon Torere was because the Whakatohea told him that there was a strong party defending that settlement. Te Kooti inquired of them how many men there were, and he was told that there were fifty men ; and it was in consequence of this information that it was not taken. Another reason also was, that Te Matenga and Henare behaved with coolness and judgment. We found them occupying the pa, having sent their women and children to Te Kaha. Friend, there is much more that I could say, but must leave it for the present, having plenty to do. I will write again. Friend, I am much pleased with the arrangement made by Mr. Clarke and yourself for stationing fifty men at my settlement, by which means my people were saved from an attack. Wieemu Kingi.
No. 45. Lieut.-Colonel Haeington to Mr. Claeke, Civil Commissioner. General Government Office, Sic,— Auckland, 23rd March, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 20th instant, enclosing the report of Lieut.-Colonel McDonnell relating to the proceedings of Te Kooti in the neighbourhood of Opotiki, and am directed by the Hon. the Defence Minister to inform you that he intends to visit that place by the first opportunity, so as to ascertain personally the actual state of affairs. I have, &c, Philip Haeington, Lieut.-Colonel. H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Tauranga.
No. 46. Mr. H. T. Claeke, Civil Commissioner, to the TJndee Seceetaey, Native Department. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sic — Auckland, 31st March, 1870. I have the honor to acquaint you, for the information of the Hon. the Native Minister, that I arrived in Tauranga by the " Star of the South " on tho 14th instant. Directly on my arrival, I was greeted with the intelligence that Te Kooti had made a raid on the settlement of Opape, near Opotiki, and had carried off all the Whakatohea found in the place ; that Captain Walker, the officer in charge at Opotiki, had gone out with a small body of mounted men and a few Arawa from Ohiwa; that two of the Arawa had been killed, one the only son of the Chief Wiremu Maihi; but so meagre and unsatisfactory was the information, that I felt very much
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
23
A.—No. Bb.
perplexed. After consulting with Colonel McDonnell, then under orders for Taupo, I wrote him a letter, of which the enclosed is a copy, asking him to be good enough to proceed to Opotiki, and inquire into the circumstances of the attack, and report for the information of the Government. It was rumoured that, after taking away the Whakatohea, Te Kooti had returned in the direction •of Turanga. I therefore wrote a letter to the Commanding Officer at that place, telling him what had occurred, and requesting him to be on the alert. Captain Bendall, of the "Star of the South" kindly promised to forward the letter without delay. I was given to understand that, in consequence of the Provincial Council having made no provision for a pilot, Captain Carmichael was going to leave Tauranga. This having been reported to Gaptain Palmer, he directly began to make preparation for moving the vessel under his command out of the harbour, and thus deprive the settlers of the moral support, then so much needed, of one of Her Majesty's ships of war. On being made aware of this, I took the responsibility upon myself of detaining the Pilot, trusting, under the urgent circumstance of the case, that the Hon. the Defence Minister would approve of the steps I had taken. The copy of my letter to the Pilot is herewith enclosed. In accordance with instructions I had received, I wrote to Captain Gilbert Mair, requesting him to enrol a body of picked men, and carry out the instructions issued by the General Government Agent at Napier, and approved by the Hon. the Colonial Secretary; a copy of my letter to Captain Mair is enclosed. Captain Mair proceeded at once to carry out his orders. On the 22nd I proceeded to the Lake district, via Maketu and the Botoiti, my principal object being to ascertain the amount of labour that would be required to make a passable dray road to Eotorua, and also to visit those Natives who behaved so well in the fight with Te Kooti's party on the 7th of February last. I arrived at Kaiteriria on the 23rd, where Captain Mair was getting his people together preparatory to scouting the Kaingaroa plains. The men assembled appeared to be an able-bodied and active lot of men, most of whom were present at the fight on the 7th. Having heard from the Natives of Kaiteriria that there was a good line of road in the neighbourhood which might be adopted when the main line to Taupo is decided upon, I thought it as well to inspect it now that I was so near the spot, but having been separated from our guides, we became entangled in swamps and gulleys to such an extent that we had to return to Kaiteriria the same evening. Ido not consider that a practicable road could be made over the country we passed. On the 25th I went to Ohinemutu, where the Ngatiwhakaue hapu were in force. At a meeting held the same day, the Chiefs Ngahuruhuru and Korokai stated that they did not consider it prudent to leave Ohinemutu unprotected, as it was generally believed that the Ngatiraukawa and those people left behind by Te Kooti intended to attack it. They asked to have Ohinemutu made the head-quarters of Captain Mair's force, instead of Kaiteriria. They also requested to be employed on the road about being formed to Taupo. To these requests I replied that to move Captain Mair from his position at Kaiteriria would frustrate the object for which he was placed there, but that in case of actual danger they would be supported ; that with regard to the road, they could be employed upon it as soon as the best line had been decided on, and that a surveyor should be sent to lay off the road. In the evening I received letters from Tauranga and Auckland, calling for my immediate return to Tauranga, which I did on the following morning. On the 27th the Hon. the Native Minister arrived from Auckland, and I received his commands to proceed with him to Opotiki; but owing to an accident to the steamer, just on the point of starting, the journey was delayed. On the 28th I accompanied Mr. McLean to Maketu'on a friendly visit to the Arawa, returning again to Tauranga the following morning. On the evening of the 29th, another attempt was made to go to Opotiki; but after getting out of the harbour the captain found the sea getting up and the prospect of a gale at hand, and suggested that it would not be prudent to risk taking the vessel into Opotiki in her then crippled condition. The order was therefore given to proceed to Auckland for repairs. We arrived in Auckland yesterday evening. I have, &c, H. T. Claeke, The Under Secretary, Native Department, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.
Enclosure 1 in No. 46. Mr. Claeke, Civil Commissioner, to Captain Caemichael. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sic, — Tauranga, 15th March, 1870. I am informed that in consequence of there being no provision made by the Provincial Council for a pilot in this port, that it is your intention to proceed to Auckland by the next conveyance ; but as it appears to me that such a step in the present circumstances of the Bay of Plenty, must inevitably be detrimental to the public service of the Colony, by depriving the settlers of the moral support of the ships of Her Majesty's navy, I have the honor to request that you will be good enough to defer carrying out your intention for the present, at least until I receive replies to communications I have made to the General Government on the subject, and that you will continue your duties as pilot in this port, on the same terms as heretofore. I have, &c, Heney T. Claeke, Captain Carmichael, Pilot, Tauranga. Civil Commissioner.
A.—No 8b
24
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
Enclosure 2 in No. 46. Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, to Captain Mair. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir,— Tauranga, 14th March, 1870. I have tho honor to enclose, for your guidance and. information, a copy of a telegram received by the Hon. the Defence and Native Minister from the General Government Agent, Napier, being a copy of instructions sent you via Taupo. I have therefore to request that you will be good enough to take immediate steps to engage the services of sixty active Arawa, to be stationed under your command at Kaiteriria, ten of this number to be mounted. I need not enter into particulars of the services expected of you, as they are sufficiently clear in the copy of telegram above alluded to. I have requested Lieutenant Way to proceed at once to Maketu, to make arrangements for transport of supplies to Kaiteriria for your force. You will be good enough to report information and your movements to Major Eoberts, and send duplicates to this office. I have, &c, Henry T. Clarke, Captain Gilbert Mair, Tauranga. Civil Commissioner.
No. 47. Lieut.-Colonel Haeington to Mr. H. T. Clarke, Civil Commissioner. Sir, — General Government Office, Auckland, March, 23rd 1870. I am directed by tho Hon. the Defence Minister to acknowledge the receipt of your letter to the Pilot, at Tauranga, of the 14th instant, requesting him to remain there pending further instructions, and beg to inform you that he approves of the steps you have taken in this matter. As the Provincial Government Government declines to continue the services of the Pilot, you will be good enough to acquaint Captain Carmichael that he will be retained as Pilot by the General Government until further orders, and that he will have the same rate of pay, that he was receiving at the time the Provincial Government dispensed with his services. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil, Commissioner, Piiiltp Harington, Lieut.-Colonel. Tauranga.
No. 48. Major Kemp to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Mr. McLean,— Opotiki, 30th March, 1870. Salutations to you. Now listen. It was on the 20tli March that my force commenced to march, at 10 o'clock at night. On the 23rd day I sent forward three of my men, whoso names are Tapa, Ura, and Paul, and Austin, the European. There were 120 men that formed this party. They came upon a village which they attacked, and took eight adults (males). There were also four women and four children. After this a larger party moved on and attacked another pa of the Hauhaus. For this I told off 200 men. They attacked this pa and took every soul; not one escaped. After this they moved on to another pa and took all the people in it. At one pa they took ten women, two men, and two children, one a boy. From thence they pushed on, and here I increased the force to 300 men for the purpose of attacking the pa, in which were Hakaraia and Kereopa the eye-eater. Having reached the pa, dispositions were made to surround it. The pa was attacked, aud tho prisoners taken by Te Kooti, —I mean the people of the Whakatohea, —were recovered by us, those who were taken at Opape. Of tho Whakatohea, there were —Males, 57; females, 83; children, 78; total, 218. Belonging to To Kooti —Males taken alive, 23; females, 38; children, 26; men killed, 18; grand total, 323. There were amongst the killed three chiefs —Hakaraia, of the Ngaiterangi; Timoti, who commanded the vessel that brought the prisoners from the Chatham Islands, and Hakopa, a cousin of Te Kooti's. As for Kereopa, it was owing to the confusion that took place about the Whakatohea, or during the confusion that ensued, that he managed to escape ; and another thing, none of the Wanganui knew him by sight, and it was also owing to this that he managed to escape. Mr. McLean, I wish to bring under your notice the good doings of the Chief Wiremu Kingi, of the Ngaitai Tribe ;of Kerei Kawakura, of the Ngatiawa; both behaved well. Also the Ngatipukeko Tribe, headed by their chief Te Meihana: they all did their work equally well. This finishes my report. The Hon. tho Defence Minister. Major Kemp Te TAiTOKOKiTEtrRU. .
No. 49. Major Kemp to the Hon. the Premier. To William Fox, the Head of the Government. Opotiki, 30th March, 1870. Sir, salutations to you. I have received your letter, written from Napier on the 15th January, about To Kooti, Kereopa the eye-eater, and Hakaraia the son of Satan.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
25
A.—No. Bb,
On the 20th, the force under Topia and myself started, 490 in number, at 10 o'clock at night, being anxious not to be discovered by Te Kooti's scouts. In the morning we saw the party of Hauhaus that had gone out to catch the Whakatohea. After going for about half a mile they disappeared ; they were going in single file. Well, we went on through streams and over mountains. On the 23rd we came out at the Waioeka Gorge, and saw Te Kooti's party and his prisoners ; there we sent out the scouts ; they discovered the enemy encamped. At night I sent forward 120; the officers were Paora, Tapa, and Uruteangina, also Austin, a European. They rushed that camp, and captured all that were in it —eight, four women and four children. After that, I sent out 200, under Mci and Wiremu Kingi; they got to another encampment, and took the whole. After that the party went out again ; another attack was made, and all were taken; after that another attack, and all were taken ; and so on up to the sth, when a messenger came to me from Austin, then I sent out 300, because I heard that Kereopa the eye-eater, and Hakaraia the son of Satan, were there. Then that pa, Waipuna, was surrounded and a general attack was made ;it was like a mob of horses racing. The pa was taken; 18 were killed. Of Te Kooti's own force 35 were taken prisoners, 44 women, 30 children. The prisoners of the Whakatohea Tribe, who had been taken by Te Kooti, were re-taken by me in this pa — 45 men, 77 women, and 74 children. The total number, counting the living and the dead, is 323. The chief who was killed was Hakaraia the son of Satan, of Ngaitapuika. Timoti, who commanded the vessel when they came from Chatham Islands, and Hakopa, a cousin of Te Kooti, were killed. The Chief whose life I spared was Wiremu Kingi, of Turanga; the only man who escaped was Kereopa the eye-eater. All these camps, including the pa, were taken in one night. In the morning I sent out a party to look for Kereopa, the eye-eater; 200 went out. After two days they returned. After that I sent out 350, to surround Te Kooti; the 50 in advance of the 300, and the scouts, four in number, in advance of the 50. After marching for about two miles we heard the report of firearms from the force under Bopata, Major of Ngatiporou; then we could not decide what to do. A.t length I ordered the force to advance in single file, and after crossing various mountains one was caught and killed, and the force returned. Major Eopata's force killed one, they took one man and a woman ; so that they accounted for three. They made the attack on Te Kooti's pa; they came upon it suddenly, and not having sent scouts. Some of them say that the lot in front were dull fellows ; had it been Major Eopata's own hapu, some of the enemy would have been caught. That is all that is to be said. Sufficient. From your loving servant, Major Kepa Te Taitokokiteueu.
No. 50. Topia Turoa to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Me. McLean,— Opotiki, 30th March, 1870. Friend, salutations to you. Now listen. On the 20th day of March my war-party advanced on Waioeka. On the night before the 24th we came up with the Hauhaus at their first settlement. At 8 o'clock at night I attacked another of their positions. There were four men with me. We took it and took all the people prisoners, eight in number, principally women and children. On the same night we pushed on and attacked another position, and took all hands. From there we pushed on to the station occupied by Hakaraia, and hero we caught Hakaraia and Wiremu Kingi. Kereopa escaped, but Hakaraia was killed —there were eighteen killed in all. The prisoners belonging immediately to Te Kooti, including men, women, and children there, were eighty-six, and including those belonging to the Whakatohea who were there, in all 218 persons, taken by Te Kooti. The whole of the killed and wounded and prisoners amounted in all to 323. My friend, when this letter reaches you, I beg you to come here, that we may speak face to face, that we may talk matters over, for this reason, that I have been thinking of returning home ; but this matter we will leave until you come down. Friend, I think we should have taken Te Kooti, if it had not been that Eopata attacked the pa in which he was at the time. I think if I had had the storming or taking of the position we should have captured that man (Te Kooti). Topia Tueoa.
No. 51. Major Eopata to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Mr. McLean,— Opotiki, Ist April, 1870. My father, salutations to you. I have nothing now to say to you with reference to this our work. Captain Porter will have furnished you with full particulars of our proceedings. This is a letter of kindly sentiments towards the friend who has made the Natives of this Island what they are. I have one word to say to you, which is this: Pray come down and see us Ngatiporou, notwithstanding that you may be disappointed at our not securing Te Kooti. The proverb says, "It is a work to which one may return again." What could we do, owing to the difficult nature of the country? Had Te Kooti escaped when we attacked the pa, then there would be good cause for disappointment; as it was, he kept to the open bush, and before we could overtake him, your people had become exhausted with the fatigue of climbing or going up and down the precipices of this rough country. Captain Porter will give you all the particulars of this expedition. The Hon. the Defence Minister. Major Eopata. 7
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
A.—No. 8:b.
26
No. 52. Wiremu Kingi to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Mr. McLean,— Opotiki, Ist April, 1870. To you as a friend, salutations. I have a word which I wish to send you. That word is this : that you should come and pay a visit to Opotiki, now while your own peculiar people, the people of Wanganui and the Ngatiporou, are sitting here; then indeed you will hear how much there is to say. My friend, lam one, amongst others, who joined this expedition; I and my people, all. I have but little to say to you just now. When, however, you arrive here, I will then address you with reference to the work that has been done in these districts. Those of the Hauhaus who were killed in the attack by us there were nineteen; those who were taken prisoners, men, women, and children, altogether there were 300. I will say no more just now to you. My friend, my heart is grieved for the proceedings of these people, the Whakatohea. I should be glad if these people were removed to some other place, lest if they should remain here they may again escape and join the Hauhaus, and the blame bo laid upon me and my European friends at Opotiki. Na Wiremu Kingi TuTAuuARANGr.
No. 53. The Story of Te Kooti's Campaign, related by Wiremu Kingi. My own kainga is Turanga; xny grandfather lived there; my proper tribe being To Aowera (a subtribe of Ngatiporou). I am beginning so as to enlighten you about the evil of the Maoris to the Pakehas since the belief was given to them by the Bishop. The first causes of disturbance were the tribes of Waikato, Taupo, and of Hakaraia (the Ngaiteraugi). The God of Madness (Atua Porangi) ■appeared unto the King, and the first causes of death to the island came by that Atua being the means of' the slaughter of Volkner and other people by Hakaraia and Patara. From these came the death of Turanga at Waerengahika. The second cause of death came by Te Kooti. He and others were taken to Wharekauri, and then murdered Europeans. Thence they went on board a ship to return to this Island. Whilst at sea the ship was tossed about by a tempest for one night and a day, and the Maoris collected all their ear ornaments of greenstone and other articles, which they threw overboard as an offering to this Atua Porangi. The ship at once stood upright, and Te Kooti's belief was confirmed. When Te Kooti landed at Whareongaonga I and 100 of my men went to obtain his guns, but he refused to give them up. He knew he was followed by us, and went to Paparatu, then to Konaki, and thence to Puketapu. He obtained power from his god, and was advised by him that the Kawanatanga would be by him utterly destroyed. He then proceeded to carry out his mission by overthrowing Turanga. Paratene, Petara, Whakapuaka, Te Kemara, Te Wiremu Eangiwhaitiri Iraia Biki, Baharuhi Bukupo, these chiefs said to mo that they would all turn to Te Kooti. I objected, and proposed that we should remove to a distance, lest we should be taken by him. These Kawanatanga wrote to him, in reply to which he directed them to send him all their swords. Their answer was giving him £10 and a watch as a whalcapatipati. The Atua of Te Kooti was a murderous Atua, and very different from that of Christ, who bids us love one another. Baharuhi left my pa at 0 weta, and took or led away Paora and To Whaitiri to Te Kooti. The latter came down to my pa and killed all our pigs as an offering to his god. His people then held a service and fed, after which he led us away to a place near Kohangakarearea. When we reached Pukepuke (Fort St. John), I heard that Eangiwhaitiri had been murdered by Te Kooti's orders. Here Te Kooti addressed us, and said: " Let us worship my god, as he is the true god, and the Kawanatanga shall not be saved." We then got alarmed and anxious to return to Turanga, as we saw that Te Kooti was a man of evil, and had murdered Eangiwhaitiri. However his answer was that any one attempting to return should be put to the sword. By this time all the people in Turanga had been killed. We were then led to To Karetu [called Makaretu in the Despatch], and here were surprised by the Kawanatanga. Before this surprise Te Kooti and his god went to steal the powder of the Pakeha; he returned successful with the powder, but he and his god suffered at To Karetu, whence he however escaped. He killed my younger brother Wiremu. He reached Ngatapa as the sun was setting, and was followed by the Kawanatanga. They fought and the Kawanatanga retired, which success he attributed to his god, and tho strength derived from him. A short time after this a kokiri was sent to murder the people at Pipiwakau, and Te Kooti accompanied it. They were followed by the Pakehas and fought at Puke Puke; no men were killed, and To Kooti still attributed his strength to his god. On arriving at Ngatapa from that kokiri, he glorified the strength (whaka manamana) of his god, and said no army would reach that place to cause death, as it would only take place there from natural causes. The Kawanatanga came up and besieged us, and we suffered great distress for want of food and water. While it was raining we caught the water by putting up our blankets and clothing. There was nothing but wailing throughout the whole siege, and there were proposals to disperse and leave Te Kooti, There were in the pa 200 men with guns. The chiefs in Ngatapa were Te Kooti, Napier, Tahau, Petera, Herewini, Karanama, Paora Toki, Nikora. Ido not know why he allowed us to be surrounded. The causes which led to dispersion were want of food and ammunition. As the soldiers were starving, all the food was taken from the prisoners and given to them ; and when consumed, they were told by Te Kooti to abandon the pa, and if necessary, to die in the bush. Te Kooti's knowdedge of the position enabled him to ascertain the proper line of retreat. I too ran away, and was alone for two nights and three days, without food or fire, and was nearly dead when two other men came to me ; they lit a fire and gave me food —it was mamaku, honey, and kotukutuku. We thought of going back to Turanga, but were afraid. Tho very night that Te Kooti escaped from Ngatapa, the Whakatohea arrived from Waioweka to fetch him. Timoti was one of them (killed since at Eotorua).
A.—No. Bb,
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES
27
The Whakatohea and the Urewera were the chief support of Te Kooti —the first supplying him with ammunition and caps, and the second with men. We went on to Waioweka, and there I met Te Kooti again. The reason I followed in his footsteps was, that I feared him on account of the death of Paratene (killed by Te Kooti). When I reached Waioweka I said to Te Kooti, " I must return to Turanga; why should you detain me when all my people are destroyed, my wife and grandchildren, and all related to me ?" Te Kooti said " No, you shall not return, as I have made a law that should any man try to desert to the Kawanatanga he shall be put to the sword." I remember at this time a sum of money (£100) being sent down to Opotiki to buy clothing and rum; it was collected in small sums from many men ; it was brought down to Opotiki by a man named Hera, and about £30 was expended. The balance was returned, the reasons assigned being that the people were afraid lest the Pakeha should wonder where so much money came from, and conclude there were Hauhaus at Waioweka. Another thing I remember is a visit from a Taupo chief belonging to the tribe of Te Heuheu. His purpose being to disclose the words and thoughts of the second Te Heuheu [father of the present one], whose wishes are always to keep fast hold of the land. He therefore had come to fetch Te Kooti to Taupo, there to organize a means of killing the Pakeha and creating disturbance, whereby to fulfil the wishes of the deceased To Heuheu. His name was Wirihana, and he was afterwards killed at Te Kooti's kokiri on Whakatane. This man sang Te Heuheu's waiata. [A copy will be procured if possible. The song urges the people to keep to the land and resist the pakeha. The narrator sang nasally for a quarter of an hour.] On leaving Waioweka [? Maractahi] we moved in the direction of Tawhana, and during this march I saw nothing of Te Kooti. At Tawhana, a kokiri left for Ohiwa and Whakatane, and we started for Otoreatea [near Maungapowhatu]. Whilst there, I questioned Harawira about the road to Turanga. He said it was frightful, being nothing but up and down. I asked him if he was willing'to come back with me, but ho said he was afraid lest the Government people should kill him. I told him it was .a matter of indifference to me, as all my people and children were destroyed, and I, the only one left of my tribe, was led about a captive. Harawira said he was willing to guide me as far as Ngatapa, but that he feared we should starve on the way. However, nothing came of it, and we removed to Te Kakari, where we stayed for two nights. Here we were overtaken by Eakuraku and his tribe, 100 people. Hs came of his own accord, while Te Kooti and his kokiri were still away. No one was driving him, and he left all his guns with Te Kooti. Whilst here I spoke to Tamati about escaping, and wo determined to take a road along the top of a range, near Tawaki, by following which we should come out at Waerenga-o-kuri. After some consideration, Tamati proposed not to go yet, ns wo should starve. I told him there was plenty of food for man —He mauku (?), He keka [the curled skins growing out of decayed logs], He tawa, He mamaku, He korotu (?), He Whiniau. However Tamati wished to remain, and see what the Ureweras said. At this place Eakuraku read'a letter saying that Te Kooti's commands were that every one should meet in Euatahuna, and we started accordingly. We found there 200 Urewera, without clothing, with only torn blankets and old flax mats, but with guns, such as single and double barrels, but very little ammunition. Presently Te Kooti came to Euatahuna with 100 men. He had had a fight, but had been driven back by the Arawa. Here he began to glorify the strength of his god, mentioning the three pas which had been delivered into his hand, and attributing his success to his Atua, so as to maintain this war against the Pakeha. Then he notified his intention of making a kokiri by Waikare to Mohaka. The chiefs present were Eakuraku, Te Whenuanui, Eawana, Aperona, Te Eangikaitipuaki, Te Makarini, Te Puehu. He took with him to Mohaka his 100 men, as well as the 200 Urewera. At this time I again urged. Tamati Te Eangi Tuawaru to get away. Te Kooti went and destroyed Mohaka, and returned to Waikare. The kokiri of the Kawanatanga by Tauaroa and Whakatane coming up, we got alarmed by the firing at Omaruteang-i and ran away. We were without food or clothes, and were nearly dead with cold. The Urewera kept on fighting. At Tatahoata 20 of Te Waru's men were killed. The man who was killed after and had his head cut off was also one of Te Waru's. If the kokiri from Ahikereru had come up the first day of the fight, we should have been all destroyed. The Pakehas returned, and we retired further into the bush, where there was a plantation, of potatoes. We were nearly dead with cold for four nights. Just after the Pakeha left Euatahuna, 100 Urewera arrived, followed by Te Kooti, who passed the field of battle and assembled at Tataramoa (above Tatahoata). I did not see the disinterment of the Pakehas, but the Hauhaus said that great was the death of the Pakeha; that Whitmore was killed, and had been taken away on a stretcher. [Colonel Whitmore was carried away on a stretcher, but did not get into it within ten miles of Tatahoata.] It was here decided to leave 150 of the Urewera, under chiefs, to guard the passes to Whakatane and Ohiwa; 50 men were to go with Te Kooti, who completed them with guns, by taking them from the men left behind. When ready to start, Te Kooti came to my camp and said to me, " Let us go to Taupo, and listen to the words of the Chiefs of the Island, the head of whom is the King, and who has the sole right to the Island." Te Heuheu, Wiripo, Matuhau, these are the great chiefs. For the third time I begged him to let me go away, or even stay behind ; but his answer was no ; that he thought I was going back to the Kawanatanga, by whom I should be killed. He then left and returned bringing me a new blanket and a shirt, telling me to take them that I might be warm by the way. I then knew that in this lay my death, as he intended to keep me always by his side. I then partly consented to go, Tamati agreeing also. We left that day for Euatahuna by Tauaroa; marched on to Tarapounamu and Arama, and slept at the Whaiti. There we sent our scouts ahead to Heruiwi, in the centre of the potato grounds. When we went, I was in the rear very tired, having no wife or any one to carry my provisions. On reaching Heruiwi in the evening, I heard the men saying that the Pakehas were killed, but one had escaped. Te Makarini had shot the one. [This is the man, well known in Opotiki, who was reported by Trooper Black as having shot Trooper Macdonald.] Perane [now in my charge at Opotiki] and Te Uatuku fired at the one who escaped. We remained there that night washing potatoes. It was so cold that when any one lay down the frost covered him over. At daylight we moved on again, and on reaching the Eangitaiki it began to rain. I was very miserable, as my body alone was travelling, but
A—No. Bb,
28
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
my spirit was with my people far away. I had no interest in visiting strange places, or killing strange people. After crossing the Eangitaiki, Te Kooti selected fifty men to go ahead, and I was left with the main body. He went in the direction of a small hill, upon which was a place resembling a graveyard. We heard guns firing at Opepe, which sounded like the chopping of logs. On going we met Edward Baker running back, who said he was in pursuit of Pakehas who had escaped. I trembled and felt afraid. The advanced guard said that the Pakehas had been keeping a sentry, but on the rain coming had gone into their whares to feed. The fifty men then came on, and some of the Pakehas coming out had called out to them, "Ka pai te Arawa." Tho reason they thought them Arawa was, that Ke Kooti had on his silver-mounted clothes. [This was a coat given to a -Ngatipukeko by Dr. Baker, and taken by Te Kooti when he got to Whakatane.] Te Kooti then told his men to fire, and the Pakehas were shot. I heard that one Pakeha escaped. He was fired at and hit, but got away. The first man who began to plunder the dead bodies was Karanama Moepuku. We slept that night in the tents of the Pakeha. When the sun rose we went to the garden, and fetched the Pakeha horses, when we went on to Hatepe. There I learned that Ke Kooti had written and left a letter at Opepe. Here also an old man of a distant tribe, Hoana, was caught and killed by Te Kooti's orders. In the evening 200 of the men were ordered to fire their guns in the direction of the island in the sea, for what reason I don't know ; but I heard it was an offering to the god. At sunrise we set fire to the pa, the smoke of which was seen both at Turanga and Tapuaeharuru. Tho firing of the volley was also heard. We left Hatepe, and went to a small island close to the shore, where was an unfinished church, and thence to Tauranga, where we found fifty men of Wirihana's. They had killed pigs and four cows for us. Here a messenger arrived from the King with a letter for Te Kooti. Te Kooti sent to fetch a Pakeha, who was building a mill. [Another prisoner states this man's name to be " Hopiri," a European.] This Pakeha arrived, saluted, and was well received by Te Kooti, who allowed him to take away his wife and child, who had been captured at Whakatane. He was told to remain at Tokano. He gave Te Kooti £10. I saw the money; it was paper money. [The other account says £7.] The people from different places had assembled at the kainga of Te Heuiheu at Moerangi; so we went there, and were met by over 100 of the Tuwharetoa. The "ritenga" of Te Wiripo and other chiefs was to fight against the Pakeha; but of Te Heuheu I am not quite certain. I thought he was a Kawanatanga. Here there was a waiata sung, and after it the chiefs got up, and the words of all were to persist in the work of killing, of holding the land, and of destroying. These were the words of Wiripo and others, but not of Te Heuheu. He rose and said, " Welcome, the man from the land of the sunriso (To Tairawhiti)." His words were good. He did not speak of withholding the land, or of persistence in fighting. I rose and spoke, as I liked the straight road Te Heuheu had taken. They brought us large "nuakuas" of preserved pigeons—there were 2,000 birds, many potatoes, and three cows. At sunrise Te Kooti again was glorifying his god (Whakamanamana). He then spoke to the people, persuading them to adopt his religion, and worship his Atua, to which. Te Heuheu's people consented. He left this, and went round by the loft of the lake, and reached Titiraupenga, Hakaraia's kainga —Paraharaha is just outside this; and slept at a place near Tokangamutu. Thence we descended to Taupiri, where a Hauhau polo was standing. Our number was not over 200. When we reached Tokangamutu we were welcomed by the people, and guns were fired in our honor. While they were at prayers we sat by the King's house, a large raupo whare. There the assembly took place. There were 200 Waikatos present. Manga arose and sung a waiata. I forget the waiata. But ho spoke to hold the land and keep up the fighting. In concluding, ho handed Te Kooti a sword, by which he was to sever Mangatawhiri and Hangatiki (i.e., to smite the Europeans from Hangatiki to Mangatawhiri). To Kooti answered, "There is the sword; take it back. I will remain in front of the King. If he gives me the sword, I will take it; if not, let him keep his sword, and I will go elsewhere. The King is in the centre with his sword, and lon the outside." In a few words, I will give an explanation of the reasons which led Te Kooti to Waikato. The purpose in view was to gather the tribes —the people of Wairarapa, of Wanganui, of Taranaki, of Tauranga, of Hauraki, and of Ngapuhi; then to consider and determine upon the method of striking the Pakeha until he should be hidden (destroyed out of sight). By the mouth of Tamati Ngapora came the answer to the words spoken by Te Kooti to the King's representatives, Manga and others. The answer was a refusal. The words were that the people did not consent to Te Kooti's proposals ; that his purpose in coming amongst them was to lower their chieftainship, and to destroy their Atua; and that they would not bow down to his Atua. The King heard of the words of Tamati and Waikato, which were said to Te Kooti, and the King was wroth. He said, " Why did you not agree with Te Kooti ? What are his crimes ? You have plundered my dignity as King, and my name is now Matita (driven on shore), and Tamati is King. Therefore, let me bear the name of Matita (one of his ancestors). My duty is to rise in hostility against the Pakeha." Te Kooti asked if there was not a Pakeha in correspondence with the King. The custom of this Pakeha was to be in opposition to tho Queen. His name was Hakara Mihara, and he was chief of the Irish, of the French, and of the Germans. [Henare Potae informs Mr. Porter that this man's name is McLeod. It seems he has partly leased a large tract of land in Kennedy's Bay. This agrees with the Mataura Ngatiporous being the bearer of his messages.] These are enemies to the Queen, and said they would join Te Kooti. There were 1,500 of them in Auckland, and the same number in Hauraki and the Middle Island. He was with Te Hira, and asked him to concede the land at Ohinemuri to dig for gold, which would make the Government jealous and afford a pretext for his people to rise up against you. That concludes all the talk that I know myself in Waikato. It was after this that Te Kooti had a correspondence with that Pakeha. He was constantly urging Te Kooti to have an. interview with him. After our leaving Tokangamutu some few men of Ngatiporou arrived from Mataura to Taupo, bringing powder and caps, with a message from this Pakeha. Te Kooti then wrote to him, and the letter was sent to the kainga of Hera Te Kaki. It was in consequence of the letter that tho men brought the powder and the caps. They were sent back again. The King and Te Hira acknowledged Te Kooti, and consented to his god, and To Hira wrote and sent presents of clothing. He wrote to Te Kooti, "Go and do your work. You are a man of labour. There are two men in the Island : one is a man of labour, and the other of idleness (i.e., Te Kooti and the King)," and he added, " Ka tae kite
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
29
A.—No. 8b
kohanga —ka whakapiro nga uru " (a proverb relating to the working man and the lazy one, the cuckoo and the hedge sparrow). Te Kooti was very glad to hear about the Irish, but he would not judge about anything till he met their chief. If the interview had been satisfactory, ho would have proclaimed him King of the Island. Wo left Tokangamutu with Manga, whose intention it was to go on to Taupo and join in the fighting against the Pakeha; but when we got to Te Iwi Tuaroa he returned to Tokangamutu. On reaching Matuiwi, the force was divided into two —one kokiri was sent under various chiefs to Tokano ; the other under Te Kooti went to Botoaira. Before the separation Te Kooti again praised his god, and told the Tokano party that six men would be delivered into their hands. His own party captured four men, and they were killed by his orders ; one of these was a " Papa " of Topia —hence the cause of Topia's hostility to Te Kooti. I was not with either kokiri, but remained at Matuiwi. From Eotoaira Te Kooti went and joined the other party at Tokano, and then went on to Tauranga, where he fought the Kawanatanga—some were killed on both sides. He attacked, but the Kawanatanga were saved, and Te Kooti was beaten, but in his retreat he took 100 horses, all shod. The next morning Te Kooti gave orders to march again on Tauranga. On the road he came upon the Kawangatanga, wdio fired a volley into his people. They broke and retired to a hill, where they fought for some time. Te Kooti was left alone by his men, and at last retired, and the whole fell back to Tokano, where they cried over their dead! then they crossed over to Botoaira. Soon after tho Pakehas came to Poutu and and Botoaira, and built barracks. A kokiri then took place to Tokano, at which Wiripo was killed. Tho men broke and reached us at Te Iwi Tuaroa, when we were told by Takirau to escape to Beterake (a hill in Whanganui). We reached this, and news came that Te Kooti was killed and his Pa Porore was turned over. Afterwards a messenger came from him, telling me, Tahau, Eakuraku, and the other chiefs, that we were to rejoin him, and that we should retire by Taupo back into Buatahuna, or elsewhere. Takirau urged us to remove to Taumarunui, as there we might fall in with some of the refugees and hear the truth about Te Kooti, who was lost in the bush. On reaching it some of our refugees told us that Topia had passed, having been with the King. The reasons which led Topia to visit the King w rero these :He wanted the King to consent to the killing of Te Kooti, as utu for the death of his relation Hoana. The King refused, and when he was sent for by Manuwhiri he asked what was wanted of him. Manuwhiri then told him it was as before, that he was required to consent to the death of Te Kooti. The King refused to give his consent. Then Topia went among the Pakehas and received three cases of guns and six of ammunition, aud collected his army to chase us, assisted by Major Kemp. Two fathers of Topia —Topini and Te Wharapipi —came to visit us, wept with us, and returned. We thus received information that the taua of Kemp and Topia was in chase of us, and we ran away. One thing I forgot: while at Taumarunui, Kereopa and Hakaraia came to vs —30 men altogether—one of them Tauaro, who killed a Pakeha at Tauranga [Campbell, murdered January, 1867], is hero now in prison. They brought caps, &c, from Mataura. We dispersed and reached Ongaaruhi, on Waikato. There we collected again, and started in the direction of Papavvaka, and reached Te Huranga. We passed a number of kaingas whose names I have forgotten, and at last reached Hakaraia's kainga, Tapapa. Te Kooti and all of us were there. Then we and Hakaraia's people had a talk for the fighting and other evil talk, and at sunrise we started for another place. We had not long left when the Kawanatanga attacked Tapapa, and took, and destroyed, Hakaraia's people. He heard of it, and next clay To Kooti determined to stick close to the Kawanatanga and surprise them. We went a roundabout way back to Tapap>a and attacked, but found no one there. He afterwards fought with the Kawanatanga, who broke, aud we broke also. Some of ours were killed. I was one of those who bolted into the bush, tearing through supple-jacks, trees, and creepers, and was very much fatigued. We collected again, and our camp was surprised by the Kawanatanga, and again we broke. Te Kooti was nearly caught, being completely deserted. He only escaped by catching a horse. Thence we went to Kokohuranui, and went to steal food, but the Kawanatanga were in the clearing and fired a volley into us. Here again Te Kooti narrowly escaped. He was so closely pressed that he threw away everything but his shirt and trousers. We all bolted in the direction of Tauranga, and went into the bed of a gorge, so that our fires might be hid from view. Again the Kawanatanga surprised us and fired into us; so we had to run towards Eotorua. Here a Pakeha, Louis Baker [Canadian half-caste killed by Major Hay], ran away to the Kawanatanga at Ohinemutu. Here we were waylaid by the Arawa, who had warning from him of our coming. The Arawa fought us here, and one of the Kawanatanga, Te Ahuru, left them and came to us. We broke before the Arawa, and the chase commenced. Te Kooti was in rear fighting the whole of the time. We were closely pressed, and had to throw away our things. Every time we turned to fight our loss would be one or two. Timoti Hakopa, Edward Baker, &c, were killed. Te Waru was with us, and bolted into the bush. I expect he is dead, as he has not been seen again. We broke, continuing our running night and day for two nights aud days, merely resting by the wayside, and reached Te Bangitaiki. We crossed it at the Horomanga ford, and followed up that gorge until we got to Omaruteangi. We were about one hundred strong, but had very few guns, many having been thrown away. If it had been Ngatiporou following us we must all have been killed, as we moved along very slowly, from hunger and fatigue. [This was said in the presence of Arapata of Ngatiporou.] From Omaruteangi a letter was sent up to Buatahuna telling them we were come, and had escaped leaving many of our men in tho hands of tho Kawanatanga and unburied, and we went up after the letter. The Urewera killed for us one hundred sheep and three cows. The sheep came from the Waikare Hauhaus, who had taken them from the Pakeha at Wairoa. At daylight next morning To Kooti told two chiefs, Te Eangikaitupuaki and Hapurona, to take one hundred men and fetch the guns and ammunition from the barracks near Eunanga. They wrere to take possession of the store of powder and to cut the wire. Information respecting that place came from the Maoris living at Eunanga ; I think also from one of the Ngatiawa living inland at Whakatane. Do you remember two men being prisoners at Tauranga, the one called Ihaia, who cut their way out through the floor ? These two men also gave us information referring to the store and the wire. Ihaia was left behind, but the other is still with Te Kooti. Word came to us that the Kawanatanga were at Motumako and Horomonga. The hundred men 8
A.—No. Bb,
30
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
had left, but returned on the news of the approach of the Kawanatanga. On this news we ran in the direction of Whakatano to Omaruteangi, leaving Te Kooti in Buatahuna. We ascended Te Wharau, and went on through the swamps till we got to Neketuri. I forgot to mention that while in Buatahuna To Kooti wrote to Waioweka, telling the Whakatohea to be prepared for his coming, and to send some people to Opotiki as scouts. Aporo took the letter. Some of the Whakatohea then came to visit us ; among them was Pera (now a prisoner here). This man also took a letter to the Whakatohea, but Ido not know its contents. From Neketuri we went down to Tawhana ; we descended the river, and after two nights on the road reached Waioweka. We were told by Pera that the Whakatohea outside (i.e. the friendly Whakatohea) were prepared, waiting for Te Kooti. This which lam going to say is a word of no consequence, as it relates to myself. [It is, however, of importance, bearing on the Whakatohea question.] On reaching Waioweka, I was told by a man,, with only one eye and a squint [must be Baniera of the Whakatohea], that my wife was outside. Te Mokena had sent her to join me and had given her £10 to pay for a guide, but the Whakatohea would not let her go. Tho officer with the long beard (Captain Walker) and Piahana Tiwai wanted her to go up. Here, in the evening, Arapera and an old man, a relation of mine, told me that he had seen twenty casks of powder which had been taken by the Whakatohea up the Waihau, and left in a secret spot for Te Kooti. [Some of the powder got in Maraetahi, flasks of FPF sporting powder.] There is not one of the Whakatohea, chiefs or otherwise, who has not been all for Te Kooti. We remained some time at Waioweka when we heard that Te Kooti was on the way, aud had seen at Ohiwa the army crossing over. He then moved in the direction of Waioweka, and keeping through the country about the lower part, reached Waihaua. The Whakatohea were expecting him there ; therefore, when he told them to go up the country they went. They started by themselves,, and Te Kooti remained with his men and killed two Arawa. His force was about 100 men, but badly armed. He then came up the river, opened his church and had prayers. [This church was destroyed at Maraetahi.] He also sent thirty men with food to tho Whakatohea. He then came up himself to see us, stayed two nights with us, and told the Whakatohea to come down to his pa to get food and to be organized in one body. He then went back, and afterwards the Kawanatanga came and took us. This story was related to myself and Lieutenant Porter, and translated by him. It is as nearly as possible in the words of the narrator. 2nd April, 1870. J. H. St. John, Lieut.-Colonel.
No. 54. Captain Mair to Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner. Sir, — Kaiteriria, 7th April, 1870. I have the honor to make the following report for your information • — I started from this place on the 29th ultimo, with seventy men; camped for the night at Ngakau Lake. On the 30th struck across the Kaingaroa Plains, and camped at dark at Punatakahi, near Wairapukai. On the 30th it rained heavily, so I remained in camp, sending orderlies to Opepe to acquaint Major Boberts. On the Ist I moved down to the Arawhata Tawhito, and met Major Boberts there with ten troopers. We then went on towards Heruiwi, and, having .carefully scouted it and Maniania, we camped for the night. No traces of the enemy. Next day sent the Natives to Te Waikaramuramu for food, and scouted the surrounding country. In the evening six pack-horses from Opepe arrived, but, unfortunately, two-thirds of tho supplies brought for my men were swept away in crossing the Baiigitaiki Biver. April 4th: Major Boberts returned to Taupo, and I moved down towards Fort Galatea. Scouted Pukehinahina, Ti Tapiri, and Tututarata without finding any fresh tracks of the enemy. Crossed the Eangitaiki at Ngaheringa, and camped for the night opposite Tauroa, at Taumata Wahine. Sent scouts along the Ahikereru road, and to Tauroa; they returned about midnight. Beached Fort Galatea on the sth, at 12 o'clock; was disappointed at not meeting Captain Preece, who had promised to be there on the 3rd or 4th instant with sufficient men and supplies to enable our united force to scout Ahikereru, Eaungaehe road, and, being now quite out of supplies, I was unable to remain out any longer, so I started for this place, slept at Ngakau Lake, and came on here yesterday. The men are very tired with eight days' marching; and after they have rested for a day or two longer I will start for Paeroa, from which position I will be able to scout the whole of the Kaingaroa plains as far as the Arawhata Tawhito. Tho Natives are most of them very badly off for want of clothes; many of them have a considerable amount of pay due to them for services in Taupo last year, and also for the Tapapa expedition. On the Kaingaroa Plains wo had both frost and snow, and extra clothing is absolutely necessary for the men. I have, &c, Gilbert Mair, Captain, The Civil Commissioner, Tauranga. Commanding Arawa Contingent.
No. 55. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Premier. (Telegram.) Napier, 9th April, 1870. 5.30 p.m. Mr. Hamlin just in from Wairoa. From his accounts, the late news of Bopata's success has stimulated the Wairoa Natives, who have decided to go on to Waikare-Moana in force. They have sent out to get all their force together from the coast, and Hamlin says they really mean business at last. They will go about 300 strong. He returns on Monday to accompany them. The enemy's fires are seen
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
31
A.—No. Bb,
now regularly towards the Lake, and I have little doubt myself that Te Kooti is there. I propose to encourage them as much as possible, so that we may get a move made from this end, in case it is not made from the other by Eopata. Of course there is no pay involved unless Te Kooti is got and the business finished. Ormond.
No. 56. Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, to the Under Secretary, Native Department. Sir, — Civil Commissioner's Office, Auckland, 18th April, 1870. In continuation of my former report I have the honor to acquaint you, for the information of the Government, that I left Auckland in the Colonial p.s. "Sturt," in company with the Hon. the Native Minister, on the 6th instant, for the purpose of visiting Opotiki and several Native settlements along the East Coast. We arrived off Opotiki early on the morning of the Bth, and as soon as the tide served, proceeded up the river to the landing-place opposite the town. The Hon. the Native Minister was met by a large body of Natives, principally men of the Ngatiporou and Wanganui expeditionary forces, under their respective leaders, Majors Eopata Wahawaha, and To Kepa. After a short interval Mr. McLean visited the camp of the Whanganui, and was received most cordially by the men of the force. He was addressed by the Chief's Kawana Baipai, Topia, and Kemp. The burden of their speeches was, to be allowed to return to their homes. They complained of the coldness of the climate, at this advanced season, in the Urewera country, and of many of their people being footsore and disabled —in proof of which they introduced many who were suffering in feet and legs from boils and sores. Mr. McLean thanked them for the services they had rendered to the country, and especially for the late successes gained by both expeditionary forces at Waioeka; told them that their request should be considered, and that a reply should be given in a short time. The Chief Topia Turoa, whose name has lately been prominently associated with the Wanganui force in pursuit of Te Kooti, took an opportunity of explaining to the Native Minister the reasons and motives which had induced him to follow the course he had lately adopted. He admitted that he had been a King's man and a leader of that party; that he had advocated that cause, because he hoped that it would lead to light and the advancement of the people of the Island; but after having followed the road he had chosen, he had discovered that it brought him to greater darkness. He was now trying another road, and had taken part with those he had formerly opposed, in the punishment of crime and outrage ; and it very much depended upon the action of the Government whether he continued to follow the road upon which he had now entered, and which he hoped would bring him to the light he was so anxious to obtain. Mr. McLean replied to Topia, thanked him for his assistance in suppressing crime and murder, and said that he trusted he would not be disappointed in his expectations of obtaining that light he was now seeking. Major Kemp also entered into some explanation of his truce with the notorious murderer Tamaikowha, but was told that he had acted on his own responsibility, without the sanction of the Government. From the Whanganui the Native Minister proceeded to the camp of the Ngatiporou, on the opposite side of the town. He was received with the same demonstrative welcome. The speeches were very much to the same effect as those of tho Whanganui chiefs. A greater number of these people were suffering from festering sores than the Whanganui, —not to be wondered at when it is remembered that they had marched, with but little rest, over perhaps the roughest country in New Zealand. The party were in the highest spirits, and expressed themselves willing to go through and through the Urewera country when the season permitted, should they be required to do so by the Government. They complained of the excessive cold they had experienced on the mountain ranges on their way to Maungapowhatu, having travelled, I was informed by Lieutenant Porter (the only European officer attached to the expedition), three whole days without seeing the sun. The Ngatiporou were thanked by the Native Minister for the good service they had rendered, for having given practical proof of the accessibility of the Urewera country, and especially for the successes at Waioeka, which were mainly due to their activity and perseverance. After mature consideration, Mr. McLean decided to let all the Natives return to their homes, deeming it most prudent and politic to allow them to do so, now that they were in such high spirits and flushed with success, rather than subject them to the hardship of an inclement climate, which they dreaded far more than its inhabitants. I believe, if I might be allowed to express an opinion, that this was a wise and judicious decision, as there will not be the least difficulty of engaging these men again, should it be thought necessary to sweep the Urewera country from end to end. I propose now to give a short account, gathered from different sources, upon the reliability of which the Government may depend, of the inarch of Major Eopata's force from Turanga to Maungapowhatu, and through to Ohiwa and Opotiki, and also of the facts connected with the proceedings of both expeditionary forces after Bopata's arrival at the latter place. The force under Bopata left Turanga on the last day of February, taking the road or track leading past Ngatapa, the line of retreat followed by Te Kooti after the capture by the force under Colonel Whitmore of the latter pa. Several human skeletons were passed in the first part of the journey through the forest, supposed to have died from famine after the evacuation of the Ngatapa Pa. In one place the remains of three individuals were found, two adults and one child; in another place two, and it was a matter of frequent occurrence to pass human remains during a day's march. It is conjectured that these died of starvation, as no indications were perceptible of their having received wounds. The Native prisoners afterwards taken stated that a number of bodies had been buried on either side of the road.
A.—No. 8b
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
32
The expedition did not discover any traces of living humanity until they got well into the Urewera country. In crossing one of the many mountain streams which were passed, the traces of a man, woman, and two children were discovered in the bed of the stream. The experienced woodmen of the force decided that the tracks were two or three days old. A party of twelve of the most active was detached, with orders to follow them up. The pursuit was successful, and the pursuers surprised a woman and child. The woman informed her captors that her husband was absent pig-hunting, and she expected he would shortly appear. The men took cover round the place, and patiently awaited his arrival. They had not long to wait. The unsuspecting man was seen to approach with a dead pig on his back, followed by his son (who carried a gun) and four dogs. Onnearing, the woman called out, "Haere mai," which at once aroused his suspicions; he threw his load from him. and scaled the heights, as only an Urewera can do, before the would-be captors were aware of his intention, leaving the whole of his family and dogs prisoners. I would here remark that this family lived entirely upon pigs, eels, and the tender shoots of certain ferns. The woman reported that they had not seen any one for several months, and imparted as a piece of news to her captors that the Europeans and Arawa had attacked Buatahuna, a circumstance which occurred twelve months ago. The children were naked. The woman, children, &c., were brought away. A day or two after this the advancing force succeeded in capturing another small party, consisting of five individuals ; two men, however, succeeded in escaping. The force was ordered to move on, and halted about two miles further on for the night. Bopata then sent back a picked force to surround the place where they had made the last capture, giving it as his opinion that the two men would return to ascertain the fate of the rest of the party. Eopata judged rightly. The place was surrounded, and the two men captured. Major Bopata selected from these prisoners two men to act as guides, and it will presently be seen that they did not abuse the confidence reposed in them. The advance had been carried out with so much skill and judgment that not a single individual had escaped in the direction of Maungapowdiatu, although a fear had been expressed that the first man who escaped had carried the news of the approach of a hostile force in that direction. Bopata gave it as his opinion that the man who had escaped, if a man at all, was hovering in their rear, expecting every moment to pick up the dead bodies of his wife and children, and in this case it is believed that the judgment of this bold and sagacious leader was not at fault. From information derived from the prisoners, Major Bopata learnt that there were two considerable kaingas at Maungapowhatu (the old pa itself had not been occupied for years), and it was his plan to surprise both simultaneously. Eopata commanded the advance upon the village to the left (the most difficult), and intrusted the command of the other to Lieutenant Porter, leaving the principal part of the force in rear under Henare Potae. Mr. Porter's party, under the guidance of one of the prisoners, completely surrounded the kainga intrusted to him, not a single individual escaping. Amongst the prisoners was a man of note belonging to the Urewera proper, named Iharaira Motu, the rest were Ngatikowhatu, properly belonging to Upper Wairoa and Waikare-Moana. Major Eopata was not so successful; by some means the enemy were made aware of the approach, and had just time to effect their escape. One of his young men having strayed too far, was ambuscaded and shot dead, and after a slight skirmish, Bopata recalled his men, intending to rest that day, and follow up the pursuit to Buatahuna on the next. But on the following morning, to Eopata's great disgust and annoyance, he received a letter from Major Kemp to the effect that he had agreed to a truce with Tamaikowha and the Urewera. Eopata hesitated how to act, but after some deliberation decided to respect the truce concluded, although he considered that the truce was broken by the shooting of one of his men. He, however, wrote letters to the Urewera chiefs, couched in unmistakeable language, to the effect that he reluctantly yielded to the truce made by Major Kemp, but that if he heard anything more of them and their hostile proceedings, he would return next summer and destroy them utterly. This letter was sent by Iharaira Motu. This man, it was discovered, had actually murdered Bennett White. This discovery added greatly to Bopata's chagrin. Eopata was greatly disappointed at this sudden termination of his march, but as it will be by-and-by seen, it was a matter for congratulation rather than otherwise, as his subsequent proceedings greatly contributed to the success of the Waioeka expedition. At Mangapowhatu Eopata first heard of the attack by Te Kooti on the Whakatohea at Opape, and the death of the two Arawa young men, and he at once gave orders for his people to march by the Waimana Biver to Ohiwa. This he did in forced marches, arriving at Ohiwa in two days and a half. The march from Turanga was accomplished in twenty days, which is a clear proof that not much time was lost, considering that the force was encumbered with above fifty prisoners, men, women, and children. At Ohiwa Eopata met Major Kemp, whose protracted inaction can hardly be explained away. Eopata exclaimed, •' Why, I left you here when I went to the East Coast to raise my men, and here you are still." Eopata arranged to be at Opotiki on the following day. Kemp returned to his people at Opotiki the same afternoon, aud seemed to be infused with a new life, and effectually roused from his late inactivity, it may be presumed, by the vigour displayed by his fellow in arms. He ordered his men to march forthwith in pursuit of Te Kooti. On arriving the next morning, Major Eopata was astonished to find that the Wanganuis had already left. As his own men were tired, and in want of rations, he could not at once follow, but after twenty-four hours' rest, and having procured a supply of food, he started in pursuit. I ought to explain here the lines of march of the two columns. Major Kemp was joined by the Chief Wiremu Kingi, of the Ngaitai, and a considerable number of the Whakatohea, who happened to be absent with the Whanganui when To Kooti made the raid upon their settlements at Opape. These counselled Major Kemp to advance on Maraetahi (the pa said to be occupied by Te Kooti and his followers in the Waioweka Biver), by the gorge formed by the Opotiki Biver ; after ascending which for a considerable distance, to strike a leading spur of the watershed range which separates the Waioweka and Opotiki Eivers, and to advance along its summit.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
33
A.—No. 8b
The reasons given for this line of march were, that the almost insurmountable difficulties of the Waioweka would be avoided, and all the Hauhau settlements could be turned before the attacking party would be discovered. This route was much the longest, and would take a longer time to traverse. Major Bopata decided to take the more direct way of the Waioweka Biver, as he had no time to lose if he was to take part in the fight which it was anticipated would take place at Maraetahi. Nothing could exceed the spirit of the Ngatiporou. They were undaunted by the gloomy prospect held out by some of those Natives who had encountered the difficulties of the Waioweka Biver, and were determined at all hazards to co-operate with the Whanganui. Every kainga on the route was approached with caution, and dispositions made to surround them, but in every instance they were found to have been deserted for a considerable time. The advance of Major Eopata's column met with no resistance till it reached within a short distance of Maraetahi; here there was a very difficult pass, the guarding of which appeared to be the great object of the enemy. The track led along the steep face of a cliff', which could only be traversed single file, and then with great difficulty. On the further side the enemy had posted a picquet of twenty men. Fortunately for the advance the sentry was a mere boy, and directly he discovered the approach of Major Eopata's advance guard he fired his gun, and before he could arouse his slumbering companions Bopata's men had taken the position. The picquet, after exchanging a few shots, fled precipitately, closely followed, leaving behind them four stand of arms. Had this picquet done its duty, probably Eopata's men would have been held in check for a considerable time, as it was impossible for them to outflank the position. This pass was considered the key to Maraetahi, and had always been made by the Natives the bugbear of every expedition that had entered the river. The picquet could not, from the peculiar nature of tho country, retire upon their main body without exposing themselves to a destructive fire. They therefore went up the bed of the river to meet a fate they little expected. As Eopata's men were skirmishing up to the Maraetahi Pa, great numbers of people, men, women and children, were seen ascending the opposite hills, and a party of the enemy who came to support the picquet was driven in, to find the pa evacuated. It was not known at the time that Te Kooti was there, but as soon as the information had been derived from a prisoner, every effort was made to follow him up. Here I must break off in this part of my narrative to notice the proceedings of the Whanganui and their allies, under Majors Kemp and Topia. I have already stated that the Whanganui, at the suggestion of Wiremu Kingi and Tiwai, advanced upon Maraetahi by the ranges to the left. None of the force were allowed to cook food, or even light a match for four days, lest the enemy should be made aware of their advance; the provision for the wholo of this time was biscuit, washed down with cold water. When the party neared Maraetahi the enemy were seen from the tops of the trees to be pursuing their usual avocations, and it was proposed by Topia to make an attack, but this was opposed by Kemp and Wiremu Kingi, their object being to turn Maraetahi. When this was done a descent was made, and so well timed was the movement that Kemp's advance guard of picked men struck the bed of the river just as Eopata surprised the picquet, as before related. The flying picquet fell in with this party, and were all taken prisoners. Major Kemp then ordered all his people to advance, and guided by the Whakatohea of his force, took possession of all the roads and passes, so that the greater portion of the enemy were intercepted in their flight from the Maraetahi Pa, and fell an easy prey to Kemp's men. The only resistance offered was by Te Kooti's own followers, twenty of whom, including the well-known old chief Hakaraia, were killed," without a serious casualty on the side of our people, two only being slightly wounded. Te Kooti, however, with between twenty and thirty men, escaped ; and it is asserted by the prisoners that he has now-only seven of the Chatham Islanders with him, all the rest having been killed or taken prisoners. All the Whakatohea brought away by Te Kooti from Opape were retaken, one of their number being killed. The notorious Kereopa managed to elude his pursuers from the fact that he was not recognized in the confusion occasioned by the affair. Old Hakaraia was attempting to escape, but being well known to many of the Whanganui was shot down, and recognised by the Bay of Plenty Natives, who composed part of the attacking force. Both forces united, and after a brief rest, with 325 prisoners including the retaken Whakatohea, returned to Opotiki. It had been reported to me several months ago by Wiremu Kingi, chief of the Ngaitai, that it was a well ascertained fact that Te Kooti, when ho found an asylum at Waioeka after the fall of Ngatapa, gave out amongst his followers that, after visiting the King in Waikato, ho would return and take up his final abode there, and he requested that a large house should be built for a whare karakia, or praying-house during his absence. Mr. Porter tells me that this information proved to be correct; at Maraetahi a house eighty feet long, thirty broad, and nine feet high at the eaves had been erected. The floor of tho interior was covered with two mats or takapau the whole length of the building; a great deal of time and labour had been expended in the manufacture of these mats, they having been worked in various patterns and devices in wools of different colours. This building had been consecrated a few days before the place was taken ; and Te Kooti in his opening address assured his hearers that they were quite safe from molestation from the " Kawanatanga," an appellation now applied by the Hauhaus to those tribes who have taken up arms against them. The strength of the position of Maraetahi is owing to the difficult pass I have before tried to describe, and the only way of turning it is by following the track taken by the Whanganui. The principal kainga contained sixteen houses, and with those scattered a little higher up the river amounted to-thirty-one, including the large Whare karakia. The quantity of potatoes, &c, is described as being very great; all the whares and a great portion of the food was destroyed. After the return of tho expeditionary forces to Opotiki, Eopata ascertained from some of the prisoners that there was a considerable supply of ammunition in the mountains at the back of Opotiki, kept there at the desire of Te Kooti for future use in his operations on the coast of the Bay of Plenty. 9
PAPEBS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
A,—No. 8b
34
Bythreats he managed to obtain guides to conduct his men to these concealed stores. They returned to Opotiki shortly after our arrival with eight quarter-casks of loose powder; but not satisfied with this, Bopata still pursued his inquiries, and found that there was a further store of twelve casks, and the place of concealment was known only to one individual, a person named Eru Nopenope confined with thirty-six other prisoners in the redoubt. Eru, under a strong escort of Bopata's men, guided them to the spot, many miles in the forest, and the whole stock was brought in, together with a bag of ready-cast bullets. The whole loss to the enemy was, therefore, twenty quarter-casks of powder, and a bag of bullets. I have gone somewhat minutely into the account of the expedition conducted by Eopata, and the subsequent able co-operation of Kepa and Topia, because I think it due to those chiefs that the facts should be recorded of the services they have rendered the Colony, and as a proof that we have the means within our reach, if judiciously and properly managed, of punishing those marauders who have for years past been the terror of the East Coast settlements. On the 9th and the 11th instant, tho witnesses against the prisoners (thirty-five in nnmber, said to be of Te Kooti's immediate party) underwent a preliminary examination, and thirty-two of the prisoners were committed under " Tho Disturbed Districts Act, 1869," to take their trial for various offences under that Act. The other three, being boys, were placed in Eopata's charge. The most notorious of these men are —Tamati Tarahau, deeply implicated in the Poverty Bay massacre, and Te Tauaro, alias Tutauanui, for active assistance to Te Kooti. This man is also the principal in the murder of a military settler at Tauranga, named Campbell. This murder was perpetrated on or about the 7th January, 1867. Eru Nopenope admitted, during examination, having taken an active part in the proceedings of Te Kooti. Thirty-one of the prisoners were shipped on board the " Star of the South" on the 11th instant, together with the whole of the Wanganui expeditionary force. Just before embarkation the Hon. the Native Minister revisited the camp of the Wanganuis to give his decision regarding the women and children under the charge of Topia, about whom there had been several warm discussions amongst the allies. Mr. McLean explained that the Government did not consider women and children in the light of prisoners, and that, therefore, the women might elect with which of their relatives amongst the loyal Natives they would remain, the only condition being that they did not return to the disaffected Natives. The decision was acquiesced in and carried out, the chief part of the women choosing to remain under the charge of Wiremu Kingi, of the Ngaitai, a sufficient evidence of the estimation in which that influential young chief is held by the Natives generally. This settled, the serious charge brought against the Whakatohea, of complicity with To Kooti, had to be considered. The principal evidence against them was contained in certain letters found at Maraitai purporting to be signed by the Chief Eanapia and two others; and I beg to refer you to former correspondence on this subject, in which I endeavoured to show that it was inadvisable to entrust tho Whakatohea indiscriminately with Government arms. The Hon. the Native Minister addressed the Whakatohea in terms of strong disapprobation for the duplicity shown by some of them, but he at the same time expressed a willingness to believe that the complicity complained of emanated from a few individuals, and not from the tribe generally. That it had been a matter of deliberation with him whether they ought not to be either removed altogether from the district or be disarmed. Eanapia pleaded for himself. He said he was quite innocent of the charge brought against him. He recounted tho services he had rendered to tho Government against the Hauhaus. Ho reminded Mr. McLean that, when Opape was attacked byTe Kooti, he succeeded in making his escape, carrying with him all the arms and ammunition intrusted to his keeping by the Government, and asked whether it was likely, if he favoured Te Kooti's designs, he would have done so ? The Whakatohea who were with Te Kepa and the Wanganui's also pleaded tho services they had rendered. They stated that most of Te Kooti's men who were killed in the late expedition to Waioeka met their death at their hands, and that they thought that was sufficient evidence that they did not sympathize with his cause. These statements deserved consideration, and the Hon. the Native Minister told them that certain members of the tribe were suspected on very good grounds, and that a very careful watch would be kept on them. That Eopata Walnvwaha should be intrusted to look after them, and also that the Chief's Wiremu Kingi, Te Tatana, and Te Hata, who were living much nearer to their settlements than Eopata, would be required to visit them occasionally, and that they should all live in one pa, and not, as heretofore, scatter themselves over the country. Eopata then addressed the Whakatohea. He told them that he accepted the responsibility, and that if he heard of any misbehaviour on their part he would himself punish them. Wiremu Kingi also spoke, and told the Whakatohea plainly that he did not feel altogether safe with such troublesome neighbours, but that he and his friends were willing to carry out the wishes of Mr McLean, not that he was very sanguine that any great good would result. On the 12th, the s.s. " Eangatira" arrived off the Opotiki Biver, under charter of the General Government. As soon, therefore, as the tide served, the " Sturt," having embarked the whole of the Ngatiporou, steamed out to her, and transhipped a good part of the Native forces. Eopata carried with him the fifty prisoners he had taken in his expedition, with the intention of looking after them until the country was more settled. It is due to the chiefs and Natives of tho different expeditions to state that during the whole of their stay at Opotiki they behaved in the most orderly, temperate, and exemplary manner ; not a single complaint was made against any of them. The embarkation was also carried out in the same orderly way, without accident or mishap of any kind. On the night of the 12th we anchored in Hicks' Bay. Early next morning the Native Minister, accompanied by Bopata, visited the Chiefs Te Iharaira, Houkamau, and Mokena. The question of the land lying between Hicks' Bay and Tologa Bay, over which the Government had put in a sort of claim, was discussed, and Mr. McLean told them that in consideration of the good conduct of the tribe, and the great service they had rendered to the Colony, he would, on the part of the Government, relinquish,
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
35
A.—No. Bb.
with certain small reservations, all claims to the lands. A memorandum was written to that effect, and an agreement signed by the Natives as to their particular obligations under the arrangement. Te Houkamau took an opportunity of making a complaint of what he considered a great indignity which had been offered him by the Government, by taking away from him, without notice or explanation, the ammunition that had been intrusted to him. He said that he felt that it implied distrust in him and his people. Here also Bopata gave a short account of his march through the forest of Maungapowdiatu and up the Waioweka Valley, and also intimated that it was his intention to organize another expedition of picked men for the object of beating up Te Kooti's quarters, supposed to be somewhere near WaikareMoana, and of getting in the rest of the rest of the Ngatikowhatu hapu. The particular style he adopted in introducing his views was worthy of the most ajiproved recruiting sergeant: " I let you know," he said, " that lam going out on another expedition, so as to prevent your grumbling at me because I did not ask you to be of my party. Now Ido not want any one that is timid or afraid of being hit, for those are the men that do get hit. Much has been said about the difficulties of the journey to Maungapowhatu, and its great length —why, it is only so long (indicating the distance by the first joint of his dexter finger) ; and as to difficulties, why, I took two horses right through with me to Opotiki. I start on Wednesday next: those who wish to come, let them make haste ; I will not wait. I may be heavy-headed, but lam light-footed." I just relate this to show the spirit with which this brave and active man is animated, who, although not a chief of high birth, is shown the greatest deference by every one of his tribe. From Hicks' Bay we steamed for Mataahu, Bopata's residence in Open Bay, and, after landing the Natives, returned to the Bay of Plenty the same evening. Before dismissing this part of my report relating to the late expedition, I trust that I may be allowed to make a few remarks on the result of the experiment lately tried of entrusting the conduct of expeditions to Natives. The opinion has generally prevailed, that unless these Native contingents are controlled by some European officer of experience, and combined with a small but select European force, little good would result; and in this opinion I confess I have in a measure shared, having been guided thereto by my experience of the Arawa Tribe, in which family jealousies meet you at every point. But with the Ngatiporou and tho Whanganui the case appears to be entirely different. Majors Kemp and Eopata have perfect control over their men, and their orders are strictly carried out. Wiremu Kingi, chief of the Ngaitai, who has been serving under Major Kemp ever since the Whanganui came to the Bay of Plenty, told me that he had served under Pakeha colonels and majors, but none of them would compare with Major Kemp ; and he concluded his remarks by saying, " That is a man of judgment, and one I would follow to death." I heard others of the Whakatohea contrasting the march of a European column in a rough country with that of one composed entirely of Natives. In the one case they state you can hear from a great distance the approach of the Pakeha from the jingling of their pannikins, and from their oaths, whereas the Natives move about without noise. This may be attributed to the sometimes overweening boasting of the Maoris; but while I would not say a word to disparage the fortitude and endurance of the European, proofs of which I have so often witnessed, still there is, I believe, much truth in their remarks. It cannot be expected that the booted and often heavily accoutred European can compete with agile barefooted Maoris on the wooded mountain track or rough river bed. The great advantage of a Native force is, that there is no necessity for an expensive Transport Corps. Eopata's men carried on their backs all the food they needed; and when they came out at Ohiwa, some of them had biscuit in their swags. The successes gained over the rebels in the Waioeka are great, and their importance much enhanced by the fact of their having been gained at a place considered inaccessible. The death of Hakaraia itself is a great success. The irreparable loss of so large a stock of ammunition, and tho destruction of so many of Te Kooti's best men, must be severely felt by the disaffected Natives. The number of prisoners taken by both expeditions, including the retaken Whakatoheas, was 375. On the 14th the Native Minister visited the Arawa post at Ohiwa. The redoubt is built on a commanding height, aud is a position of great strength and importance, securing a safe road to Opotiki. It was near this place wdiere Mr. Bennett White, the Arawa postman, and a Ngatiawa Native were murdered by Tamaikowha. After a lengthened interview with Wiremu Maihi and his people, we steamed for Whakatane, where the Native and Defence Minister landed to inspect the position chosen to establish the Armed Constabulary; but as it was getting late we could not visit the Native Pa at Kopeopeo. We steamed for Auckland the same evening, and after calling at Mercury Bay, reached Auckland on the night of the 15th instant. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, The Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner.
Enclosure in No. 56. List of Names of Natives killed at Maraetahi and Te Tahora, Waioweka, Opotiki, April, 1870. Eongowhakaata Tribe—lhikiera, Winiata, Kereama, Arapata Kipatu, Hohepa, Te Naera, Hakopa, Tamati Kuku, Arapeta, Eru-Whiwi, Heremaia. Tapuika Tribe —Hakaraia Mabika, Timoti, Hone Toto, Hone Puhi. Whakatohea Tribe —Behara, Timoti Maruru. Ngaiterangi Tribe —Hone. Two others killed by Ngatiporou, names not known.
A.—No. 8b
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
36
No. 57. Captain Walker to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sic,— Opotiki, 16th April, 1870. In the absence of Lieut.-Colonel St. John at Whakatane, I have the honor to report that the Native scouts returned here last night, bringing with them one of the Whakatohea, whom they fell in with in the Waiaua Valley, Two other fugitives have come in this morning. These three men were anions: those whom Te Kooti took with him from Omarumutu, on the 6th March last, and accompanied a party consisting of ten Ngatiporou, whom Te Kooti sent to communicate with the Whakatohea, and sound them as to their inclinations towards the Government. These three men report that, after the fight at Waioweka, Te Kooti retired towards Waikare-Moana with forty men, in expectation of getting reinforced there, and that it was his intention to return to Maraetahi in May, to take away the Whakatohea. With this object, and feeling secure of the sympathy of the Whakatohea, the party of Ngatiporou alluded to was sent down by Te Kooti, in order to prepare the tribe for a second visit from him. The Whakatohea, however, profess their determination of securing Te Kooti, should he place himself in their power, and of handing him over to the Government; in this their sincerity is to be tested by their self-interest. The people now living at Maraetahi consist of about 40 souls, the remnant of the Whakatohea, and they are reported as being ready to come in, provided they are assured of personal safety. Under these circumstances, I have advised that they be written to by their friends here, which no doubt will have the effect, together with Colonel St. John's letter, of inducing them to surrender. I have told the Whakatohea, in the event of their holding any intercourse with the emissaries of Te Kooti, to endeavour to induce them to lay down their arms, under a promise of being allowed to return to their people with the sanction of the Government. I have written to Major Eopata informing him of Te Kooti's whereabouts, sending the letter along the coast, which I expect will reach him at Aku Aku before he leaves. I have, &c, The Hon. D. McLean, Defence Minister, Auckland. G. P. Walker, Capt.
No. 58. Lieut.-Colonel St. John to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sic,— Opotiki, 19th April, 1870. I have the honor to report that on my return from Whakatane, on the 16th instant, I received intelligence of the presence of refugees in the Waihana, as mentioned in Captain Walker's report. I immediately set off' for Omaramutu, and there learnt that these people were partly Mataura Ngatiporou, and Hare Topia's Whakatohea. Two of tho Whakatoheas had gone out to meet them, and would be back next day. I then rode on to Torere to sound William King as to his co-operation in the intended move up the Waioweka. He declined joining, alleging as a reason that it was very well for the Whakatohea, who had sins upon their shoulders, to work without pay ; but that his people would not move without daily payments. His real reason is, I believe, that he still distrusts the Whakatoheas. Next morning I returned to Omarumutu, and waited there till the two messengers came in. It seems these men had come upon the party, and found it to consist of eight Ngatiporous and two Whakatohea, Paora and Te Whare Kura. two influential chiefs, next in rank to Te Hera. I opened a communication with them, knowing that for some time past Paoro has been anxious to surrender, and sent to them by Tiwai a letter stating that if they helped us to apprehend Te Kooti, their past offences would be forgiven. At the same time I sent by their hands a letter to Hera Te Popo to the same effect, and the chiefs of the Whakatoheas wrote also to him. Yesterday Tiwai returned. He had seen the two chiefs, who started of at once back to Hera. They expressed themselves very glad at the chance of coming in, and promised to use their best exertions with Te Hera. Should the latter not consent, they stated that to purchase their pardon, they would lead the Whakatohea friendlies on to Te Kooti's resting place, from which hint it is supposed that To Kooti has not left for Waikare. The intelligence of the movements after the defeat corroborates that previously given. I expect Hera's answer on Thursday. I have, &c., The Hon. D. McLean. J. H. H. St. John, Lt.-Col.
No. 59. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sic— Napier, 18th April, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge and thank you for your letters of the 31st March and 2nd April, enclosing for my information copies of reports by Major Eopata Wahawaha, Mr. Porter, and Lieut.-Colonel St. John, of operations conducted under Major Eopata's directions in the Urewera and Waioeka Districts. By the arrival of the " Bangatira," I have received from Mr. Locke fuller details of these operations, as well as particulars of Bopata's intended movement into the Urew rera country, to bring out, if possible, tho remnant of the Ngatikohatu Tribe. The great success that has attended Bopata's operations cannot but exercise a great influence for good ; and I trust, if he be successful in his present movement, that the security of the East Coast may be looked upon as achieved. I shall watch with great interest what he is able to do, and afford every assistance in my power. I am inclined to think that the Wairoa Natives are making a simultaneous movement with Eopata's
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
37
A.—No. Bb,
upon Waikare-Moana, although I have not information yet of their having started. By last accounts, however, they were mustered over 300 strong ; and I hope that, encouraged as they must be by the late successes, they may assist in disposing of the tribes wdio menace their own and the Poverty Bay Districts. Should Te Kooti have taken refuge, as he probably has done, at Waikare-Moana, we may yet effect his capture or destruction before tho winter thoroughly sets in. I have, <fee, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Ormond.
No. 60. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Napier, 19th April, 1870. I have the honor to forward the copy of a despatch, dated the 18th instant, received from Mr. F. E. Hamlin, which gives the latest particulars in reference to the movement of the Wairoa expedition. I have, <fee, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Ormond.
, . Enclosure in No. 60. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Wairoa, 18th April, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 15th instant, conveying news of Native prisoners, &c, for which I am exceedingly thankful. The weather since I left Napier has been excessively wet, allowing no chance whatever of making an advance. The rivers and creeks arc, up to the present moment, so swollen that they are unfordable, in consequence of which Ihaka Whaanga's people, who were to have been here last Saturday, have not yet turned up. A letter came in from them yesterday, explaining the reason, viz., the wet weather, and that they would be down shortly after the weather took up. The Natives at present appear fully to coincide with the plan I mentioned to you in Napier. Hapimana's people are prepared to take the Wairoa and Kiwi track, and meet Mohaka Natives there, then to advance on to the lake. It is the Native idea that the enemy has built apa and mean to make a. stand. I sincerely hope it is so. I have already arranged, if such is the case, only at first to do my best to prevent his escape, send for Witty's force, then make a formal attack. News came in, via Poverty Bay; Natives report that Te Kooti is up at the head of the Waioeka, in a cave. Kereopa, it is reported, hid himself in tho same cavo when our forces attacked Opotiki in 1865. This cave is said to be impregnable and of large size—so large that they have plantations at the bottom; the sides overhang, aud they go down by a rope ladder. From the way the Natives describe it, it is like a basin upside down, with a small hole in the bottom which forms the entrance into it. Some of the Whakatohea are said to be with him. Whether the report, or any part of it is correct, of course remains to be proved. Had the weather been fine, we should have moved off on Wednesday next, whether Ihaka's people had come or not. The enemy's fires were seen again while I was at Napier. Bopata, with the present state of the rivers, will not be able to cross the Hangaroa for at least three days, even if the weather should take up. I shall do my best to be in front of his advance. The Wairoa, I need hardly say, has broken out, and has now a good mouth. The " Bangatira " could at present come in easily. The mouth is about 500 yards to the eastward of the point. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, Napier. F. E. Hamlin.
No. 61. Lieut.-Colonel St. John to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Opotiki, 23rd April, 1870. I have the honor to enclose a letter received from Major Mair, this being the only official intimation I have had of the presence of Hauhaus at Ohiwa. On the 21st he told me, in the presence of other officers, that some Hauhaus were at Whakarei, and yesterday, at breakfast, he informed me that he had received a " bouncing letter " from Eru Tamaikowha. I heard all the circumstances from other sources. As I am left here in command, and Major Mair is only paying a flying visit, I deeply regret that he should not have taken the trouble to inform me of the whole matter. Yesterday I learnt that Natana (the man who murdered Pitcairn) was with Tamaikowha's son and others at Whakarei. I rode clown to Opape in tho evening, and made arrangements for twenty Whakatohea to join me and my scouts, and march round Whakarei this day, so as to surprise that scoundrel. Te Tena, whose sister was taken by him, volunteered to guide me. As we were about to start this morning, a letter came to me from Wi Mahi, stating that Eru himself was at Whakarei, and begging myself and Major Mair to go to him, to concert a plan for slaying him. I made up my mind at once. We move this evening at first turn of the tide, and by night we shall get round Whakarei. To-morrow morning Marsh shall move on, firing towards Eru's place, and I am confident of his falling into our hands. The weather is likely to favour us, being a strong rainy north-easter. I have &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister. J. H. H. St. John, Lt.-Col. 10
A—No. 8b
38
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
Enclosure in No. 61. Major Mair to Lieut.-Colonel St. JonN. Sic, — Eesident Magistrate's Office, Opotiki, 23rd April, 1870. I have the honor to forward a translation of a letter from Erueti Tamaikowha to Kepa, Topia, and other Wanganui chiefs. The original was brought to Ohiwa by a son of the writer on the 22nd instant. I have, &c., The Officer Commanding, Opotiki. W. G. Mair, E.M.
[translation.] To Opotiki,— 18th April, 1870. To To Kepa, Topia, Kawana Paipai, and to Mete Kingi—that is, to you all. Friends, salutations. Your word has been acomplished by me. The Urewera will abide by their agreement. If you intrude in my places there will be trouble. If you invade me when Te Kooti is not here, there will be trouble. The Urewera have returned ; two hapu remained with him. Be watchful of that man. It ends. From Tamaikowha, Chief of these parts. This is a question of mine to you about Hiria : Is she dead or is she alive ; if dead, say so ; if alive, release her, that she may return, she and Turei, at once. Friends, bo kind to our Mokai ; do not permit any one to detain ; let her come back.
No. 62. Lieut.-Colonel St. John to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Opotiki, 23rd April, 1870. With regard to my proposed expedition to Maraetahi, I have the honor to inform you that no answer has yet been received to my letters to Hera Te Popo. I have arranged that, should it have come during my kokiri after Eru Tamaikowdia, to start by way of Kemp's track. By scouts we can tako one or two prisoners, who will enable us to get hold of Te Hera. Once information procured of Te Kooti's whereabouts, the Whakatoheas seem unanimous in their determination to accompany me in chase of him. I have, &c, The Hon. D. McLean. J. H. H. St. John, Lt.-Col.
No. 63. Lieut.-Colonel St. John to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Opotiki, 26th April, 1870. I have the honor to report, that having received accurate information of Eru Tamaikowha and Natana's whereabouts, I started from hero with twenty-five Whakatoheas, at 4 p.m., on the 24th. At the Ohiwa, Marsh, who had begged me to come up, joined me voluntarily with about the same number, and we went into the interior. Never was a better chance of securing these two ruffians. At 2 a.m. we were within 500 yards of the small kainga where they were asleep ; and here, my knowledge of the ground being nil, I assented to Wi Main's dispositions for completely surrounding the place. Unluckily, however, just as we were completing the circle, Tiwai's party got too near, a dog gave the alarm, and Eru and his mob rushed precipitately down a steep gully, the path by which they fled being reached by us a few minutes after their escape. One chief, Em's uncle, Tepine by name, was tomahawked while attempting his escape. Eru never had such a shave; he escaped with only his guns, leaving horses, saddles, blankets, &c, behind him. I have also two of his sons in custody, who will be sent to Wi Kingi's, at Torere ; and I shall find means of apprising him that they will be kept as hostages for his behaviour. The expense comes to only three days' pay for the few Whakatoheas employed. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, J. H. H. St. John, Lt.-Col., Auckland. Commanding District.
No. 64. Lieut.-Colonel St. John to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— 26th April, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that on my returning from my unsuccessful attempt to apprehend Eru Tamaikowha, I found that no letter had come from Hira Te Popo. I have agreed to give four days to allow the Whakatohea chiefs a chance to obtain further information, and on Saturday I shall march with them to Maraetahi, according to your wishes. I have, &c, The Hon. D. McLean, Defence Minister. J. H. H. St. John, Lt.-Col.
A,-sr-If &..§»,
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES
39
No. 65. Major Mair to Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner. Sir,— Tepane, Opotiki, 25th, April 1870. I have the honor to forward copies of letters from Erueti Tamaikowha. The originals were brought to the Arawa pa, at Ohiwa, on the 22nd instant, by the son of the writer. Tamaikowha, I believe, remained at Whakarao, with about ten men, while his son'visited the Arawa, with a view to confirming the peace or truce made by Kemp. Colonel St. John started from here yesterday with about thirty men, and, taking a like number of Arawa, endeavoured to surround the Hauhaus at an early hour this morning. Tamaikowha, however, with his usual good fortune, escaped with all his party, save an old man called Tepine, who was caught and killed. Colonel St. John returned this afternoon. Tamaikowdia's son and another lad have been detained by the Arawa, but I am not aware in what manner they are to be disposed of. I have, Ac., W. G. Mair, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Auckland. Besident Magistrate.
Enclosure in No. 65. 18th April, 1870. To Opotiki, to Kemp, to Topia, to Kawana Paipai, to Mete Kingi, —that is to say, to you all. My friends, salutations to you all. The arrangement you proposed or made with me has been made good. The Ureweras also join in that agreement or law —that is to say, if you should occupy or take possession of land within my district, then trouble will arise, or it will be a signal for fighting. Then, again, should you invade my country, Te Kooti not being within its bounds, fighting will be the consequence. The Urewera people have returned, leaving behind two hapu, who have joined him. Be on the look-out with reference to the movements of that man. Tamaikowha, Chief of the District. This is an inquiry I wish to make of you. It is with reference to Hiria (Eakuraku's wife) :Is she alive, or is she dead ? If she is dead, let me know; but if alive, let her come back with Turei now at the present time. My friends, let your good feeling be extended towards our friend (the captured woman). Let her not be detained or kept back by any person, but let her return to her friends. Tamaikowha.
Eeiend,— Opotiki, 18th April, 1870. Salutations to you ; now listen. To Kooti has not yet come within the limits of the Urewera country. Friend, listen. Tho Urewera have made a law which, if observed, will prevent trouble. That law is this: Should you, the Europeans, occupy my land, trouble will arise. Should you come within my lines, fighting will begin, for this reason that Te Kooti is not within our district, and having no cause for encroaching within our district, I should have a just cause for fighting you. My friend, take care that you do not trespass within my district, for if you do, that of itself will be a sufficient' cause for trouble between us two, the Maoris and Europeans. Now then, this is the question I am going to put to you : Where is Hiria (Eakuraku's wife) ? Is she still alive, or is she dead? If she is alive, let her be returned by you. Let her come with Turei (the writer's son). My friend, do not keep her back; do not delay, neither let any other person detain her. Erueti Tamaikowha. To Mr. Mair, who in days gone by was my fighting opponent. Friends— 18th April. 1870. This is a word which I had forgotten. With regard to the Urewera at Waikare, I have not been amongst them ; therefore I cannot speak positively as to their movements. All I can say is this, that Te Kooti will be the means of causing a division on this side, or between the Natives ; while on that side, or between us, the Europeans will be the cause of strife or division. To Wepiha, that is to say, Erueti Tamaikowha, To all the Chief's, and also to Mr. Mair. From Tawharemanuka.
No. 66. Memorandum by Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, for the Native and Defence Ministee. I suemit that the action taken, and the attempt made to capture Tamaikowha and party, was hardly judicious. A. truce was concluded by Major Kepa with Tamaikowha. The latter, does not know that Kemp exceeded his powers, and that the Government could not acknowledge the terms made. It will be considered a " Kohuru," and nothing will convince the Natives to the contrary. I think means should have been taken to inform Tamaikowha that Kemp's truce could not be acknowledged. 2nd May, 1870. H. T. Claeke.
A.—No. Bb,
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
40
No. 67. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Lieut.-Colonel St. John. General Government Offices, Sir,— Auckland, 7th May, 1870. I have to-day received your letter of the 26th ultimo, reporting that you had made an attack upon the Chief Eru Tamaikowha, during the time he was on a visit to Wakarae, and in communication with the Arawa stationed at Ohiwa. The course you have pursued in this instance has been clearly at variance with the verbal instructions I gave you at Opotiki, which were to the effect that you were, if opportunity offered, to go up the Waioeka Gorge, where Te Kooti was supposed to be with a few followers, and use, in concert with such Natives as might volunteer to accompany you, every effort to capture Te Kooti. It is a matter of deep regret to me that you have not adhered to these instructions. The course you have taken is not only likely to endanger the safety of the settlements at the Bay of Plenty, but also to impress the Natives with the conviction that an act of treachery has been committed by an English officer. I cannot, therefore, too strongly deprecate your action in this instance, which leaves me no alternative but to remove you from the command at Opotiki. You will, therefore, be good enough to hand over charge of the district to Major Mair, who has been instructed to assume the duties with which you have been intrusted at Opotiki. I have, &c, Lieut.-Colonel St. John, Opotiki. Donald McLean.
No. 68. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sic, — Napier, 26th April, 1870. I have the honor to report that I received advices from the Wairoa, dated 21st instant, that the Native expedition from there would advance positively on Waikare-Moana on the next morning. The expedition had been delayed by the late heavy rains, which flooded all the rivers. I also received a letter from Mr. Witty, giving the plan he proposed to carry out with the Mohaka Natives, assisted by some of the Wairoas, a copy of which I enclose as well as of my reply. I almost hesitated to check the proposed movement, but, on consideration, I thought it safest to advise Mr. Witty in terms of my letter. It really is so unusual to find any officer planning a dashing operation, that I should be gratified if you would notice Mr. Witty. I have as yet received no information respecting Major Bopata's movements, but I propose sending the " St. Kilda," now on her way here from Wellington, to Poverty Bay, to ascertain what is going on. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure 1 in No. 68. Mr. J. W. Witty to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Dear Sir,— Mohaka Pa, 21st April, 1870. We have had so many false starts that I am almost afraid to announce the fact that we intend starting from here to-morrow morning. We had five days' rain last week, and in consequence all the creeks and rivers were freshed, and we should have found it impossible to cross the Waiau. Maraki and fifteen of the Wairoas arrived here to-day, and to-night we are all preparing for a start in the morning. The plan which I am trying to induce these Natives to adopt is to go from here to Putere, then to Putahi, and then cut a road round the Wairau and Omarau Lakes, which would bring us on to the track leading to Tiki Tiki, to take the pa there and seize the canoes. We should then be able to visit Whakarae, Mokou, Hereheretau, Ohinekuru, Oheringa, and all the other small kaingas round the lake, and thoroughly rout them out and destroy these settlements. It will a great deal depend on the weather whether this plan is carried out, as we should have to cross several mountain streams quite impassable in wet weather, and as it would take us, they reckon, a week to get through the bush, with nothing but biscuits, and only a limited supply, they are afraid of rain coming on, and we should not be able to get forward or back. I send you a rough sketch to give you an idea what 1 propose doing. I hear the Wairoas are going to Te Kapu to-day, but I am not depending on their going further. One party of the Wairoas are going up the Wairoa Biver to Erepete, Orewha, Whataroa, and to Onepoto. I expect Bopata will come through to Waikare by Maungapowhatu. If he should, and I can carry out my scheme, I think the Lake District will be pretty well scoured. This is what I wanted to do two months ago, when the weather would have been more favourable. Hoping to be able to give you a good account next time, I have, &c, To His Honor J. D. Ormond, Napier. James Wm. Witty.
Enclosure 2 in No. 68. His Honor J. D. Oemond to Mr. J. W. Witty. Dear Sir,— Napier, 26th April, 1870. I am in receipt of yours of the 21st April, and hope to hear that a start really was made on the 22nd. I note with much interest your plans, and am very much gratified at finding an officer proposing to do, what you mention as possible, with so inconsiderable a force as I am aware you have;
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
41
A.—No. Bb,
if there were more of this zeal, our difficulties would speedily lesson. I shall not fail to report both to the Premier and to the Defence Minister that a practical officer has proposed, as you have, to go with such an inconsiderable force into the fastnesses of the Urewera country. I do not wish to throw any cold water on your proposals. lam one of those who believe 100 good men can go almost anywhere in New Zealand and hold their own, if only they can depend on each other ; and I am also of opinion that there is no considerable force at any of the kaingas at Waikare-Moana; still, knowing that your force is inconsiderable, I would advise that you should not urge the Natives to undertake the Tiki Tiki expedition unless they have full heart in it. Tho Mohaka Natives have already suffered so much, that any great loss to them now would be hardly felt. lam quite alive to the advantages of a raid on all the Lake settlements, and think your plan would succeed if you had force sufficient to carry it out; I would therefore advise that, when you reach Putahi, you should set your Natives cutting a line round the lake, and communicate with Mr. Hamlin's Natives, and get enough volunteers from them to make your proposed movement a certain success. If you can do it successfully, you will have effected a most signal and meritorious service. I feel it right to advise you not to depend upon Eopata coming out at Waikare. I believe he knows where to find the Ngatikohatu, and that ho will get them about Te Pa Puni, or somewhere in that vicinity. You will, I hope, rightly interpret the spirit in which lam writing to you. I cordially approve of your proposals, but think you should go in sufficient force to make a reverse out of the question, and success a certainty. I have no more to add, and wishing yourself and your little band every success, I remain, Ac, Mr. James Witty, Mohaka. J. D. Ormond.
No. 69. Lieutenant Porter to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir, — Turanganui, 26th April, 1870. I have the honor to report upon progress of Ngatiporou expedition going to Waikare, Major Eopata having sent me on in advance for that purpose. The weather has been very wet indeed since our landing at Matuahu. It commenced to rain on the night of the 13th, and continued with strong gales up to the 19th instant, in consequence of which the rivers were all much swollen, preventing the men of Waiapu and Makaronia from coming to join us until 20th, on morning of which date Bopata sent me on with 100 of Te Aowera, leaving Ngatiporou to come on with Bopata next morning, nearly all on foot. On our getting to Anaura it again came on to rain, and men did not like to march. I therefore obtained a horse, and came on to report the cause of our long absence. Bopata should reach here on 27th or 28th, after which it is his intention to rest two days. Our strength will be about 300 men. In event of your Honor feeling apprehensive of the failure of the expedition on account of this long delay, I think I may safely assure you we shall reach Waikare, as we have received information via Opotiki of Te Kooti's being there; it may take us some time, as the season is far advanced. Bopata intends only to march when fine, and not during wet weather. I have recommended that the expedition via Onepoto be not precipitated, lest Te Kooti take alarm. The expedition from here should be allowed seven days start of that of Wairoa, to give us time to get to his rear. We expect him to be reinforced by the Urewera. We shall be prepared for the worst. In concluding this report, I think I can assure our reaching Waikare, unless deterred by extreme bad weather. Ngatiporou are greatly rejoiced at the Government returning their land ; they say their hearts are light. I have, &c, T. W. Poeter, Lieut., The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. Poverty Bay Volunteers.
No. 70. Lieutenant Porter to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Turanganui, 28th April, 1870. I have tho honor herewith to forward a copy of my rough diary kept during the march of Ngatiporou expedition through Urewera country. It has not been carefully copied. I therefore leave it to your Honor to excuse all corrections and alterations. I also send a tracing map of our course of march —the bearing of all the places are as nearly as possible correct, but the scale of distances it is more difficult to find. I have allowed an average of ten miles for a day's march. The map may be of future use. Eopata sleeps at Whangara to-night. One hundred Te Aowera arrived yesterday —all very wet. We have not yet had any weather fit for starting. It is quite as well not to start in bad weather, as it would entail loss of time, and our food would all be consumed before getting half-way to our journey's end. It has every appearance of fine weather now. Monday, the 2nd of May, will I think be our day of departure, all being well. 1 have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. T. W. Porter, Lieut. Vols.
Enclosure in No. 70. Diary. 28th February, 1870. —After distributing the food to carry on the expedition, the party of Ngatiporou, 370 in number, commanded by Major Bopata Wahawaha, started from Pakirikiri, most of the men 11
A—No.
42
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
carrying from 90 to 100 lbs. of biscuits. Beaching the Arai Stream, we found the tide high, and were compelled to cross the swags upon mokihi, and the men by swimming. By the time the last of the stragglers had crossed, it was dark. We therefore deemed it prudent to encamp for the night. When all were assembled, after supper, Major Bopata arose, and addressed the taua after the old Maori custom, by relating the deeds of their ancestors, and their own doings in former expeditions and fights. The men always pay great attention to his discourse, and seem to place great reliance upon him. He has great command over his men. In the course of his speech, he told them to consider well before they started on this expedition, as any man falling sick by the way must not expect assistance. He therefore advised those who did not consider themselves able to travel to return at once. Three men only availed themselves of this offer, and left in the morning. Ist March. —Marched from camping place at daylight, and following the Ngatapa track, rested for dinner at the Patutahi Stream. I then, with ten men, went on in advance to kill pigs, and await the arrival of Major Eopata at Fort Arawa. At sundown the main body arrived at that place, where we encamped for the night. Every appearance of rain. 2nd, March. —Left Fort Arawa at 5 o'clock this morning, and marched to the old camp of Te Kooti, Topai-a-torangi-tuanui. Leaving here the main body to rest during the heat of the day, they intending to come on in the evening, I again went on in advance with some men to kill pigs, expecting that Eopata and the others would shortly arrive at Eahui. Night came on, and there being no appearance of Bopata, I felt apprehensive of something wrong, and, though very dark, I returned, and found Bopata very ill, and his men attending him. 3rd March. —Eopata having quite recovered, we started at daylight. Towards noon the heat was very oppressive ; the men seemed much fatigued by the heaviness of their loads. At night we encamped at Wharekopai. The men in advance of the column saw footprints just at the edge of the bush. Some of them were at once on the track, and discovered a raupo whare, with five spades and one billhook inside of it. The whare had the appearance of having been unoccupied for some time. 4<th March. —Started at our usual hour (5 o'clock) this morning. It never requires a bugle and a number of non-commissioned officers to arouse the men. Their food is always prepared before daylight. With Natives, a man lagging behind is a subject of ridicule to the others. After having marched about five miles a halt was called that the men might rest, during which time Eopata got up and sang three waiatas to the taua, inciting them to bravery. Over night, one of Te Aowera, a man of Eopata's hapu and his tangata matakite, had dreamt he had seen an eel-net upside down, with some eels inside and some outside. Tho interpretation of this dream by the men denoted apatahuri. A song was composed and sung by the dreamer, during which he kept beautiful time with his mere-mere. Encamped for the night beyond Te Karetu, where Te Kooti had stayed during his descent upon Turanga. There were remains of old whares, ovens, &c. To-morrow we commence to ascend the hills and break into the Urewera country, following Te Kooti's track. sth March. —To-day's march has been a most fatiguing one, all up hill; the sun very hot, and no water to be obtained. We were nearly three hours climbing up one hill, from the top of which we looked down upon Ngatapa. Turanganui could be plainly seen with a glass. Hikurangi appeared quite close to us. Looking in a westerly direction, Maungapowhatu was visible, rising considerably above all the surrounding hills, or, more correctly speaking, mountains. Its appearance from a distance is that of an immense white cliff. In a gully below the hill our men shot two very fine horses, as they were unable to catch them; they must have been left by Te Kooti last year. Descending to the Hungaroa Biver, in an old temporary whare we found the remains of a man, woman, and child, lying side by side, supposed by us to be refugees from Ngatapa, who being too weak to search for food, had died from starvation. Three of the men were knocked up to-day. We intend to rest here to-morrow, by the Hungaroa Biver, to allow the men who were sick to recover. All the men were very much fatigued to-day. None but Natives could carry the same loads and do the same length of march as we have done to-day. 6th March, Sunday. —Bested to-day, but sent parties out pig-hunting and eel-fishing. Did not succeed in getting pigs, but got a great number of eels, caught by the men under the rocks. One eel caught measured four feet. Ith March. —To-day's march has been over some very rough country, —partly through water and partly over hills, very trying to men heavily laden. On reaching a branch of the Whangaroa, the footprints of three persons were seen, apparently about two days old. Ten men were immediately in hot pursuit, stripping to the buff. These fellows seem to delight in a hunt of this kind. A few men went out in another direction, and returned reporting having seen a place built like a European redoubt, but cannot account for its appearance here. Bth March. —The men were out last night following the tracks of footprints, and returned this morning, bringing in as captives one woman and four children. The husband had escaped. As on the men getting to the whare of the woman and children they found the husband absent, they laid wait for his return, and warned the woman to remain quiet. They had been concealed for some time, when they saw the man returning with a pig on his back. The woman called out to him " Haere mai," upon which he stopped and dropped the pig, no doubt thinking it a most unusual thing to be welcomed by his wife in that manner. Some of the men moving, the eldest boy was alarmed, and called out, " Don't kill Papa." This was a final warning to the man, who darted off like a deer, and, though fired at, escaped. The woman reports herself as one of a bush tribe named Ngatikohatu, having been living out for over eighteen months without any settled abode, and depending solely upon animal food for subsistence. She said that her husband had visited Maungapowhatu some three months previously, to fetch Torori. He then reported Te Kooti at Buatahuna, and that 100 of tho Urewera were with him. A letter had reached Maungapowhatu from the Government, telling them to cease harbouring To Kooti, and to submit to the Kawanatanga. It would appear that tho majority of the tribe were agreeable to the terms, but were living in coustant dread of Te Kooti, and being influenced by their chiefs, it seems impossible for them to be loyal. Te Kooti threatened to destroy them if they listened to the word of Kawanatanga. Consequent upon the information gained from this woman, it is our intention to endeavour to surprise Maungapowhatu, and take them all prisoners, so that none can
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
43
A.—No. 8u
escape to warn other kaingas. We shall so continue taking all the places, and march direct for Waikare-Moana, and from there form a base of operations against Te Kooti into Buatahuna, where he is supposed to be, as he has not yet reached Waikare. We hope to get positive information of his whereabouts at Maungapowhatu —if he is not there himself. We are afraid the woman's husband may have gone on to that place and given them warning. Bopata thinks not, saying he will follow on our track, seeking the body or blood of his wife and children. The woman reports a tribe of the Ngatikohatu as living near Te Beinga, at Orewha. 9th March. —To-day's march has been rather a short one, as soon after starting, on reaching the top of the range, the advanced guard announced smoke in a gully some distance off. A halt was at once called, and men sent out to reconnoitre ; they found the remains of a fire and temporary camp, with a lot of dried pork, eels, &c, inside the whare. The men then laid in wait, expecting the late occupants to return. Getting tired of waiting, they began searching the hills, but without success, the runaways being no doubt at homo in their own wild country, although chased by a tribe nearly as wild. On the top of the hill where the track leads over we found the body of another poor wretch who had lain clown to die, probably another who had been wounded at Te Karetu or Ngatapa. We are now in a very high country, and on all sides are to be seen a succession of wooded ranges, range after range. It is a wonder how tracks can be found leading to any particular place. An enemy could remain hidden here for years and defy pursuit. Maungapowhatu is still in sight, but we appear to approach it slowdy. At dusk in the evening, three of the men out on the track of the runaways returned, bringing in captive one man, two women, and two children, quite wild-looking wretches, with nothing but rough flax mats round their waists. It is astonishing how these fellows of Ngatiporou can follow up a trail without fear. I have seeu their ability in this way at Ngatapa and other places ; to a stranger it would seem incredible. Two men had escaped during the chase ; they will however be followed in the morning. 10th, Thursday. —This morning, before starting, one of the women prisoners, accompanied by two of our fellows, returned to the place where the men had escaped. They returned about 10 o'clock a.m., bringing back one man prisoner, rather a fine-looking savage. He came in quite proudly, and fully expecting to bo killed —yet he showed no sign of fear. When asked why he ran away he said, "I am now in the hands of the Kawanatanga, therefore kill me ; it is needless asking the question why I ran away." We passed Puketapu to-day, where Te Kooti stayed after being followed by Colonel Whitmore. We arc camped to-night at tho Pa Puni, the site of an old pa. It is described by the Natives as having at one time been a lake, and that it was the bed of a Taniwha, who, getting tired of his long stay in such a confined place, had burst through the hills, and escaped by Euakituri, which has ever since been a river. It has no doubt been a lake in former times, and at no distant date, as the whole place is covered with sand and shells ; on what at one time would have been the shore of the Lake, are the remains of an old Pa, the formation of the whares still definable. Before reaching here to-day we found two more human remains, by the side of a small creek ; one skull had rolled into the water, and one was on the bank at the side. We are still three days' march from Maungapowhatu, and our food is getting short. If we meet with much resistance there, lam afraid that we shall be badly off for food. 11th March. —To-day's march has been a very fatiguing one, climbing some very steep ranges from the top of one of which a splendid view was obtained of the surrounding country. I do not ever remember seeing scenery so beautifully grand. Our track has been up tremendously steep ridges, very thickly timbered. It is from occasional breaks in the forest that a clear view can be obtained of the country around. In a torrent called the Arini, which takes its rise at Maungapowhatu, we saw a beautiful waterfall, with a fall of about 200 feet, and in width about 100, pouring over a smooth papa rock. During the latter part of the march the forest upon the range that we are ascending is so dense that we cannot get a glimpse of the sun. Wo are camped to-night in the ranges ; our supply of water is obtained from decayed logs, by squeezing the rotten wood with our hands, and catching the moisture in our pannikins. Soon after leaving Te Pa Puni this morning, we came upon another of Te Kooti's victims, Te Mano, a chief of the Urewera Tribe, who, while Te Kooti was at Puketapu, had come from Maungapowhatu with his wife to join the Hauhaus, but it appears that Te Kooti did not like him, Te Kooti told him that his atua had warned him against Te Mano, who was a murderer, and would cause his (Kooti's) death, and wanted to kill him. The man, however, effected his escape, and succeeded in reaching Maungapowhatu. Te Kooti ordered fifty men to follow him; they did so, and brought him back with his wife as far as Te Pa Puni. Here Te Kooti met them, and killed them with his sword. After all were camped, one of the prisoners gave us a very interesting account of Te Kooti's ways, and the fear in which he is held by them, they looking upon him as a god. In one part of the conversation, he said the whole country round stunk with the bodies of Te Kooti's victims. To-morrow we sleep close to Maungapowhatu, the reputed impregnable pa. Next day we shall attack. I have heard much of bad country and have seen a great deal, but never worse than that we passed over to-day. It is raining, but we only feel it dropping from the trees, the foliage being too thick to allow of its penetrating to us. 12th March. —During the whole of to-day's march it has been raining, consequently we are all miserably wet. Our track still lies through a dense bush and along the beds of mountain torrents, and it has been almost as dark as night. In crossing one of the streams to-day, two of our dogs were washed away and drowned ; and although at the crossing place the depth of water was not more than one foot and a half, yet many of the men fell, the current was so strong. The prisoners tell us that if a southerly wind prevails we could not reach Maungapowhatu, as the snow would be many feet deep in these torrents. They always watch the winds when starting on a journey in this direction. The name of the last-mentioned stream is Wanapukau. Our food is now getting short. We are in hopes of getting plenty from the enemy to-morrow. 13lh March, Sunday. —Before starting this morning the order of march was determined by Bopata. Two parties of men, sixty in each, were told off, all picked men. One party was commanded by myself, the other by Bopata; the main body in charge of Henare Potae. Just above Maungapowhatu our track separated —I taking the one leading to the pa of Te Eakiroa, guided by one of the prisoners. I
A.—No. 8b
44
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
was to surprise the pa and take all prisoners, if possible, without firing a shot, lest other places might be alarmed. We marched some distance through bush, gradually descending to the terrace upon which the pa was situated. On getting near the pa, at the edge of a potato clearing, we halted. I then told the men to throw off their swags. I then divided into three divisions—twenty men under Peno Waipapa and twenty under Wi Tahata, keeping the other twenty in the centre, and extending the other parties on either flank. I allowed time for them to extend and cut off retreat. I then advanced from the centre, with a man bearing a flag in front. After getting through the clearing, I found that we were quite close upon the pa. I then deemed it advisable to surprise at once. We then charged from all sides, and took them completely by surprise, without firing a single shot ; number of'prisoners taken, forty. Eakiroa, however, had been absent for some weeks before, having with a few men gone to Te Kooti. Among the prisoners are some men who left Te Kooti after the fight at Eotorua. They do not know the whereabouts of Te Kooti, but suppose him to be at Waioweka. While waiting to cook food, I sent seven men to bring in some boys who were out catching kakas. Firing was then heard in the direction Eopata had taken to Toriatai. I then felt anxious to rejoin the main body, as I found the support of thirty men that should have followed us had not done so. It was arranged between myself and Bopata that no shots were to be fired, unless in the event of any of the prisoners trying to escape. Just after starting, we saw, at apa called Tawika, a flag flying, which we supposed to be Major Kemp's. Before reaching tho position of Eopata at Toriatai, firing had ceased. On getting to that place, I found the main body cooking food in umus. Eopata then informed me that on approaching the pa they found it evacuated, but some of the men afterwards going out for food, were fired into by the enemy, killing one of our men, named Bene Kerikeri, the ball having passed through his brain. The men were at once in pursuit, but could not succeed in getting any of the Hauhaus. At night a gun was fired from the top of a range in front of our position, and a man called out that he was a rongo pai from Major Kemp, and telling us that it was to Major Bopata, and that he came from Major Kemp, who was at Tawhana. We called to the man to come in, but he was evidently afraid. Some men went in search but could not find him. lith March. —We are now encamped at the celebrated Maungapowhatu —the first war-party that has ever penetrated so far. The Ngapuhi could not succeed in getting here in days when they ravaged the Island. The mist and clouds have now cleared away, and we can obtain a splendid view of the surrounding country. Maungapowhatu is not what it has hitherto been represented to be, nor yet what it appears from a distance —a mountain rising from amidst a number of lesser ones. It is the termination of the highest range in the centre of the Urewera country. Maungapowhatu is a perpendicular rock, of about 500 feet in height, on the summit of which is the original pa, which has for many years been abandoned. There are now three small pas lying upon terraces, separated by deep gullies, yet all forming part of Maungapowhatu itself. Buatahuna and Waikari are visible from the summit. Looking in every direction nothing is discernible but a succession of high mountains, presenting one of the most rugged and broken scenes imaginable, and almost making one despair of ever getting into open country again. We saw two very fine caves ; inside of one was written on the ceiling the following inscription: —" Te iho ote poki," evidently done many years ago. I wrote my name on the rock in both English and Maori. Among the prisoners taken yesterday is a Urewera, proper name Iharaia Motu, whom Bopata had sent out to the tribe, telling them to give themselves up to us. He had not been gone long before he returned, having met a kekiri of Ureweras coming to attack us. The chief of the party, Ihaka Whareraupo, getting Bopata's letter, returned an answer telling us they had received a flag of truce from Major Kemp, who had gone back from Tawhana, and that they would adhere to tho terms if we returned to our wives and families at once. We have been greatly perplexed by this rongo pai. Eopata is greatly annoyed at the steps Kemp has taken, but is determined to keep what prisoners we have already taken. We are now determined to march towards Tawhana to get correct information of Kemp's doings. Eopata has sent the Urewera messenger out again with further letters, in which he speaks threateningly of their daring to come to meet him with a kokiri, when they carry with them a rongo pai. On further inquiry of the messenger, it was not the Buatahuna Urewera coming to attack us, but a part of the tribe Ngatihuri. They sent in a wooden meremere as a token of peace, which Eopata would not accept. It is now in my possession. 15th March.— Our messenger returned, but with no further particulars from Buatahuna. We think our messenger has been playing us false. We expect an attack to be made upon us, not knowing if Te Kooti is in the neighbourhood or not. Baining all day and frightfully cold. 10(A March. —Left Toriatai going in the direction of Taueka, where we saw the white flag flying. Expect to get information there. Bopata left letters at Toriatai telling the Ureweras to be warned, as if he had to return in the summer, he would not leave a man or a woman alive. A short time after our leaving, a few shots were fired in our rear —no doubt by some of the enemy, who watched our departure. When we got to Taueka Pa, we found it deserted, and a letter left for Eopata from Kemp, which was brought over by Tamaikowha, who probably deemed it best to leave the letter in our way, instead of delivering it himself. Kemp tells us that he has left with the Urewera a rongo pai, and wishes us to respect it, and to follow on and join him as soon as possible. Although greatly against our wishes we released the Urewera prisoners, Iharaia Motu and his wife. Eopata sent more letters to the Urewera, warning them not to protect Te Kooti if he returned to them. He also told them that he would respect the rongo pai this time, but not to let him come again. 17th March. —After leaving camp this morning, we ascended a range which took us exactly seven hours in reaching its top. We captured a prisoner here, who told us he was one of Tamaikowha's men, and intended going to join his chief, who had proceeded to Buatahuna, with rongo pai to Urewera. On the evening we reached Tawhana, the pa of Tamaikowha, and captured two more old fellowrs, and could have caught several others, but did not care about doing so only to have to let them go again. Our track since leaving Maungapowhatu has been a gradual decline. We are now in a comparatively low country. Once more I have learned to-day that the Urewera prisoner released by us at Taueka, was the murderer of Bennett White, and that the body of Bennett White was carried to the pa where
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
45
A.—No. Bb.
we captured the prisoners, and was there eaten. Our information was received too late, or the wretch would not have escaped. Our march for to-morrow will be along the bed of the river leading into the Waimana. We make a forced march to-morrow. Wo had some pork to-night, which was the first piece of animal food we had tasted for a fortnight. 18th March. —Left Tawhana at 2 o'clock this morning, marching through the bed of the river nearly all the way, many parts of which are very deep, and the boulder rocks very trying to the feet. Our march to-day has been fifteen hours ; some of the men were quite knocked up. Wo are also now very short of food. Two men were obliged to bo carried. Our camping place to-night is at Te Punga. 19th March. —Our march to-day has been another very fatiguing one ; men all very foot-sore and hungry. My food to-day was some biscuit-dust and kauka tree roasted. Our track has been through the bed of the river all day. When reaching the plain leading from the Waimana to Ohiwa, the men were so delighted at the sight of a little open country that, after plunging into the river to refresh themselves, they all joined in a war dance. I myself felt quite refreshed at the sight of a little level country. We expected to have reached Ohiwa to-night, but many of the men were quite unable to walk from fatigue and hunger. Our supper to-night consisted of grass-tree. Just before getting to the Waimana this morning, a shot was fired in our rear, doubtless by one of Tamaikowha's people, who had watched our march. 20th March, Sunday. —Beached the crossing at Ohiwa this morning, but were compelled to wait until afternoon for low water, to allow of our crossing. When we approached Marsh's pa, they mistook us for Hauhaus of Te Kooti. I fortunately went on in advance, thinking it strange that no one should be about to meet us. When I got close to the pa two men came out to meet me, and asked me who we were ? I replied Ngatiporou ; upon which the people came out of tho pa to welcome us. We found Major Kemp there, with some of his men. After having eaten a welcome meal of kumaras, maize, &c, we had some talk with Kemp, who was then leaving for Opotiki, he promised to meet us next morning. To Kooti is supposed to bo at Waioeka. We intend to be on his track at once. 21st March. —Left Ohiwa at 4 a.m., expecting to get to Opotiki in time for the tide, but getting to the crossing we found the tide well in, and were therefore compelled to cross in canoes. Kemp started away last night, immediately on his return from Ohiwa. Ho has gone by a track that will bring him on tho flank of the pa where Te Kooti is supposed to be. We start to-morrow by the direct track up the Waioeka, Eopata was annoyed at Kemp leaving without arranging some plan of attack. I find that we cannot get a supply of rations until to-morrow, they having been all consumed by the Wanganuis. 22nd March, —Despatches sent to Tauranga reporting our return. I have been busy all day in getting rations for the march. Succeeded only in getting five days' rations, and that partly in potatoes. Obtained two guides for the expedition. At 5 p.m. started, leaving our sick, some forty in number, behind us. 23rd March. —Our march to-day has been up the bed of the Waioeka Gorge, tho water in many places being up to the armpits. We are encamped to-night close to Kairakau, the scene of one of the fights in 1865, which has not been visited since. We shall take it to-morrow. Passed two places to-day where outlying picqucts have been stationed. They had built walls with some stonesfrom the river bed near the most difficult crossing-places. Went in advance with To Aowera, and getting to Kairakau, we found that it had been abandoned some few days previous. We stayed here for dinner, and found large quantities of kumaras, pumpkins, &c. Our track still lies through tho river bed, which is very difficult, the rocks being large and slippery. We have been expecting to hoar firing, as Kemp should have reached Maraetahi ere this. We suppose ho must have fallen in with To Kooti's trail, and followed elsewhere. We attack Maraetahi in the morning. We have heard much of its strength from tho Wakatohea guides, who tell us that the Kawanatanga could not reach it in 1865. Although it is raining now we cannot light fires, lest the enemy should see the smoke. 25th March, —The Maraetahi Pa fell into our hands this morning after some short resistance, but with few casualties on our side. During the attack on tho pa we were quite unaware of its being occupied by Te Kooti, the defence being so feeble as compared with his usual mode of lighting. The details arc as follows : — Getting to the narrowest part of the gorge, where the track passes under an immense perpendicular rock, our advance was fired into by an outlying picquet of the enemy. Our fellows did not shrink, but pressing on returned the fire most effectually, driving the enemy before us. Two of the Hauhaus were here wounded, and are now prisoners. One rifle and three guns were left behind in their hasty retreat. The part of tho gorge where the picquet attacked was that on which the enemy depended solely for the defence of tho pa, as if properly defended it was almost impassable, aud there was no other approach. Our hasty advance, however, completely disconcerted their plans, as we met a kokiri coming to relieve tho picquet, but they in turn were compelled to retreat to the pa. Turning a bend in the river, we came in sight of the pa and could see the Hauhaus running about from whare to whare. We kept up a steady advance and fire upon the pa, which lay on the opposite side of the river, very high above us. A great number of the enemy retired to a hill just in rear of and above tho pa, keeping up a fire upon us, but doing no damage. Seeing so very few men in the place, we thought that the Whakatohea alone were opposed to us. We still pressed on, and in less than one hour and a half from the time of the picquet's attack we were in possession of Maraetahi Pa, the resting-place of Te Kooti. The enemy had gone. Our men were at once in pursuit. Eopata and a greater portion of the men remained behind, still being under the impression that it was Whakatohea alone who occupied the pa, although we found many things that led us to suppose that Te Kooti had been there lately, such as blank cheques, &c. In the evening a woman of Whakatohea came in and told us that she had bolted back from Te Kooti, and that Kemp was coining up in rear, and that nearly all Whakatohea were prisoners in his hands. She stated that she was in the pa when the firing of the outlying picquet of twenty men was heard. Te Kooti at onco collected men to go to their relief, and to oppose our approach. The remainder of the men, women, and children, dispersed in different directions at once. Te Kooti at last was completely deserted by his men, and left alone to defend the 12
A.—No. 8b
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
46
pa. While we were advancing in the morning, after nearly all the firing had ceased, a man got up on the top of a whare and called out to us, "Ko Wanganui tenei." He then fired three times at us. I and Eru Bangiwaha ran up and fired two shots at close range at him, but little thought at that time it was To Kooti himself. Every man now is greatly exasperated to think how narrowly the rebel escaped us. Te Kooti had only sixty-seven men with him in the pa at the time of attack. We found very largo quantities of food planted here, some five acres of "taro," and many acres of maize, &c. It is the largest Native plantation 1 ever remember to have seen. It appears that. Te Kooti left men here last year, after his escape from Ngatapa, 1o plant food, and to build him a church, as after ho had visited the King and Taupo he would return here, his atua appointing this his place of rest, saying the Kawanatanga would never reach here. We found a splendid new church built for him. It was eighty-four feet in length, and thirty feet wide, beautifully finished. It was covered from end to end with two large kiakia mats, plaited crosswise. Along the centre of each there were scriptural names worked in red wool, in letters six inches in depth. Te Kooti had only the opening service in his church some few days before we attacked the pa. He then had again assured his people that the Kawanatanga would never reach there. A pretty little carved house was also destroyed by us, which had been built for Te Kooti's own private abode. Altogether we destroyed forty-two whares, many of" them large ones. 26th March. —At daylight, 120 men'started out to endeavour to follow the trail of To Kooti. .In the afternoon Kemp and Topia, with our men out since yesterday, returned, bringing in 303 prisoners, who were escaping from here and fell into their hands. Nineteen of the enemy were killed since the attack upon the pa, many of them falling unawares into the hands of the Wanganuis, when followed by our men in. the rear. Hakaraia is amongst the killed ; Kereopa, Karanama, and Kaiwhatu, narrowly escaped in the confusion of taking so many prisoners. It was horrible to see the manner in which some of the dead were hacked about. One man was partly in aud partly out of the river, his head wassmashed to atoms, aud the brains floating about upon the water. 27th March, Sunday. —The 120 men out yesterday returned, bringing three prisoners, and report having killed one man. They followed the track of some thirty men as far as Te Punga. At Waimana learned it was the Urewera of Te Kooti returning to Buatahuna, and hearing from one of the prisoners that Te Kooti had not gone in that direction, they returned. At dark a man came in to give himself up, and reports himself as one of a picquet of ten men sent by To Kooti to reconnoitre our camp. He says that To Kooti has taken refuge in a potato clearing some distance in rear of this place; that he has with him twenty men and a few women. It is too dark to-night to go out, but at daylight 300 men will start to endeavour to catch him. 28th March. —We started this morning in two parties of 150 men each, the one of Wanganui and the other of Ngatiporou. Wo travelled over some very bad places, being afraid to keep tho direct track lost we should meet any of Te Kooti's scouts, and they should give him the alarm. We fell in with one fellow this morning, but were afraid of shooting him ;ho consequently escaped. Some of the men called to him to come, but he did not seem to see the force of it. Some of the men since say it was Te Kooti himself, because he had riding boots on. 29//* March. —We did not get to the clearing where we expected to find Te Kooti till this morning, and when we did so we found it deserted, and no main trail to follow on. They must have, dispersed singly for some appointed rendezvous. We searched the bush for some hours, but without finding any one. When, returning, in tho bed of the creek where the dead Hauhaus were, we found a number of" them buried, and others half-eaten by dogs; also two dogs hanging upon a tree close by, evidently done by the Hauhaus. 30th March. —I, with fifty men, started in advance this morning at 5 o'clock, to come on to Opotiki, leaving the main body to come on with prisoners. We made the journey very quickly to-day, doing that in eleven hours which took us two days and a half to do before. Many of the men were knocked up completely, and were compelled to remain behind. Seven men only, out of the fifty -who started with me, reached Opotiki the same night. 31.4-/ March. —Bopata, Komp, and. the main body came in about 5 o'clock this evening. I had rations all ready for them. I have selected the worst of the male prisoners to await their trial. All anxiously expecting the Defence Minister's arrival. The Hon. the Defence Minister arrived on the Bth April, and has since been occupied in closing the campaign for the present season. The Whanganui have departed for their homes ; all satisfied with tho treatment of the Government. Ngatiporou have gone to their homes, there to await another call upon their loyalty, if required. This ends the most successful expedition ever undertaken by the Government, and could only have been accomplished by Natives, who are acquainted with the different kinds of food to be found in their country. It is by Natives alone that such expeditions can meet with any success. During the seven years of active service I have seen, lam well able to judge of what can bo done by Europeans and by Natives. Where the former would starve, the latter would find plenty. There is also a spirit of emulation among Natives which leads them to endeavour to gain the name of Toa on their return to their homes. It is the reverse with Europeans, who are only brought together by the discipline of soldiers. When difficulties beset them, each man thinks only of self —of course there are exceptions, but the few are lost among the many. Also, the class of men now in the Colonial service is not what it was in former days. It is only with Natives that unity of action can be obtained. They should not be trammelled with European officers, only in eases where agreeable to themselves, as it too often happens that in cases where a European officer is attached to Natives, he overrates the authority confided to him, and wishes to assert his superiority over them, in consequence of which he becomes disliked and obnoxious to them. He must also act firmly with younger men, and with chiefs he must condescend to ask opinions of them, and not persist in thrusting his own upon them. By adopting an intermediate course, it often leads to the desired end. It is by employing friendly Natives alone that the kind of warfare now raging in the Island will be brought to an end. It is no longer pa fighting, but bush, where the European soldier is of little use. I may be wrong in my opinion here, but I have had long experience, both in command of Europeans and Natives.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
47
A.—No. Bji
No. 71. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Lieutenant Porter. General Government Offices, Sir,— Auckland, 16th May, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of 28th April, enclosing a journal and plan of the expedition through tho Urewera Country, and beg to convey to you the thanks of the Government for tho valuable information therein contained. I have, &c, Lieut. Porter, &c, Turanganui. Donald McLean.
No. 72. Captain Preecis to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir— Te Teko, 30th April, 1870. I have tho honor to report for your information that I left this post on the 15th instant with seventy men and six pack-horses. I arrived at Fort Galatea on the 16th ; the next day I took ten mounted men to scout the Ahikereru road. Having done so, without seeing any sign of the enemy, I proceeded to Tauaroa, where I found and captured three horses and one saddle ; the enemy, four in number, had only just made off into the bush, as some kits of honey were left, which had only been taken from a tree a short time before. I returned to camp without seeing further signs. These men must have seen mo crossing the plain, and made off. On the 19th I started for Horomanga with ten mounted men, where I found tho tracks of twenty men and women leading up the gorge. I then started for Eaoraopatete, from whence the tracks came; but my horses being tired, I was compelled to return to camp without getting there. On my return to camp, I found that Captain Mair had arrived with fifty-two men. After consultation with that officer, I decided on leaving for Eaoraopatete with eighty men, and leave forty in charge of the redoubt. We accordingly started for that place at daylight the next morning, and arrived there the same day ; there were no signs of the place having been occupied except by the party whose tracks we saw at Horomanga, who are evidently of the Patuheuheu tribe. We returned to Fort Galatea the next day without seeing further traces. On the 22nd I wrote, in conjunction with Captain Mair, to the Ahikereru Natives, telling them to come in and make clear the way to follow up Te Kooti. I sent a man belonging to my force, named Te Meihana (who gave himself up at Fort Galatea last year), with the letter. We started on the 23rd to meet Major Boberts at Heruiwi, but were detained by the rain at Taumatawahine on the 21th. Te Meihana arrived in the evening with news that Paraone Te Tuhi, Ihaia Turingonge, Toma, Te Wharehuia, Piniha, Hemi Ngohi, and two women, and six children, had come with him, and were at Fort Galatea. The next morning we went to Fort Galatea, and sent orderly to Major Boberts, saying we should be unable to meet him. These men bring news that the Urewera have deserted To Kooti, and that only sixteen of them went with him to Opotiki • that Te Kooti is still in the bush near Waioeka, gathering the Morehu of his force ; he has lost his best men in the late fight; that he intends, so soon as he can raise 200 men, attacking either Wairoa or the Ngatiporou settlements ; he has said that Ngatiporou will ultimately become his tribe. Unless the Urewera rejoin him, there is little hope of his getting 200 men. lam of opinion that if a dash were made into the Urewera country numbers of them would give in, and that if tho Urewera were once on our side the chance of catching Te Kooti would be much greater. I may state, however, that the season is almost too far advanced, unless it was done quickly, and also that the Natives would require to have boots, as their feet are sore with travelling over pumice. To Waru and his brother Beiliana are at Waikare-Moana with about 70 men; tho latter sent the cap belonging to a man (friendly Native) killed at Te Marumaru to Te Kooti. Te Kooti is much discomfited by late fight; he blames his men for not obeying his orders, viz., to scatter in the bush. On the 26th we sent a letter by Mere Peka (Kohi's wife) to Kohi (Hapurona) and Hamiora, telling them to come in with all their people. She was to have returned on the 28th with an answer, but she failed to do so. There, however, is still a chance of their coming out. I may mention that this tribe (Ngatiwhare), although engaged in war against us, more or less, for the. last ten years, have never been guilty of any great crimes. Kohi committed himself by leading the Urewera at the attack on Mohaka. lam of opinion that good might result if Kohi were to come in, as, besides being chief of Ngatiwhare, he is one of tho leading men of the Urewera proper, who might be inclined to come to terms if ho wcro to surrender. On tho 29th both parties left —Captain Mair for Kaiteriria, and myself for this post, where I arrived at 4 p.m., having run quite out of food. Captain Mair left one of his men at Fort Galatea to wait all day for Hapurona and party, should they come out. I sent him with a letter to the mouth of the gorge leading to Ahikereru, where he was to leave it in a conspicuous place ; the purport of the letter was telling them to come to this post, where their friends are. I have, &c, George Preece, Capt., The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. Commanding Te Teko.
No. 73. Captain Preece to Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner. Sic,— Te Teko, 30th April, 1870. I have the honor to report for your information, that whilst at Fort Galatea, I, in conjunction
A.—No. 8b
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
48
with Captain Mair, wrote to the Ahikereru Natives, telling them to come in. Wo sent Te Meihana with tho letter on the 22nd; he returned on the 24th, bringing with him Paraone Te Tuhi (chief), Ihaia Turingonge, Toma Te Wharchuia, Piniha, Hemi Ngohi, two women, and six children. We sent a letter to Hapurona, telling him to come in with all his men (17) ; he had not made his appearance up to the time we left Fort Galatea. Captain Mair left a man who was to wait all day to see if he came out. I think it very important to get Kohi (Hapurona) out, as he is not, only chief of Ngatiwhare but a man of great influence in the Urewera. I will send Te Tuhi to you, as ho gives much valuable information; you will be able to converse with him, which will be better than keeping him here and sending you the information by letter. I will, however, give you a short outline of what he says, viz., that Te Kooti is near Waioeka in the bush; lost all his best men in the late fight; is waiting to collect 200 men, and then attack either Wairoa or Ngatiporou friendly settlements; that, although Eopata may follow him in the bush, Ngatiporou will ultimately become his (Te Kooti's) tribe: he lost two of his best men at Opape — Tamehana Teketeke (who killed Hartuett at Chatham Islands), and Pinere ; also at the late fight Karanama. Te Waru and Eeihana arc at Waikare-Moana. The Urewera have deserted Te Kooti; only sixteen went with him to Opape. George Preece, Capt., 11. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Tauranga. Commanding Te Teko.
No. 74, His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. (Telegram.) Napier, 30th April, IS7O. "St Kilda " returned this morning from Coast. From Major Westrup, dated 20th instant, I hear that Mr. Porter and 85 Ngatiporou had arrived at Turanga, but that Eopata with his main body had not. Westrup sent " St. Kilda" down to Tologa Bay, to bring Eopata's force on. " St. Kilda" went accordingly, and found Eopata had started overland, so that he is at Turanga. She then came on here, but has experienced very bad weather. Eopata has in all 300 men. I propose to send Mr. Locko in " St. Kilda" to Turanga, to start Eopata off. Steamer will then go on to land telegraph material at Maketu and Tauranga. I send after this a report from Gilbert Mair of information received by him from Urewera wdio have come in. It appears to me doubtful whether Te Kooti is at Waioeka or whether he has not gone to Waikare-Moana. I would propose, however, that instructions shoul dbo sent to Lieut.-Colonel St. John, commanding at Opotiki, to gather such a force as he is able, and make a dash at the Waioeka Gorge. If Te Kooti is there, he may do something. At any rate it will be doing what •ought to be done. If you approve, will you send necessary instructions to St. John by telegraph here, which can be landed at Opotiki by " St. Kilda" on her way up. There arc plenty of Natives, William King's and others, at and near Opotiki, so that St. John should not need men. I could send some biscuit from here, which would be required. In sending Air. Locke to Turanga, I should instruct him to arrange plan of operation for Waikare-Moana with Eopata; then see Eopata off, and start for Wairoa to see Natives from there make simultaneous movement. A week's fine weather would sec the thing done. I should like to start " St. Kilda" this evening, so please acquaint mo with your decision on what I propose. Alair's information is very vague, aud I should judge the Urewera hapu who have come in have not had much intercourse of late with Te Kooti. It shows, however, how desirable it is to complete Te Kooti's destruction if possible ; and simultaneous movements from Opotiki on Waioeka, with Eopata acting on Waikare-Moana, will do all that can be done to insure this. " St. Kilda" will return here after landing telegraph material, and call at different places, bringing word of what is going on. Ormond.
No. 75. The Hon. the Colonial Secretary to His Honor J. D. Ormond. (Telegram.) Wellington, 30th April, 1870. Send in my name, instructions, as suggested by you, to Colonel St. John, at Opotiki. Let Mr. McLean know by first opportunity. I presume the expeditions you refer to are on the lump-sum-contingent-on-success system. We cannot continue to give daily pay. I will have Mr. Bishop seen to-day about the captain of the " St. Kilda," and let you know the result. His Honor J. D. Ormond, Napier. W. Gisborne.
No. 76. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. (Telegram.) Napier, 2nd May, 1870. I acted on your authority, and sent instructions to St. John to use every exertion to scour tho Waioeka District. I informed him Te Kooti was believed to be hiding there, and that the Government were most anxious to complete late successes. I think he will easily get a force from William King and Marsh of Ohiwa, to go in and clear out Waioeka; it is only some thirty miles from Opotiki. I told him Natives must give services under the new conditions of pay dependent on success. I sent some biscuit to make sure no hinderance should arise. Mr. Locke went by the " St. Kilda" to Poverty Bay. He will get Bopata off as quickly as possible ; arrange with him to go to and clear out the WaikareMoana kaingas, and generally arrange with Eopata plans I have given him. As soon as Eopata is off, Locke goes overland to Wairoa, and will get those Natives to move, and act in concert with Eopata. No doubt they will move when they hear Eopata is advancing, and then numbers may tell. Altogether I think some results ought to follow. I am sending to Mair and Preece to go back to their late
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
49
A.—No. Bb,
position in about a week, and make a dash at Ahikereru to get the remainder of Ngatikohatu. Thus we ought to be making three separate moves in about a week from now on the Urewera from different quarters, and I believe the effect will be very good whatever may come of the movements. I report all this to McLean by the " Star of the South," leaving here for Auckland to-morrow. Oemond.
No. 77. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Napier, 3rd May, 1870. I have the honor to transmit copies of telegrams from Captains Mair and Preece, dated 27th and 28th April, the one being a copy of a report to yourself, which was also forwarded to my address. I reported the information contained in these telegrams to the Hon. the Premier and the Colonial Secretary, and suggested that instructions might be sent to Lieut.-Colonel St. John to endeavour to scour the Waioeka District. I received in reply directions to act upon the suggestions I had made, and was requested to give the necessary instructions. I enclose herewith copy of tho letter I sent to Lieut.-Colonel St. John, which was despatched by the s.s. " St. Kilda " on the Ist instant. On the 30th April I heard by the return of the " St. Kilda" from Poverty Bay, that Bopata was there with 300 men ; and desiring to make sure no unnecessary delay occurred, I despatched Mr. Locke by the " St. Kilda," on. the morning of the Ist May to Poverty Bay, with instructions to get Bopata started for Waikare-Aloana, and then proceed overland to Wairoa, and endeavour to so arrange that the expedition from there should act in concert with Bopata's movement. Since the departure of the "" St. Kilda," I have received by the overland mail a letter from Major Westrup (copy of which is enclosed, dated 26th April), to which is attached an extract from a letter from Captain Walker to Mr. Porter, which states that Te Kooti is now at Waikare- Moana. By the same overland mail I received the enclosed report from Captain Newdand, informing me that expeditions had moved from Wairoa and Mohaka, accompanied by Mr. Hamlin and Mr. Witty, for Waikare-Moana. I enclose a copy of a letter sent this day to Mr. Hamlin, desiring him to so arrange his movements .as to let Bopata get up before he makes any attack upon the enemy ; and I am inclined to think that the presence of his force at either Tikorangi or Te Kiwi will occupy the attention of the enemy, and give Bopata a chance to work behind him. If this can be accomplished, and the information received .as to Te Kooti being at Waikare-Moana is correct, there is every probability that the present operations may prove successful. You will observe that I have endeavoured to urge upon Mr. Hamlin to communicate if possible with Major Bopata and Mr. Witty, and have dwelt upon the importance of making the movement a combined attack. From tho information given by the Ngatiwhare who have surrendered to Captain Mair, it is evident that so long as Te Kooti is at large we shall continue to have to provide against -continual raids on his part, and also that he can still calculate upon the support of a section of the Urewera. So far as the movements from the East Coast are concerned I think what is now in progress should do much to cow the enemy, and secure quiet for the winter, whether successful in crushing To Kooti or not. In connection with the foregoing operations from the East Coast, I propose to have a dash made :about the same time from the Taupo side into Ahikereru, and perhaps Buatahuna. For this purpose I have requested Captains Mair and Preece, with their force, to move up at the end of this week to near the Ahikereru entrance to the bush. Major Boberts will join them there with a body of the •Constabulary, and the combined force will then make a rapid movement on Ahikereru, and if practicable on Buatahuna. Hapurona (or Kohi), with about thirty men, is known to be at Ahikereru, and is not likely to give himself up, as he was at Mohaka and concerned in the murders there. Paerau, with about fifty men, is said to be at Buatahuna, and it is possible Te Kooti may be sheltering there wdth him. I have telegraphed to Inspector Boberts to give his opinion as to the practicability of the expedition making Buatahuna, and if he reports favourably I think it will be wrell to undertake it. It is certain that with this present month must terminate all active operations, and I am anxious to do what can be done before the winter sets in. I shall be glad to hear the arrangements proposed have your approval, and hope to be able at no -distant time to report favourable progress. I have, &c. The Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure 1 in No. 77. Captain Breece to His Honor J. D. Ormond. (Telegram,) Fort Galatea, 27th April, 1870. Left Te Teko with seventy men on 15th ; arrived here 16th ; next day captured three horses and saddles, the riders had just escaped into the bush. Saw no further signs of enemy, returned to camp. On 19th went to Horomanga, found tracks of about twenty men and women going up the gorge. Captain Mair joined mo with fifty-two men. Being anxious about my rear, I decided, after consultation with Captain Mair, to leave forty men here and take eighty to Eaoraopatete. We went there, no sign of the enemy. Sent twenty of my men back to strengthen Kokohinau. Wrote on 22nd to Ahikereru, in conjunction with Captain Mair, telling them to come in. Native messenger Meihana returned, bringing with him Chief Paraone te Tuhi, and four others. We have written to Hamiora and Kohi to come in. Expect answer to-day. These men, except Kohi, had been guilty of no great crime. Kohi's crime is being with Te Kooti at the attack on the women and children at Mohaka. The rest of Ahikereru Natives have always been against us, but have not been guilty of any great crimes. In our letters to 13
A.—No. 8b
50
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
them we promised they would not be punished, but at the same time said that did not allude to any who had been guilty of the murder of men, women, and children. These men had parted from Te Kooti at the fight at Botorua. Te Kooti sent for them to go to Opotiki with him; they refused to go. Te Kooti took their guns, and gave them to some of his men who had none. The information they give is that Te Kooti is still in the vicinity of Waioeka collecting his men. They think he will make a raid on the other side, either Wairoa or some of the Ngatiporou settlements this side of the East Cape ; he having threatened both places, it is doubtful which he may go to. Urewera are parted from him, they did not go to Waioeka with him. Are tired of the way he keeps them moving from place to place, sometimes without either food or rest. Trooper Kepa was kept prisoner by Kereru. Te Kooti was going to kill him, but was overruled by the Urewera. Kereru is going to send him back when he sees his way to do so. Tamihana Teketeke, who killed Hartnett on leaving the Chatham Islands, was killed at Opape;. also Piniere, one of Te Kooti's best men. Karanama said to be killed at the late fight. Te Kooti has said that, although Eopata may follow him about in the bush, Ngatiporou will ultimately be his (Te Kooti's) tribe. Te Waru is now at Waikare-Moana with his brother Beihana. His Honor J. D. Ormond. Geoeoe Peeece.
Enclosure 2 in No. 77. Captain G. Mair to His Honor J. D. Ormond. (Telegram.) Fort Galatea, 28th April, 1870. Beceived your telegram last evening at 7 o'clock. Could not send orderly to-day; horses all knocked vp —will send to-morrow morning. Sent Te Meihana to Ahikereru with letters to Ngatiwhare on 22nd, telling them to come out, to trust to " Te aroha o to Kawanatanga" (love of the Government) ; that all men who had not taken a part in Te Kooti's murdering, &c, should bo well treated if they gave themselves up. Te Aleihana came back on the 24th with To Tuhi (Paraone), Ihaia Turingonge, Toma, Wi To Wharehuia, Pineaha Taoroa, and Hemi Te Ngohi, three women and six children ; total, fifteen. Te Tuhi (tho chief) says Kohi, Hamiora and fifteen or twenty others are anxious to come in ; so we wrote them letters on the 25th telling them to do so —that they should come in out of love to their women and children, &c, &c. From information gathered from these Natives, Te Kooti appears to be in tho Waioeka District still. He is deserted by tho Urewera, except those at Maungapowhatu. His best men were all killed at Pukokaroro when attacked by Ngatiporou and Whanganui. Says he will attack Whakatane and the Wairoa when he raises his force up to 200 men. As he wants men, he may go to Waikare-Moana, join Te Waru and Eeihana, who have fifty or sixty men there. Te Waru quarrelled with Te Kooti at Taupo ;Te Kooti threatened to kill him; but Eeihana sent the caps of the two friendly Natives killed at Marumaru to Te Kooti at Waioeka, so it is most likely they will make a common cause of it. If Wairoa Natives or Ngatiporou march on Waikare-Moana, a number of Urewera will join Te Kooti against them. Urewera are divided, but half seem in favour of peace. Te Kooti had fifty men with him when he got awray from Pukokaroro; will not go for Tahau till ho gets more men. The men who have come in from Ahikereru do not know much of Te Kooti; were made to go with him to Taupo and Waikato. Had their guns taken from them. Left To Kooti on plains day after fight at Eotorua. February 7th came to Ahikereru. Te Kooti sent for them but they would not go, so he went up Horomanga Gorge, from this place to Buatahuna. They have not seen him since. All they know concerning him is gathered from messenger from Buatahuna. None of them were at Mohaka or Turanga ; went with Te Kooti to Taupo, but say they did not take part in the attack on troopers at Opepe. They say Te Kooti was going to take one of the two roads leading from Maungapow^hatu and Waikare-Moana to Whakaki, close to Wairoa, collect all Hauhaus there (it is a Hauhau settlement), and attack Wairoa. That if Ngatiporou and Wairoa men come up he will make no attempt in that direction; will either move on Opotiki, try and cut off convoys on Napier Boad to Taupo, or dash across Kaingaroa Plain to Waikato. Ho has told tho Urewera that they must be brave and united—that great fighting will take place in Buatahuna. This is all the Natives say about him. The Ureweras have received letters from the Arawa and the Wanganui Natives. The Patuheuheu appear desirous to come in. We left a letter to them at the mouth of Horomanga Gorge. 10 p.m. —Kohi's wife, Mere Peka (our messenger to Ahikereru), has not returned. She promised to come back to-day with her husband and others. They have most likely been prevented by the Urewera. Kohi said he would like to come in if we went away. Are out of food, so must leave to-morrow for our respective posts, Kaiteriria and Te Teko. Will be back here in a short time, will then go to Ahikereru; Ngatiwhare may then come out. Season is rather advanced for expedition to Urewera country from this side. Natives should all have boots. Believe that a short sharp dash in there after Te Kooti would bring matters to a crisis. Think the Urewera would leave Te Kooti altogether, in spite of what To Tuhi and his companions say. It would be a great advantage to have tho Ngatiwhare out of Ahikereru. Boad to Buatahuna would then be quite clear. The Hauhaus have rather a dread of our flying columns constantly moving about this part of the country. The Natives who have come in will be sent dow m to Awa-o-te-Atua to-morrow, and handed over to their relations, the Ngatirangitihi and Ngatimanawa Natives, who will be responsible for them till the Government decide what is to be done with them. We told them, on behalf of the Government, that none should be punished but those who were connected with Te Kooti's murders. Te Kooti says many of the loyal Natives will yet join him. If Ngatiporou attack him again, he will spare none of their settlements. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond. G. Male. Captain.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES
51
A.—No. Bb,
Enclosure 3 in No. 77. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Officer Commanding, Opotiki. . Sir, — Napier, 31st April, 1870. By the authority of the Hon. the Colonial Secretary, I send the " St. Kilda" to Opotiki, to inform you that, from information gathered from Kohi's hapu of the Urewera, who have surrendered to Captains Mair and Preece, it is believed Te Kooti is still hiding with a small force in Waioeka Gorge, and the Government are desirous that an endeavour should be made to follow him. From the information given by the Urewera, it would appear that, shattered as Te Kooti's force is, he is still meditating mischief, and it is most desirable that every endeavour should be used to deal with him before the winter regularly sets in. I have therefore, by direction of the Government, to request you will at once take the necessary steps to get an expedition started to thoroughly scour the AVaioeka country. The Government expect that A^illiam King and the other Natives in your vicinity will willingly assist in this object, and you will please use every exertion to accomplish it. I am directed to point out that the services of the Natives employed by you must be taken on the understanding that they serve under tho same conditions as Eopata and the Ngatiporou, and that the remuneration they receive will depend upon what they perform. I send by the " St. Kilda " one ton of biscuit, thinking you may require it for the expedition. Should you do so, please direct the Captain, who will land it on your instructions. By advices received to-day from Poverty Bay, I learn that Major Eopata Wahwaha, with 300 men, is moving from Poverty Bay on Waikare-Moana, and another expedition is moving on the same locality from the Wairoa. Both Eopata and tho Wairoa Natives have been much delayed by the bad weather that has lately prevailed. I trust you may succeed in getting together an expedition which may account for Te Kooti, and would advise you, before starting, to communicate with Captains Mair and Preece, in order that extra vigilance may be used in case your movements succeed in driving Te Kooti to break away in their direction. Since I have commenced this letter I have received the enclosed telegram from the Hon. the Premier, confirming Mr Gisborne's former authority to request you to act. There is no necessity for any detailed instructions ; the object desired to be accomplished is to thoroughly rout out the Waioeka gorge and district, and either capture Te Kooti, if there, or drive him to seek another refuge. A movement from Opotiki in concert with Bopata's move on WaikareMoana will do much to complete the work that has already been done. The " St. Kilda" has orders to proceed to Maketu and Tauranga, after which she returns here calling at Opotiki for despatches. I trust you will be able to inform me by her that you have been able to arrange and start the proposed expedition. I have, &c, J. D. Ormond, To the Officer Commanding, Opotiki. General Government Agent.
Enclosure 4 in No. 77. Major Westrup to His Honor J. D. Oemond. Sir, — Gisborne, Poverty Bay, 26th April, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that Lieut. Porter has arrived, and reports that Major Eopata Wahawaha will not reach here until Wednesday next, 27th instant. Ngatiporou have not been able to secure a number of horses, on account of the very bad weather, so the expedition will consist of 300 men on foot. Tho men will likely rest here three or four days after their arrival, but I will use every exertion to get them off at onco. Mr. Porter is afraid that if the expedition from Te Wairoa starts at this time, it will alarm the rebels on the opposite shore of the Lake, and recommends that Ngatiporou be allowed to start from here six or seven days sooner than the expedition from Te Wairoa, to enable them to get well at the back of the rebel position before being disturbed. Lieut. Porter wishes me to mention that, on account of his accompanying expedition, he will not be able to get evidence against Maori prisoners until his return. I enclose an extract from Captain Walker's letter to Lieut. Porter, showing that Te Kooti is now at the Lake. I have, &c., His Honor J. D. Ormond, Napier. Chas. Westrup, Major.
Sub-Enclosure to Enclosure 4 in No. 77. Extract from Captain Walker's Letter to Lieut. Porter. " Opotiki, 15th April, 1870. " One of the Whakatoheas has just come in from Maraetahi. He says Te Kooti has gone to Waikare, so you are safe to fall in with him. This news is reliable. Te Kooti is in hopes of being reinforced there, and his intention is to come down to the Waiaua in May, and take away the Whakatohea. The messenger came down with thirteen of the Ngatiporou (Hauhaus), to sound the Whakatohea. He fell in with our scouts (Whakatohea), and of course is detained here. To-morrow they will be communicated with, with a view to induce them to come in. Mr. Campbell, B.M. of Waiapu, is here. " P.S.—Te Kooti left Maraetahi on the 9th, with thirty Urewera and ten of his own men. There are now at that place about forty men, mostly Whakatohea."
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
A.—No. 8b
52
Enclosure 5 in No. 77. Sub-Inspector Newland to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Te Wairoa (probable date, 28th April, 1870). I have the honor to acknowledge receipt of your letter of the 26th instant, and beg to inform you that Air. Hamlin left Te Kapu on Tuesday last with 135 Natives, and proceeded in the direction of the Marumaru, but they have been unable to proceed further in consequence of the bad w reather. On Wednesday, the 27th, I supplied Ihaka Whaanga with rations and ammunition for seventy-five of his men, who have proceeded to join Mr. Hamlin. Up to yesterday they had not left the Marumaru, but may have done so to-day, it being fine, and I think the weather is somewhat settled. His intention is to go up the Wairoa Eiver, visiting Whataroa, Orewha, Onepoto, and returning by the Waihua. I have made arrangements with Mr. Hamlin to send me any information regarding his movements, which I will forward to you without delay. He has taken Air. Saunders with him, in consequence of hia knowledge of the country, which he desired me to mention in my report to you. Mr. Witty left Mohaka on Monday last, the 25th, and proceeded in the direction of the Putere. His force have made up their minds to visit Tikitiki and Pukerua. Some of the Eiver Natives joined Mr. Witty's party, but I do not know his strength. I received a copy of despatch forwarded to you by Major Westrup, by which you will see that Eopata is at Turanganui. I have, <fee, His Honor J. D. Ormond, Napier. W. Newland, Sub-Inspector A.C.
Enclosure 6 in No. 77. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. F. E. Hamlin. Dear Sir, — Napier, 3rd May, 1870. I heard from Captain Newland that you had left Te Kapu with your expedition, and were at Marumaru on the 29th, detained by bad weather: also that Mr. Witty had left on the 26th for Waikare-Moana by Putere, and intended going to Tikitiki. On the 30th, the " St. Kilda" returned from Poverty Bay with news that Eopata and 300 men were there. I sent tho " St. Kilda" off with Air. Locke on Sunday, Ist May, at daylight. He is to see Eopata off for Waikare-Aloana, and then make for Wairoa to let you know Eopata's plans. Yesterday I received the enclosed letter from Alajor Westrup, with an extract from a letter from Captain Walker, of Opotiki, to Mr. 'Porter, who goes with Ngatiporou. You will see what these letters say, and that there seems every probability that Te Kooti is at Waikare-Moana. I have requested Captain Newland to send this letter after you, in order that you may arrange your movements so as to allow Eopata to get behind, if possible, before you go at the enemy. You will see the importance of this, and do your best to meet it. Ido not at all know where you can get food on the road, so as to stop ; but I conclude there are cultivations about from which you can get some supplies. At any rate, do what you can, for it is most important, if Te Kooti is at the Lake, to prevent his escape. I am inclined to think your keeping about Tikurangi and Te Kiwi, would keep the enemy employed in watching you, whilst Eopata got round him. It is also very important for you to advise Bopata where you are, and what you are doing, if it is possible to do so. You will hear Eopata's plans from Mr. Locke, to whom I will write to send all particulars after you at once, on his arrival at Wairoa. You will understand thoroughly, from what I have written, how to shape your course. I should advise, if the enemy shows, that you just keep his attention engaged until you are sure of Ngatiporou being up to cut off' his retreat. It would bo a grand termination for you to finish off' this business, and I believe a little judgment now will do it. So far as I can judge, Bopata will not leave Turanga until this morning. You will know better than I can tell you how long it will take him to move up. He will go by way of Te Bcinga I expect, and from there take a way so as to come out behind Waikare—at least, that is my opinion. lam somewhat anxious about Witty's movements. I believe very much in what he is trying to do, viz., get round from Putahi to Tikitiki, but he should not risk anything in doing it. I wrote him to this effect. Now that you are likely to have to check your advance, try and communicate with him, and support him as much as you can. It will be advisable also that he should know Eopata's movements, and try to make his dash at Tikitiki simultaneously with your advance on Onepoto, and Eopata's on Waikare. If we can only make these movements simultaneously, we must end the business, and you should use every endeavour to arrange matters so. I will write no more on what is to be done on your side the Lake. You will understand thoroughly the position of things, and do the best you can to meet it, I know. From the Taupo side I hear from Captains Mair and Preece that Kohi (Hapurona), and a section of Ngatiwhare, are desirous of coming in, and that Te Tuhi and some others have done so. I am endeavouring to arrange a movement from Ahikereru towards Buatahuna, simultaneously with yours and Bopata's attack on Waikare-Moana ; and I have allowed time for Bopata to get up. What I have directed to be done from that side is, from the Ngatiwhare prisoners' information. Captain Mair telegraphs me that Te Waru is still alive, and that he and Eeihana were lately at Waikereru-o-ana, which is somewhere about the Lake. I have nothing further of interest to communicate ; and relyifig on your judgment to make the operations you are engaged in a success, and wishing you every good fortune, I have, &c, Mr. F. E. Hamlin, Wairoa Exiedition. J. D. Ormond.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
53
A.—No. Ba,
No. 78. Captain Mair to Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner. Sir, —• Civil Commissioner's Office, Tauranga, sth May, 1870. I have the honor make the following report for your information: —Eeturned from Horehore, Ohaki, and Paeroa on the 16th April. Twenty-six of my men deserted me, owing, they said, to their having to wait so long for their pay. I marched with fifty men on the 17th, taking ten days' rations with me ; arrived at Fort Galatea on the 18th, and met Captain Preece on the 19th. On the 22nd we sent Te Meihana, of the Ngatimanawa, with a letter to the Ngatiwhare, calling upon them to come out, and offering protection to all those persons who had taken no part in Te Kooti's murders, &c. Upon receiving our letter, the Ngatiwhare consented to the terms contained therein ; and on the 21th, To Tuhi Paraone (the chief), Ihaia Turi Ngongo, Toma Te Wharahina, Pineaha, Hemi Te Ngohi, three women, and six children, returned with To Meihana to Fort Galatea. Hapurona Kohi, Hamiora, and others, remained behind, to collect, they said, some of their young people who were absent at Buatahuna. Wo had started for Heruiwi, but were not able to cross the Eangitaiki, owdng to tho heavy rain, so we returned to Fort Galatea. On. the 25th wo sent Mere Peka (Hapurona Kohi's wife) with letters to the Ngatiwhare in answer to theirs, and also to the Urewera, telling them to separate from Te Kooti, and not give him any assistance in the future. We waited till the 30th, expecting further news from Ahikereru, but, our provisions being entirely out, wo had to return to our respective posts. Paraone Te Tuhi is a very intelligent man. The following is about all tho information he gave us : —Te Kooti is in Waioeka: has been in that district ever since the attack made by Ngatiporou and Ngatihau. Lost most of his best men, but still has seventy or a hundred fighting men. Speaks confidently of being successful in future attacks upon Whakatane, Opotiki, the Ngatiporou settlements, the Wairoa, and Poverty Bay; though the Ngatiporou fight against him now, many of them will yet join him. Has told the Urewera to remain assembled in Buatahuna; that they will have plenty fighting there soon ; that, as soon as his force is sufficiently strong, he will attack tho above-mentioned places ; after that he will go to Waikato to fetch Tahau and his comrades. He told tho Urewera that it was through the people not obeying his orders that so many of them were killed at Waioeka. Te Tuhi and his companions do not know much about Te Kooti, as it is some time since they heard from Buatahuna. The)'' say that tho Urewera have quite lost faith in Te Kooti, and most of them are anxious for peace and w rould come out, but are afraid of punishment for having joined To Kooti. When our letters reached Ahikereru, Te Eanapia (a man concerned in Mr. Volknor's murder) started for Buatahuna, to endeavour to get the Urewera to prevent tho Ngatiwhare from coming out. Te Tuhi advises a sharp look-out along the Napier road to Taupo, as it was Te Kooti's intention to have attacked To Haroto, and cut off convoys with supplies. It is very probable that To Kooti will mako up his quarrel with To Waru and join him at Waikare-Moana Lake, where the hitter has fifty or sixty men, especially if an attack is made upon Waikare or Maungapowhatu. The Ngatiwhare, who remained at Ahikereru with Kohi and Hamiora, number about sixteen men and thirty women and children. Their guns were nearly all taken from them at Tapapa by To Kooti, who was very much offended because they said he was the cause of so many of them being killed. Kepa Te Ahuru is at Euafalmna with Paerau. Te Kewene (a chief of Ngatiporou from Mataoro) is at Ahikereru, suffering from a wound received in the fight at Ohinemutu, the bullet having struck him in tho eye, knocking it out and smashing his cheek. It would be a very great advantage getting the Ngatiwhare out of Ahikereru; then the road to Buatahuna would bo quite clear. The fear of being punished may make them hang back, but I think they will soon be inclined to come out, unless the attack made on Tamaikowha's party, who had come down to make peace, will cause the LTrewera to rise ; but for this circumstance, there is very little doubt but that they would have come out during our next expedition to Fort Galatea. I have, &c, Gilbert Mair, Captain, The Civil Commissioner, Tauranga. Commanding Arawa Flying Column.
No. 79. Captain Gilbert Mair to Mr. H. T. Clarke, Civil Commissioner. Sir, — Civil Commissioner's Office, Tauranga, Bth May, 1870. I have the honor herewith to enclose, for your information, copies of letters received last evening from Hapurona Kohi and the Urewera. Those letters were brought to Te Teko tho day before yesterday by a young Ngatiwhare Native named Bawiri. I nave hopes that the Ngatiwhare will all come out to us next time we go to Fort Galatea or Heruiwi. The tone of the letter from Buatahuna is not so favourable, as seen from the allusions made to Cnlonel St. John's attack upon Tamaikowha at Ohiwa. Captain Preece and myself have received instructions from Mr. Ormond to join Major Boberts at Heruiwi as soon as possible. I start to-morrow for Kaiteriria, and will move immediately after my arrival at that place. I have, &c, G. Mair, Captain, The Civil Commissioner, Tauranga. Commanding Arawa Flying Column.
Enclosure 1 in No. 79. To Arama Karaka, to Paia, and to Paraone Te Tuhi, — Te Teko, sth May, 1870. Friends, Bawiri has come here (from Ahikereru). We have heard the words of his mouth
A.—No. 8b
54
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
concerning the thoughts of Hapurona, Hamiora, and the Urewera. Their words are, the Urewera (Tuhoe) are all glad because of this peace. The reason of their delay is the recent murder at Ohiwa (Lieut.Colonel St. John's attack). This is why they did not come out soon after us. Another request of theirs is that I go to Buatahuna. Hapurona himself will escort me thither. If I had gone there at first, Paerau, Hapurona, and Hamiora would all have been brought out by us. This is also another word spoken by Tuhoe : " If I had known of this peace before I would not have been undecided ; and if this peace is true, let there be a meeting for all the tribes at Fort Galatea, and there talk over matters." Bawiri says if he is allowed to go back safely, they will come out, but not otherwise ; and they have appointed a day for him to return. Te Kooti is still at Waioeka. The Urewera are all very badly disposed towards him. They have fixed a boundary for this man. They are all assembled waiting. We have detained Bawiri until your return. As for me,l am all ready to go; and my desire is great that you speedily return, lest the Urewera should change their minds. This is all. Te Meihana, Corporal.
Enclosure 2 in No. 79. Buatahuna, 29th April, 1870. To Te Karamuramu (Fort Galatea), to all the Arawa, — Friends, salutations to you all. This is the word to you :We will not go out to you (make peace), although you say that there will be no darkness nor trouble with regard to our peacemaking. No, no. Listen. Blood lias been shed during the peace with Tamaikowha (alluding to Lieut -Colonel St. John's attack on Tamaikowha's peace deputation), and now because of this go you back to the sea. Te Kooti is not here, but only me (the Urewera). lam at rest (lying down). Go your way. Enough. From Tuhoe Potiki,* that is to say from the whole tribe, to all the Chiefs of the Arawa.
Enclosure 3 in No. 79. Ahikereru, 29th April, 1870. To Gilbert Mair, Captain; to George Preece, Captain; to Arama Karaka, to Paia, to Kihawa, that is, to all the Arawa, — Friends, salutations to you all. We have received your letters. We have seen your words for us all to go out to the coast. Listen : tho first peace was Kemp's to Tamaikowha, that is, to all Tuhoe (Urewera). We think your peace-making ought to be like that. Wo also, Tuhoe, are very much pleased with Kemp's peace. Kemp was a stranger (a man apart) ; his peace was good. Nothing satisfies you but taking us away bodily. Friends, our young men are all gone out to you. We are alone here. Perhaps you think that our thoughts differ from theirs. Would you bo strong and able to feed us if we went out to you, and lived in your presence ? Friends, Te Kooti is not here, but at Waioeka still. There is a road there for you to search for him. Perhaps you have seen the proclamation of peace of Kemp's and Tuhoe's. It is stuck up at To Taupaki (near Fort Galatea). Enough. Hapurona Kohi. Hamiora Potakurua. Enclosure 4 in No. 79. To the European Officer Commanding, Te Teko. Ahikereru, 29th April, 1870 Friend, salutations. This is the word to you from me. Do not make a mistake with regard to my child Bawiri, who is going out at the request of Captains Mair and Preece. I sent him out to take letters to them. Enough. Hapurona Kohi.
No. 80. Lieut.-Colonel St. John to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Opotiki, Bth May, 1870. I have the honor to report as follows: —On the 2nd instant, William King, of Ngaitai, brought up here a deserter from Te Kooti, by name Matenga, who informed me that Te Kooti and Hira Te Bopo were together at Te Tahora in Waioeka, and that he could lead me to his kainga. [Matenga's statement annexed.] Two women who accompanied him partly corroborated his statement. I at once rode down to Torere and Omarumutu, to obtain volunteers for a march ; and though I succeeded in getting Ngaitai to promise, yet Whakatohea refused to join without pay, alleging that by their absence their crops would be all ruined. On my return on the 4th, I found the " St. Kilda" with orders for me to collect a force to operate up tho Waioeka. Here again I found difficulties ; William King was highly indignant at having no title given him, and I had to pacify him. Then Whakatohea would not move, and I knew I could not get Ngatipukeko without pay. So, knowing how important it was to support Major Eopata, I interpreted the passage in Mr. Ormond's letter "that the pay should bo according to tho work done" in this force. If To Kooti were taken, they were to get no pay but the reward. If ho were missed * Note. —" Tuhoe the younger," the Urewera proverb or by-word.—G-. Maie.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A.—No. Bb.
55
but his force broken up and Waioweka cleared, then daily pay. To this they consented, and I appointed to-day to be the day of hui here, in order to give Alajor Eopata time for his more lengthy march. Yesterday night, Tarahake and Te Teira rode in and told me that the answer to my letter to Hera had come. This morning I went down, and found the answer had taken the shape of 25 men and 29 women and children, who had come in to surrender. Fifteen of them were still in the bush ; however, they came in on my sending out a party after them. I append a list of the names and the hapus, and an epitome of tho intelligence given by them. A rou will see that they entirely contradict the statements made by Matenga to me, and by the Urewera to Captain Preece. They seem to believe that Te Kooti is gono to Waikare. lam glad to say that both Ngatipukeko and Whakatohea have entirely agreed to carry on the pursuit with me as far as that. Ngatiawa will not move. Unfortunately, a bleak North-easter has just set in, which I fear is likely to last and cause a flood which will retard my departure. I have left the prisoners in the charge of Whakatohea, a3 I could not look after them here, and have informed them I would report on their case. I told them that if they were known as having been concerned in outrages they would be tried; but that if nothing beyond open fighting could be alleged against them, I thought then the Government might perhaps show them leniency. I shall start for Waikare the moment I possibly can. I trust that what I have done may meet with your approval. I may add that the prisoners one and all stated that tho letters I sent to To Hira, giving them hopes of clemency were the cause of their surrender. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, J. 11. H. St. John, Lieut.-Colonel. Auckland.
Enclosure 1 in No. 80. Statements made by Prisoners to me on the 3rd and Bth May, 1870. Matenga, of Ngatikahungunu, one of the escaped Wharekauris, stated by Dr. Baker to have been in former days weak of intellect. —Arrived at Torere on the Ist, having been eight days on the road. States that Te Kooti and Hira Te Popo had joined their men, and were both at Te Tahora in Waioeka. That he escaped at the risk of his life. That the men Paora and Wharekauri, and the Alataura Ngatiporou, seen in Waihaua, were a kokiri sent down to waylay and kill William King, of Ngaitai. Offered, on condition of pardon, to lead us to the kainga where he loft Te Kooti. On these conditions prisoner was allowed to remain in Wi Kingi's custody. Matenga further stated, that the people at Waioeka had heard that Te Waru was alive at Waikare, with Te Kooti ; were left with only about twenty of the old Wharekauris. Ho had about 150 men, women, and children —the two latter much predominating in numbers ; but was very short of guns and ammunition. Parahara, Whakatohea, one of Hira Te Popo's men.—Was bearer of Hira's letter to the Whakatohea, stating that Te Kooti had left Waioeka never to return to it, and that ho (Hira) sent in all their children. Left Te Hira twelve days ago, 26th April, at Tahora with only ten men. Since the ope of Ngatihau and Ngatiporou, tho Whakatohea have neither seen nor heard of Te Kooti. Te Kooti has not since been with Te Hira, neither has he corresponded with him. The only one of To Kooti's ope seen was Matenga (vide above), who said ho was running away. Believes it was from a place called Te U, in Waioeka. Supposes Te Kooti was then there. Does not know where Te Kooti is now. Has been in the bush ever since the capture of Opotiki. Came down to Waihaua lately to inquire what was going to be done with the Opape Whakatohea. Tiwai states this man informed him that Hira had expressed his willingness to surrender, wero his wife returned to him. Also that he saw to-day Paora and Wharekauri, two old men on their way to surrender, who informed him their belief was that Te Kooti had gone to Waikare. Hate, Hemi, and Aporo, of Whakatohea, corroborated the above. Te Munu, Ngatiporou of Mataura.—ln 1868 he and the other Ngatiporou, now prisoners left Mataura for Tokangamutu, and then made their way by Buatahuna to Maraetahi, when Te Kooti came after Ngatapa (vide Wiremu Kingi's statement to me). Bolted when Maraetahi was attacked, and has not seen To Kooti since ; has not heard of him. Saw Matenga, who told them Te Kooti was gone, but did not say where; heard Paora saying he believed he had gono to Waikare. Heard that To Kooti had said Waioeka was an accursed place, and he would not stay in it. The Aitangaamahaki were taken prisoners at Turanganui; and came on to surrender like the others in consequence of Hira getting my letter. J. H. H. St. John, Lieut.-Colonel.
Enclosure 2 in No. 80. Beturn of Surrendered Prisoners from the Ist to the Bth May, 1870. Opotiki, Bth May, 1870. Ngatikahungunu Tribe —Matenga (a Wharekauri). Whakatohea Tribe —Hoera Poaka, Karoia, Tangina, Matiu Bepanga, To Alatau, Te Bewini, Petara Huna, Heta. Peta, Eru (taken by Te Kooti at his raid on Omarumutu) ; and Parata, Parahara (bearer of Hira's letter to Whakatohea), Hate, Hemi, Aporo (Hira Te Popo's men). 15
A.—No. 8b
56
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
Ngatiporou Tribe, of Alataura—Te Munu, Harawira, Hamiora, Pehimana, Mikaere, Kara, Wikiriwhi. Aitangaamahaki Tribe—Kepa, Wiremu, Karauria. And 31 women and children. Any other names the above may have borne previously will be ascertained and forwarded. J. H. H. St. John, Lieut.-Colonel.
No. 81. Pareka Waikorire to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Mr. McLean,— Opotiki, 9th May 1870. Friend, my regard for you is great; sufficient for this my word of salutations This is another word of mine to you: The Hauhaus have again made their appearance since you left. There were sixty of them made their appearance here at Opotiki; there were twenty men, and forty women and children. This is the end of this part of my address to you. Now, my friend, if the arrangements here are well carried out, I. think that before long all those people will come under the shadow of the Queen, that is to say within the strong hand of tho Government; but if things are conducted badly, I mean by Maori or European commanders, then perhaps they will not come in ; and this being the case, it may tempt or be the cause of these Natives of Waioeka behaving in a doubtful or suspicious manner. I have formed my opinion from this fact, that some of them have come in, while some have remained still in the bush. This finishes my address to you. From your friend, Na Pareka Waikorire.
No. 82. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. Sir,— Napier, 12th Alay, 1870. I have the honor to transmit copies of correspondence, respecting the expedition lately undertaken by the Mohaka Natives to Waikare-Moana under Mr. Witty. Also, copies of correspondence respecting the expedition from the Wairoa to Waikare-Moana under the charge of Mr. Hamlin; and further correspondence, giving later information of the same expedition ; and copies of my reports to the Hon. the Defence Minister, accompanying each set of correspondence. I have, &c, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary, Wellington. J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure 1 in No. 82. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. D. McLean. Sir,— Napier, 6th May, 1870. In continuance of former reports respecting tho expeditions from Wairoa and Mohaka, I have now the honor to enclose a letter from Sub-Inspector Newland, covering report by Mr. Witty of the proceedings of the expedition from Mohaka, and of the return of the Natives, who had not succeeded in reaching Tikitiki as proposed. By Mr. Witty's last letter you will observe that he intended to start the following day with some Wairoa Natives to support Mr. Hamlin's party. I have little doubt that the Natives seen at To Kiwi, by the Mohaka party, were part of Air. Hamlin's force; and as Mr. Hamlin will have received my instructions to delay his advance until Major Bopata could get behind the enemy, 1 hope for a satisfactory termination to the present operations. From the information given by the woman prisoner, it would appear that Te Waru is still alive and at Waikare; but whether Te Kooti is at Waikare-Moana was not gathered from her. The recent movement of the Alohaka Natives into the dreaded Waikare-Moana country, with a force only some fifty strong, shows how much its dangers and difficulties have been over-rated. lam also of opinion that the numbers of the Urewera Tribe are considerably less than is generally supposed ; and should Bopata succeed in getting behind Waikare, and capturing the band now with Te Waru, the tribe would be practically powerless for further mischief. I shall, of course, report further when I hear again from Wairoa, which I expect to do very soon, as Mr. Locke was to proceed overland from Gisborne to Wairoa as soon as Eopata had started from Poverty Bay, and was to report immediately on his arrival at Wairoa. At Taupo preparation is being made by Inspector Boberts to make a raid upon Ahikereru, and if possible on Buatahuna; and I expect the expedition will start into the bush early next week. I have, &c, Tho Hon. the Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure 2 in No. 82. Sub-Inspector Newland to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Wairoa, 4th May, 1870. I have the honor to forward you the enclosed despatch, containing a report of Mr. Witty's expedition, he having returned here last night (3rd instant). I have not heard from Mr. Hamlin since ho left the Marumaru. Mr. Witty and forty Natives propose leaving this on Friday, to try and find out where Mr. Hamlin is ; and I purpose sending some pack-horses with biscuits, as they will be out
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
57
A.—No. Bb.
to-morrow, and I fear it may impede his progress, as in Mr. Witty's case. Should the expedition continue, and be impeded by the swollen creeks and rivers, I shall require more biscuits and groceries. I have, Ac, His Honor J. D. Ormond, Napier. W. Newland, Sub-Inspector, A.C.
Enclosure 3 in No. 82. Mr. J. W. Witty to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Wairoa, 4th May, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that I have returned to this place with the Natives under my charge, having been away ten days. We tried first the road to Tikitiki by way of Buatahuna ; but a fresh coming on in the Waiau Biver (which has to be cosssed about forty times, and for miles the river bed is tho only track), compelled us to turn back. Wo then tried to get round the shores of the Wairau Lake, and after bridging some of the numerous creeks which run into the lake, succeeded in getting partially round it, but from here could see that it was impossible to cross the mouth of the Marau, which in summer time is merely a lagoon, but now is a fine sheet of water; aud failing in getting hold of a canoe, we were obliged to return to Putahi. In the bush at Putahi, or rather in a potato clearing in the bush, I should say, we captured Pataneana and his mother. Pataneana is the chief of Tikitiki, and the biggest chief of the Urewera, and ranks higher than Te Waru, being tho rangatira of all the different hapus. He was a strong powerful young man, about thirty-five years of age, and had he not been partially blind would have been a great fighting man. He told us that there were no men left at Tikitiki now, at least only old men and women, Te Kooti having taken them all away. The Mohaka Natives left me on Monday to return to their pa by way of Putere. With fifteen of the Wairoa Natives under Mariki, I struck across to Te Kiwi by the track at the foot of Panekiri, in order to join Mr. Hamlin. On approaching Te Kiwi we could see a large quantity of smoke ascending from the bush, but could not see a single man or flag, and being doubtful as to the movements of the Natives under Hamlin, I did not like to go direct to Te Kiwi with so few men as I had, so I struck off to Waihi, and then got on the track from Tukurangi to Te Kiwi. Hero we could see no footsteps going to Te Kiwi, so wc came to the conclusion they must bo Hauhaus, and, from the quantity of fires in the middle of the day, very numerous; we therefore turned back to Tukurangi, and stopped the night in the redoubt. Our flag was flying, and we fired shots, but could get no answering signal of any description. The next day we proceeded to Te Kapu by way of Te Ariki, and the Natives returned to Matiti and I came on here. lam still doubtful as to whether the fires at Te Kiwi were Hamlin's Natives or not, as he, if there, would surely have made some signal. We went within about 800 yards, but not seeing a soul, did not like risking tho chance of an unexpected volley with so small a force, and another reason, though purely selfish, was that all the fifteen Natives were mounted, and I was on foot. I am now waiting to hear from Hamlin, and if I see I can do him any good, as these men which came clown with me under Alariki and Tuku Kainga are all anxious to go and join him, I shall at -once start to wherever he is. When I started, the arrangement was for Hapimana and his Natives to go up the Waiau Biver to Te Ariki, thence to Tukurangi, from there to Te Kiwi, and wait there till joined either by my party or Mr. Hamlin's, who were to go round by way of Whataroa; but it appears this idea was abandoned, and all went up the Wairoa Eiver. This of course would account for the absence -of tracks from Tukurangi to Te Kiwi, which I looked for, and failing seeing them, did not like to go to Te Kiwi. I forgot to mention earlier, that at one of the settlements up the Waiau Eiver, called Pukematai, we found the tracks of three Hauhaus, quite recent, and on a whata was written, " that they came there on Tuesday, that they killed a pig, and it was a sow." We found the remains of the pig. With a party of ten men on foot I followed their tracks to Pa Puni, where they had made some nets and caught a lot offish. From there we followed them to Maraetotara; and when we decided on turning back, with tho ten foot-men I still continued to track them, but the horsemen had to go a much longer road. At Te Pohu we found they had been cutting flax. On the road we picked up a greenstone they had dropped, and at the hill overlooking the Putahi we found their three horses ; their tracks were so recent the Natives did not like to go down to the settlement, and wanted to wait until the horsemen arrived ; but I urged them and four volunteered to accompany mo ; I give their names in tho margin. At the bottom of tho hill we found a newly erected whare, with fresh fern in it, the remains of the flax which had been brought from Te Pohu, and the stones of the Kopa-maori red hot. Tho Natives had not been gone many minutes when we got there ; we tracked them into the bush leading to Waikare-Moana. Leaving Bopiana and Ahipene to keep a look out, Patrick, Penehamine, and myself followed tho tracks to a potato clearing in the bush, and here it was we found Pataneana aud his mother. She was grubbing potatoes, and he was leading a pig they were rearing to tether it out. We were within five yards of them before they saw us, and completely at our mercy as we had them covered, and we marched them out and took them to the whare and kept sentry over them until the arrival of the main body, about an hour afterwards. Both Pataneana and his mother denied all knowledge of the men whose tracks we had been following for four days, and said they had not seen them. This we knew must be false, and the Natives were very savage at it. The next day, with ray party of foot-men, I proceeded through the bush, following these tracks, which led us over Panekiri Bange down Waikare-Moana Lake ; but here again we were too late, for the three tracks were here joined by two more, one a woman's, and after leading us round one of the bays, abruptly stopped at the water's edge, where we found their canoo had been fastened. Paora Berepu forwarded me your despatch, and I beg to thank you for the very flattering terms in which you write. I found that it would take too long a time to communicate with Hamlin, and get some volunteers from him (as I only had a very limited supply of rations) ; and as the Natives were all willing to go, I determined to make a bold push for Tikitiki with my own lot of men, about forty men
A.—No. 8b
58
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
and fifteen boys, as I knew we should have taken any force that was there so much by surprise that they would have been panic-stricken, and I was very vexed when we were compelled to give it up. The Natives say if the Government wish it they will go round to Tikitiki in the summer; butunless there is some means of transport across the lake, it is now too late in the season to attempt it. I must give the Natives credit of trying every possible means of getting round, and no blame is to bo attached to them. Bcgretting that circumstances have prevented me carrying out my intentions, I have, &c., J. D. Ormond, Esq., Napier. James Wm. Witty.
Enclosure 4 in No. 82. Mr. J. W. Witty to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Dear Sir, — Wairoa, Wednesday Evening, May 4th, 1870. Since writing my report this morning, I have determined to start to Te Kiwi on Friday with forty of the Wairoa Natives, and have arranged with Sub-Inspector Newland to take up a fresh supply of biscuits, &c., for Hamlin's party. This will be necessary, as there arc very few potatoes at Tukurangi, and I expect less at To Kiwi, and none at Onepoto. For a day before the Mohaka Natives left mo at Putere, our rations were all done; and one reason why they would not come round by way of To Kiwi was that there would be no means of living, whereas by way of Te Putere they could get pork and potatoes. They said that if it was intended to cross the lake, they would come up by way of Wairoa, and carry enough rations to take them across. I shall not tako upon myself the responsibility of" calling them out again without your permission ; but to save time, if you think it necessary, you could write to Paora Eerepu, and ask them to follow mo to the Lake. I have, &c., J. D. Ormond, Esq., James W. Witty. Agent General Government, Napier.
Enclosure 5 in No. 82. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Napier, 7th May, 1870. Since writing my letter of yesterday, reporting on the proceedings of the expeditions to-Waikare-Moana, I have received the attached letter from Sub-Inspector Newland, covering a report from Mr. Hamlin, giving particulars of the progress of the Wairoa expedition. From Mr. Hamlin's report you will sec that, on the 3rd, a portion of his force surprised a small party of the enemy, killing three men and one woman ; that the expedition had reached Whataroa, about twenty miles this side of Waikare-Moana Lake, were in capital spirits, and intended to cross the lake. I transmit herewith copies of my replies to Sub-Inspector Newland and Mr. Hamlin. Noinformation had been received at Wairoa up to yesterday of Major Eopata's movements. I have, &c, The Hon. tho Defence Minister, Auckland. J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure 6 in No. 82. Sub-Inspector Newland to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Te Wairoa, 6th May, 1870. I have the honor to forward you the enclosed copy (as tho original is written in pencil) of despatch received this morning from Air. Hamlin; by it you will see that he has come across a few Hauhaus, and been so far successful. The chances are now that nearly all tho Natives will go from the Wairoa, and if so I would require more biscuits, as I have only a few bags left; the flour they decline taking, as they have no means of cooking it, and are ahvays on the move (and Mr. Hamlin objects to having fires lit except for what is absolutely necessary, so as not to let the enemy know anything of his movements). He has sent for biscuits and groceries, and I will send with Air. Witty's party as much as they can possibly take; also a pack-horse, with grapnels and rope, as he informs me tho Natives have made up their minds to cross the lake. I am going to Te Kapu at once with Mr. Witty, to ration and start his party off; the number I am unable to state at present. I anticipate they will reach Tukurangi to-night, as they are in high spirits from Mr. Hamlin's success. I have instructed my orderly to hand his despatches over to Tait, as I consider it necessary you should be placed in possession of this important news at once, and wait Tait's return. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, W. Newland, General Government Agent, Napier. Sub-Inspector, A.C.
Enclosure 7 in No. 82. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to Sub-Inspector Newland. Sir, — Near Whataroa, Ohiwa, 4th May, 1870. I hereby forward a report of the progress of the expedition from To Wairoa for tho information of the Government. 25th April. —Collected all the force available at Te Kapu, numbering 120 men.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
59
a;— No. 8»_
26th. —Went from Te Kapu to Makakahi (Witty's). On the road I received a letter from Ihaka Whaanga, saying that he was about to join us, and wishing us to wait for him. 21th. —Bain all day. Still waiting for Ihaka. 28th. —Ihaka and party, numbering 70, which now makes us 190, arrived about 3 p.m. 29./..—Started for Mangaruhe, crossed the Wairoa in canoes at Purotanui, and as we had only one, this took a considerable time. Crossed the Mangaruhe at Maruhakeke. 30th. —I was out with the scouts all the morning, and about 3 o'clock the main body reached us, when we marched on to Waerangi Creek, where we stayed. Ist May. —Started at 2 o'clock a.m. for Orewha, which we reached before daylight; found it uninhabited, and no signs whatever of tracks. About 8 a.m. started for Matikota, which was also deserted. Here we stayed all day ; some of the scouts found a new plantation under Matikota, which had, however, evidently not been inhabited for some time, —this was destroyed. 2nd. —Beached Te Kaikaimauaru, where the roads to Pararuru and Whataroa diverge. Here Te Hapimana and forty-two men took the road to Pararuru, which is impracticable for horses, and we went on to Whataroa, thence to Ohiwa, both of which places were destroyed. Here we stayed waiting for Te Hapimana, and party destroyed cultivation and canoes. 3rd. —About 3 o'clock p.m. heard that Te Hapimana and party had come across tracks and were following them. I immediately started on horseback with twenty-five men to his assistance, and on reaching him gained the following information: —As the day drew on, Hapimana and eighteen men, leaving the remainder, sighted the enemy's fires, and, with a great deal of difficulty, found the tracks, and at length came upon the camp. After a little deliberation they fired three shots and rushed the place. Two of the Hauhaus were shot dead, and one mortally wounded. Three of the number escaped, two men and one woman. From the wounded man Hapimana extracted the following information: — Te Waru and most of his people are at Waikare-Moana ; Himiona and some others with Te Kooti, whose whereabouts could not be ascertained. Pera was killed by Te Waru's party. These few people had plenty of provisions of all kinds, and had just returned from a successful pig-hunting expedition, and were in the act of planning how their spoils should be disposed of when our party rushed them. The names of the killed are Hemi, son of Wi Tepuna, one of the greatest chiefs of Upper Wairoa, Kaperaniko Hiku Kue Kuea, who was also a man of rank of the same tribe, and Hemaima Hohiapoietu of the same tribe, a woman of note; tho names of those who escaped are Hemi Tihi, Harawira, and Kutu Kutu; this was extracted from the wounded man. A child of about six years of age, who was taken by Himiona about two years ago, with a view to decoy the whole of one of the Wairoa tribes, was taken alive. This lad is also of great rank, being a son of Wi Paretipua's and Kiwai. Although the number killed was small it is considered a great achievement, inasmuch as all killed and taken were ■of great rank. Our people retook the rifle which Bera had when he was shot; also ten rounds of ammunition, and 300 caps, and one double-barrelled gun. The spot where this took place is named Bukehou, at the foot of Matakuhia Bange, in a densely wooded country, where the fugitives betook themselves in different directions, rendering it impossible for our people to overtake them. The attacking party were few in number, from all tribes, under Te Hapimana and Ihaka Makahue. Great credit is due to the whole party for the way in which they followed the tracks, as they were labouring under great difficulties. Ilamana and Hotene (Kahu) were also of the party. There were no casualties on -our side. The whole of the expedition at present express their determination to cross the lake at all hazards, and I think it would be advisable to have a pack-horse in readiness to bring up the grapnels .and rope. We are still at Ohiwa, and shall remain here to-night. To the Officer Commanding, Clyde, Te Wairoa. F. E. Hamlin.
Enclosure 8 in No. 82. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Sub-Inspector Newland. Sir,— Napier, 7th May, 1870. I beg to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of yesterday's date, covering Air. Hamlin's report of the progress of the expedition to Waikare-Moana. lam glad to find the Natives are in good spirits, aud hope the success they have had will induce them to carry out the object of the expedition, and clear out the Hauhau kaingas on the Lake. I gather from your letter that Mr. Witty has left to join Mr. Hamlin with a supporting party of Wairoa Natives, and that he will take some provisions with him, and also the grapnel and rope for endeavouring to raise the sunken boats. lam glad these have gone forward, and hope the supplies now going up will enable the Natives to persist with what they have undertaken. I expect the " St. Kilda" back from the East Coast about Monday (tho day after to-morrow), and will despatch her as soon after arrival as possible with some biscuit and groceries. It would be well if some of the Natives remained to take up these provisions when they arrive; and if there are any intending to go, you had better detain them for that purpose. If no opportunity of that kind offers, you had better arrange so that, on arrival of supplies, you can send what is necessary to Te Ariki, where Mr. Hamlin would send a party to take them on. I expected Mr. Locke would have been at Wairoa by this time, and shall be glad to hear his news quickly when he does arrive. The despatch which left you yesterday at noon reached me this morning before 8 o'clock. I am writing to the Mohaka Natives, and they may perhaps think it well to join the Wairoa •expedition at the Lake. In such case you will please assist them so far as the supplies you have on hand will allow. I have, &c, Sub-Inspector Newland, &c, Wairoa. J. D. Ormond.
A. —No. Bb,
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
60
Enclosure 9 in No. 82. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. F. E. Hamlin. Sir,— Napier, 7th May, 1870. I have received with much pleasure the report of the proceedings of the expedition under your charge, and note that on the 3rd a party of eighteen men under Hapimana had come upon a small party of the enemy, and killed three of them ; also, that this success had put the whole expedition in good spirits, and determined them to cross the Lake and root out the Hauhaus' kaingas. I trust this feeling will continue, and that they will persist until they have accomplished the objects of the expedition. From Captain Newland I hear that Mr. Witty was to leave yesterday with about forty more men and provisions to join you at the Lake; also, that he was to take grapnels and rope, to endeavour to raise the sunken boats. I trust what is now on its way to you will enable you.to recover the boats ;, aud that you may be able to reach some of the enemy's cultivations, and so get food for the expedition which will otherwise, I fear, be short. I have advised Captain Newland that I will send some supplies to the Wairoa on the return of the " St. Kilda," which I expect back from the East Coast on Monday. He will communicate with you as to how the supplies can bo got up. As yet I have no information of Eopata's movements, but have no doubt he is well on his way to Waikare-Moana. From the information you gathered from the wounded man, and that given by the woman taken prisoner by Mr. Witty's party, it would seem Te Waru is at Whakare, but that no definite information can be obtained of the whereabouts of Te Kooti. lam inclined to think that if he is not at the Lake settlements, he will be at Buatahuna. From the information I have gathered, I believe Paerau, with about fifty people, is at Buatahuna, and Hapurona, with about thirty more, at Ahikereru. Should you succeed in raising the sunken boats, any movement on or from the Lake would be easy, and you would also, I conclude, be able to get at some of the enemy's cultivations, which is of very great consequence. When Bopata gets up the force will be overwhelming, and I have great hope that the present expeditions will succeed in clearing out and destroying the remnant of the Waikare-Moana Hauhau band. Please congratulate the Natives from me on what they have accomplished, and say I expect them to finish their work before they think of returning. lam writing to Paora Berepu of what the Wairoa people have done, and urging him to send his people up at once to assist. Wishing you success, I have, &c, Mr. F. E. Hamlin, Wairoa Expedition. J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure 10 in No. 82. Sub-Inspector Newland to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Te Wairoa, 10th May, 1870. I have the honor to forward you a copy of report received from Mr. Hamlin this morning. By it you will see that the Hauhaus have removed everything that was buried at Waikare-Moana, agreeing with statement made by (prisoner) Hauhau woman. A rou will also see that the Natives are fully determined to cross the lake, and will therefore necessitate the organizing of a canoe transport from Te Kapu ;I am therefore making arrangements with Tamihana for that purpose. I will forward flour should tho steamer not arrive before the boat leaves for Te Kapu. It will therefore be necessary to have a force (either Constabulary or Natives), stationed at Te Ariki, for the protection of stores, &c. ; if the former, it would then bo necessary to call out a few of the Militia to replace Constabulary sent to that post. I have therefore to request you will be pleased to forward me instructions. lam sending one of the Constabulary to point out where the small boat was left, also where the others were sunk. I have, &c, W. Newland, His Honor J. D. Ormond, Esq. Sub-Inspector, A.C. B.S. —I have arranged with Tamihana for transport: himself at 10s. per diem, and twenty men at 45., and only to be paid for such days as they are doing transport. I tried to arrange at per ton, but they would not have it. —W. N.
Enclosure 11 in No. 82. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to the Officer Commanding, Te Wairoa. Sir,— Tukurangi, 9th May, 1870. Allow me to forward you particulars of our doings to date. sth May. —Sent former despatch to you. 6th May. —Left Ohiwa for Waikare-Moana; found that all things which had been buried at Scannell's Eedoubt had been removed. I think I came upon the place where the boat was hid past the Kopani, but am not sure ;it is not there at any rate. On our arrival at Te Onepoto, found that the boat buried had been removed; also everything which was left there ; they had sounded all the pa with ramrods. Fires seen at Pukehina and Tikitiki, and at night signals and lights from one point to another. Ith May. —Hapimana and forty men, and ten of Kurupakiaka, started to Te Kiwi. I went with sixty to Wanganui Paru, passed through five cultivations, found quantities of potatoes (especially at Wanganui Paru,) and houses, which we left standing, in case they might come in useful to us afterwards. Eeturned to Onepoto, and found that the general mind was made up to return to Wairoa. We were roused up at 2 a.m. by the sentries, who reported voices across the lake. All hands turned out and waited, but nothing came of it; the voices were very plainly heard, apparently through a mill hopper as a speaking trumpet. Sunday, Bth May. —About daylight this morning the enemy gave three or four derisive yells across
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
61
A.—No. B_s,
the lake. It was my intention to go and occupy Wanganui Paru ; but the party having broken up, we start for Te Kiwi on our way home again. 12 o'clock. —Eeached Te Kiwi, recent foot and horse tracks in direction of Te Wairoa. Slept at Te Kiwi. Monday, 9lh May. —Started for Te Wairoa. On reaching Tukurangi found Witty and men with provisions and grapnels, so our homeward journey is intercepted. Some of the Kahu and Kurupakiaka and Matawhaiti, however, seemed determined to go home, while the rest are equally anxious to retrace their steps to Waikare. We stay here to-day. Will you send us full particulars of the whereabouts of the boats sunk and the one hidden, as I cannot find the marks by which to find tho sunken boats, and am not quite sure about the little one; will you send one of the troopers up who knows both particulars, as the little boat especially will be of great use to us? We have not had one real fine day since we started ; always have rain either day or night. lam glad to say the return of the tribes above mentioned, and the junction of Mr. Witty's men, make our force far stronger in every respect, and the other Natives are fully rejoiced in the steps they have taken, and are now determined to hold on to the last. I shall endeavour to have communication personally with Major Eopata. I have, &c, The Officer Commanding, Wairoa. F. E. Hamlin.
Enclosure 12 in No. 82. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to the Officer Commanding, Te Wairoa. Sir,— Tukurangi, 9th May, 1870. It will be fully necessary to organize a canoe transport for provisions to To Ariki, and the expedition will fetch them from there. To every bag of biscuit there ought to be an extra bag, so that every two horses can bring a bag between them. Send flour if short of biscuit. I have, &c, The Officer Commanding, Te Wairoa. F. E. Hamlin.
Enclosure 13 in No. 82. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Sub-Inspector Newland. Sir,— ■ Napier, 9th May, 1870. I am in receipt of yours of yesterday's date, covering copy of Mr. Hamlin's journal of proceedings of the expedition to the 9th instant, and note that on that day the Wairoa Natives, being on their way back, met a supporting party under Mr. Witty at Tukurangi, and then made up their minds to return to Waikare-Moana, a portion of them still coming on to Wairoa. lam pleased to see Mr. Hamlin thinks the force as at present composed both stronger and more manageable than heretofore, and especially glad to hear that he will open up communication with Eopata. I note also his requisition on you for supplies, and the arrangements you have made for getting canoes to carry tho same to Te Ariki. I also gather from Mr. Hamlin's journal that he found plenty of potatoes at Wanganui Paru. It is therefore evident the Natives will not want food. You will therefore be careful to send only such supplies as are absolutely necessary for the continuance of the expedition. I think if you send some flour aud a small supply of groceries now, and on arrival of the " St. Kilda" send forward what I shall send by her, that you will do all that is necessary. The arrangement made by you with the canoe men is satisfactory, as they will only be paid for days they are at work, and is the next best arrangement to contracting by the ton, which you say you could not get them to undertake. In reference to tho occupation of Te Ariki as a post, I do not consider that necessary ; the canoe mcii will be quite sufficient guard for the provisions, and you must arrange with Mr. Hamlin to send down there for his supplies about the time the canoes will get up. With an enemy who we know is on his last legs and in no force, and with the force we have now gathering around him it is quite unnecessary to expect any attack from him. The " St. Kilda" is now overdue, and I shall start her as soon as possible after her arrival with a supply of biscuit and groceries, part of which I intend for Eopata's force and part for the Wairoas. I have, &c., J. D. Ormond. My despatch for Mr. Hamlin you will please forward at once.—J. D. O.
Enclosure 14 in No. 82. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. F. E. Hamlin. Sir,— Napier, 11th May, 1870. I am this morning in receipt of your journal of proceedings to the 9th instant, and can see by the return of the Natives to Tukurangi, on their way to Wairoa, that you have had a difficult task to keep them to their work. However, lam glad to see you write that those who have left you are no loss, and that your party, strengthened by Mr. Witty and those who went with him, is stronger than before. lam especially glad to see you will endeavour to open communication with Major Eopata; if you succeed in doing this and arranging with him a plan of operations, I think success must ensue. I have written to Bopata and send my letter under cover to you; you will please read, then seal it, and let him get it if possible. I need not repeat what I have written him ; you will see the plan I recommend, and what: I propose about Euatahuna. So far as Waikare-Moana is concerned, I consider the Lake kaingas as good as cleared out, and only trust Eopata will get round before Te Waru bolts.
?_;>—No. Bb,
62
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
About supplies, I am very glad to see you have found potatoes at Wanganui Baru; that will be a great help ; do all you can to use the enemy's food. I have written to Sub-Inspector Newland to send up what is actually necessary to keep the expedition going, and I intend sending the " St. Kilda" to Wairoa at once on her return from the East Coast; she is now overdue. She will take a supply of biscuit and groceries, part of which I intend for Eopata's force, and part for your people, and hope it will enable a move to be made on Buatahuna, after the Lake settlements are cleared out. In such case it would be well to occupy the Lake with a portion of tho force, whilst the remainder move on. I hope in the meantime you may succeed in getting up the sunken boats, although I am not sanguine you will do so. I have requested Sub-Inspector Newland to arrange canoe transport to Te Ariki, from whence you will have to get up the supplies he sends. He proposed to establish a post there, but I see no necessity for this. There is no chance whatever of the enemy coming to your rear, and you can easily arrange to meet the canoes on their arrival at To Ariki. I am glad Mr. Witty has joined you ; he will be a great help, and it is possible the Mohaka Natives may follow him, as I wrote to Paora Berepu recommending it. I left it however a good deal to him. The weather has, I am sorry to see, been very unsettled since you have been out ; I trust you may have.a few days fine now to complete your work in; and wishing you speedy success. I have, &c., Air. F. E. Hamlin, Wairoa Expedition. J. D. Ormond. P.S.—lt is almost unnecessary for me to urge you, in case the Natives should again think of returning, to use every exertion to keep them at Onepoto until Bopata can reach the enemy's rear. —J. D. O.
No. 83. The Hon. the Fremier to Major Kemp. To Major Kemp,— Dunedin, April 16, 1870. Salutations. lam sorry that I was not at Wellington on your arrival at that place. I have, however, heard of all your good works, of your fights, and of the capture of prisoners by you. That man Te Kooti is defeated, and his evil deeds are defeated. Your feet, and tho feet of Whanganui have trodden him down. You have fulfilled the promise which you made in tho Aomarama. My belief is that the war is now over ; let us turn our thoughts, you and I, to works of peace. This is all. From your friend, Major Kemp, Wellington. William Fox.
No. 81. The Hon. the Premier to Topia Tueoa. To Topia Turoa, Chief of the Tribes of the Upper Whanganui,— Dunedin, April 10, 1870. My friend, you and I conversed together face to face in the Aomarama. The word which was proclaimed on that day is a permanent word. You have driven forth that pest (Te Kooti), and quenched his power. I have hoard of your deeds at Tuhua, at Tapapa, at Opotiki, and at all the other > places from whence you have driven Te Kooti. Our work now is to be a work of peace. Let me know your thoughts on this subject, as you made known your thoughts at Banana and at the Aomarama. I rejoice greatly that you and your people have returned to Whanganui. Convey to your people the thanks of the Government for the services they have rendered. This is all. From your friend, Topia Turoa, Wellington. William Fox.
No. 85. Captain Preece to the Hon. the Defence Minister. My Dear Sir,— Fort Galatea, 18th May, 1870. On the 12th, I sent back the Urewera man with Te Meihana; I wrote letters by him to Ahikereru and Urewera Natives, telling them to surrender at once. I gave them no promise of mercy, but told them that they must trust to the Government. I arrived here on the 15th ; the next day Te Meihana returned, saying that the Ngatiwdiare were all coming in, and that the latter had gone on to Buatahuna ; Meihana" went back yesterday to bring them out; they will all be out to-morrow. Yesterday afternoon a man named Ngawaka came out from Horomanga, with a letter from Wi Bateno to Captain Mair, saying that they were willing to come in ; we wrote a letter telling them to come. There is a man named Bangiaho (who was reported as killed at Ngatapa) among them ; this fellow was leader of the Poverty Bay murders, and killed Pitcairn at Ohiwa. I think he will come in, we will let him do so if he likes ;he ought not to get oft' clear; so I let you know what a bad character he is. I think he is the only man who has committed any great offence among them. We shall hear to-morrow from the Urewera. I think some of them will come in, but the thing they seem afraid of is food ; they say, if we all go out, will the Government be willing to feed 200 of us, and women and children. I think it would bo important to get them out of that country. Te Kooti is at the head of tho Waioeka, in three small parties ; only 20 of his own men. He wrote a letter to the Urewera, telling them to build up the house, he should soon be there; they tore it up and sent the messenger back. This, of course, is only their own story.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
63
A.—No. Bb.
I have written to Major Boberts, and sent a telegram to Mr. Ormond with this news. I will write officially when I get back to Te Teko. Believe me, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister. George Preece.
No. 86. Major Bopata Wahawaha to His Honor J. D. Ormond. To Mr. Ormond — Te Wairoa, 19th May, 1870. Friend, salutations to you, engaged in our duty of carrying out this great work, the putting down of evil. Friend, do not be annoyed on account of my return. The reason for my return was the hasty attack by Ngatikahungunu, that is to say, the frightening of the Hauhaus by them ; perhaps these Hauhaus have gone to report to others, and probably those who were in the pas have evacuated them. That was the reason why there was the trouble in the summer campaign. What recompense arc the people to have who are fatigued with the pursuit, seeing that the Hauhaus have run away. I did not return through fear of the Hauhaus; but you must look at and consider what I have said in this letter. However, let our work stand over until the next summer, when it can be finished. If you and I together work at it, it will be finished. Porter knows my thoughts and he will let you know my opinions in respect of our work. That is all. Major Bopata.
No. 87. Captain Preece to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Fort Galatea, 2nd May, 1870. I have the honor to report for your information that the Ngatiwhare and Ngatiawa are camped within two miles of this, and will come in this day. Hapurona and Hamiora are amongst them. I have also the honor to forward the enclosed letters received from Buatahuna, in which the Urewera say they will not come in, but I am informed privately by the messenger that it is quite likely Paerau will come out after Hapurona has been out some short time. 1 have, &c, George Preece, Capt. P.S. —Since writing the above, Ngatiwhare have come in; they are now talking while I write this. G. P.
Enclosure 1 in No. 87. To Arama, to Tukehu, — Buatahuna, 16th May, 1870. Friends, salutations to you both. We have received your letter in which you say that we are to go to Te Karamuramu to make peace. Friends, I have become a Government man through Te Keepa and through your letters. Well, I will always be a Government mau at my own place. This is a word from us to you : Cease slaying the land and the people ; let your sword and my sword be laid aside. Te Kooti is not here. Should you come in here we will all be in trouble again, for Te Kooti is nflt here. Let us cease writing one to another. Cease; it is stopped with the stopper of Houmea. From Paerau, Te Whenuanui, To George Preece, Captain. From all the Chiefs of Tuhoe. Friend, send Hiria and Ihimaera here. That is all.—From all Tuhoe.
Enclosure 2 in No. 87. To Mr. Preece, that is to say, to all your Eunanga,—■ Buatahuna, 16th May, 1870. Friend we have received your letter in which you say that we are to go out. Give heed, we have sent our mouth-piece to you. That is all. As for us we will not go out. Lot us alone here, and do you remain yonder at your place, for Te Kooti is not here ; Don't urge to come. Don't come this way, go as you are going ;if you come here the law will have been broken by you and by me also. lam afraid because the peace made with Eru has been covered with blood by you yourself. What matters it if you say that that peace was made by Te Kepa only ; no, that law which you yourself have broken was made by the Governor. Now, I will not go out; leave me alone here. My occupation is to sleep, but it is for you to awake me out of my sleep ; if you come here I will wake up. This is another word to you : send Hiria and her companion here. Be quick. That is all, From Tuhoe-potiki, That is to say from all the Tribe.
Enclosure 3 in No. 87. To Hoani, — Friend, salutations to you, that is to say, to all of you. This is a word to you :Do not let any person go to Whakarae, for all that district belongs to me, by day and by night, and in the months. That is all. 17
A;— No. 8b
64
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
This is another word to you : send the bad men from out of your presence, that good anfl evil may be known. That is all. Te Erueti, That is to say from your ancestor, all Tuhoe. Miha, Secretary.
Enclosure 4 in No. 87. Go, 0 my letter, to Hoani Ngamu,— Tauwharemanuka, 7th May, 1870. Friend, salutations to you and your friends the chiefs and all your hapus who are living yonder on the land of our ancestors, and acting kindly towards our mokai. Friend, this is the word to you : the peace will not be set aside ; no, it will always be firmly established in your presence and that of your friends the chief's of the tribes who are living in peace, whether Maori or European. Sir, give no heed to your tribe who are living yonder ; let them lie there, they died under the law. Father, hearken, this is my word to you: let Turei be sent hither, because he will not cease going to you. Friend, keep fast hold of the word of your grandchild, be strong to hold on to the law of peace, but if you murder there will be an end of it. His word was, let it be for Te Kooti to do wrong. This is to inform you, Sir, that I have ceased to see you because of these two laws which you have given me, good and evil. Friend, Tuhoe are very sad on account of this treacherous killing. My word to you, give heed :I do not approve of this work, murder, it is a mean work. My word is, let them go to the tribes whose hands are defiled with blood of murder, whether Pakeha or Maori. Sir, live quietly at home. Erueti. To Hoani, to Taupo, to Te Eaihi, to all of you. It ends. Written by Miha.
No. 88. Captain Gilbert Mair to Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, Tauranga. Sir,— Te Teko, 23rd' May, 1870. I have the honor to make the following report for your information : —I started from Kaiteriria on the 16th for Fort Galatea and Heruiwi, with fifty-four men. Was unable to start before on account of the bad weather, and delays in getting up food, clothing, &c, for my men. I joined Captain Preece at Fort Galatea on the 16th, ho had arrived the previous day with seventy men. Te Meihana came in from Ahikereru at dark, with letters from the Ngatiwhare, saying that they were quite ready to come out to Fort Galatea directly they got word from us. On the 17th, we sent Te Meihana and Toma to fetch them. On the same day fires were seen at Horomanga, and our scouts met a man called Ngawaka (a Ngatimanawa, who was taken by Te Kooti at Tauaroa in March, 1869,) who said that Wi Patene and the Patuheuheu wore anxious to meet me. On the 18th, Captain Preece and myself went with orderlies to Otamapare, the mouth of Horomanga Gorge, wdiere we had seen the Hauhau fires. As we approached the Hauhaus came out to meet us, fired a volley in the air, and welcomed us. There were twelve in number, including the Chiefs Wi Patene, Papanui, and Bangiaho. They told us that they were anxious for peace; that, if the Government would consent, they would come out to Tauaroa and live peaceably on their land; that they would not molest any passers by, and would give information of any intended movement of Te Kooti. We told them that wo had no authority from the Government to agree to such terms ; all that we coulcl tell them was to come out and trust to the clemency of the Government; that if they came to Tauaroa they would be drawn away again if Te Kooti came out; besides, they stood in the. way of an expedition going into the Urewera country in search of Te Kooti. They replied that the Urewera would hardly consent to their coming away from Horomanga, as it would leave the pass to Buatahuna unguarded ; that they would be guided by the course taken by Hapurona and Ngatiwhare. We told them to come over to Fort Galatea and meet Hapurona, to which they agreed. On the 19th, Te Meihana returned from Ahikereru with word that tho Ngatiawa and Paharakeke Natives, forty in number, were camped for the night at Oteahura, and would conic in next morning. Wi Patene and four companions came in at dark. On the 20th, we sent pack-horses up to Te Arawhatatawhito to meet Major Boberts' pack-horses from Opepe, with food. At 10 o'clock the people came in; the rest of the day was spent in talking and crying. Hapurona, Hamiora, Manuera, and Hoani Paiaka, in answer to the Arawa Chiefs, said it was their desire to go at once to Tauranga or Auckland, to see what was to be done with them ; they had been told by some of the Friendly Natives that they would be sent to the Chatham Islands; that if they were allowed they would like to go back to Buatahuna, and endeavour to induce them to surrender, or at least promise not to interfere with any expedition that might enter their country in search of Te Kooti. If the Urewera would not agree, they would come back, bringing the remainder of their women and children with them. That they think it very likely the Urewera, or part of them, will agree to their proposals. The following arc the names of the men : — Hapurona Kohi, Tamehana Haere i te Auro, Hamiora Potakurua, Te Patupo Kari take, Hoani Paiaka, Akuhata Patoe, Manuera, Tarei Tauwhe, Hone Tahara, Eukaporou, Tamehana Paewaka, Bawiri, Eria Kaiware, Harawira, Tamati Te Hororaute, Natanahira, Pene Hana, Naru, Maihi Te Hoe, Te Eeweti, Heremaia Motutaru, Te Pene, and Hamuera Te Horaiwi, Twenty-two women and children.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
65
A.—No. Bb.
On the 21st, the pack-horses returned from Heruiwi, having failed to meet Major Boberts at Te Arawhata. The men having been out of rations for two days, we decided to return. Captain Preece being required at Taupo to pay Natives there, I came down to Te Teko with the men, sending the Ngatiwhakaue to Kaiteriria; Kohi and Hamiora went with them, at the express wish of the Ngatiwakaue, who think they may be able to influence the Urewera to surrender. I arrived at this place this morning, and have sent the Ngatiwhare down to Kokohinau, on their way to Matata, where they will remain till the pleasure of the Government is made known to them. Wi Patene went back to his people on the 21st, promising to get them all together and bring them out by the Waiohau road. I enclose a statement made to me by Hoani Te Paiaka. It contains definite information as to Te Kooti's whereabouts. Te Paiaka is a chief of the Ngatihau, a near relative of Topia's, and is also related to the Arawa. His mother, too, was an Urewera woman —a sister of Paerau's. He appears to exercise considerable influence over the Urewera. He says now is the time to catch To Kooti; he is almost deserted by his followers, and very much dispirited. Hoani says that his only fear is that the Urewera will give him a refuge in their country, or go to his assistance in case an expedition is sent in after him. If they can only be made to promise to keep aloof, ho could soon be taken or killed. He thinks, however, that the influence which Hapurona possesses over the Urewera will be sufficient to have the desired effect. Hapurona has advised the Patuheuheu to come in at once ; if they only will come, the Urewera will very likely follow suit. Hapurona has never given himself up before, and has always been a most determined antagonist to the Government. I am of opinion that some of the surrendered Whakatohea could be made use of in bringing out Te Hira Te Popo, and some of his people, and in inducing them to show us where Te Kooti is hiding. An expedition of 100 to 150 men would be quite sufficient to take up the Waioeka in search of him. They should all be well clothed and shod. Te Meihana is at Ahikereru, bringing out the remainder of the Ngatiawa, who were absent when Hapurona came away. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Gilbert Mair, Capt., Tauranga, Bay of Plenty. Commanding Arawa Flying Column.
Enclosure in No. 88. Statement made by Hoani te Paiaka. lam a chief of Whanganui, a nephew of Pehi Turoa. lam also related to Ngatiwhakaue ; and my mother was of the Urewera, a sister to Paerau. I joined Te Kooti at Tuhua. I was induced to join him because I had heard so much about his Atua, and thought that it must be the true God. Topia wanted me to join him, but I said " Wait till I see whether Te Kooti's is the real God or not." I went to Waikato with Te Kooti. The Waikatos would have turned against him, but were restrained by the Urewera. I was in the fight at Tapapa. We lost five men there, and one afterwards died of his wounds. I was nearly taken prisoner at Ohinemutu. Te Kooti intended to attack Ohinemutu, but we, the Urewera, would not consent. All the men killed at Eotorua were Chatham Islanders, except Timoti Te Kaha. Te Waru and a few men were left behind, and did not get to Buatahuna till a month afterwards. Eakuraku's wife was sent by Te Kooti and the Urewera to Whakatane to try and induce the Ngatiawa to come inland, as To Kooti intended to attack that place. The Urewera would not go with Te Kooti to Waioeka. I went with ten; two were killed, and the rest came back with me to Buatahuna on the 27th April. We left Te Kooti a few days before. He was then at a place called Te Pato ; it is a small stream that branches off to the left from Waioeka, just above Maraetahi and near Te Tahora. Te Kooti told me that he intended to make that place his head-quarters.' The food was carried from three small clearings about Te Tahora. Te Kooti told the Natives to bo careful of their food, as that was all they had to depend upon till the spring. Te Kooti is now either at Te Tahora or Te Pato. He says if he is pursued he will go up to the very source of the Waioeka, and trust to pigs and honey to live on, or go on to Whanganui-o-Parua, the eastern arm of WaikareMoana Lake. He is in a very desponding state, and says that his God has now forsaken him for the first time since he left Wharekauri. He has quite given up the idea of going to Waikato, as his influence over Waikato is quite gone, on account of his not having any men left. Hira te Popo, Te Iki, and eighteen or twenty of the Whakatohea are at Te Tahora. They have left Te Kooti by this time. They were mostly old men, and badly armed. Te Kooti, too, is almost without ammunition ; he has plenty of powder, but no lead or caps. All his best men were killed at Waioeka, and he himself would have been taken, but I gave the alarm when surprised by Ngatiporou at Te Karoro. Te Kooti got away from Maraetahi with nearly one hundred men, but they left him on account of his anger, because Te Hira and others killed a man called Buka (a nephew of To Kooti's), because he took .another man's wife. To Kooti was heard praying that some evil might befall all his people for killing Buka. A short time after this occurrence, they were attacked at Maraetahi, and the people said it was through Te Kooti's cursing them; so after the fight Nepia Tokitahi, and the Aitangamahaki, the Ngatiporou, the Urewera, and others, left him. He has now with him the following men : — £ f Pera te Awaahu, Kereopa Kaiwhatu, nd Bewi te Nahu, Tarawera, § Hirini te Oikau, Te Awamutu, 2 i Karanama, Te Mokena, g 1 Alaika, Iparaima, _a Penere (severely wounded at Opepe), Te Wharenui, ■g J Wi Kepa, Te Eoiri, q l^Peramo, and two others, Pati,
A.—No. 8b
66
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
Te Tuatini, , Kawhena (Ngaiterangi), Teopira te Whatu, Ngahiakai (Ngatiahu), Anaru Matete, To Whare Alaia, Tamati Te Eangituaw raru. Total, 25. Nepia Tokitahi is at the source of the Motu Biver, near a place called Te Wera, close to the head of the Turanga Eiver, and has the following men with him : — Hotupa, Karanama, Te Alatenga, Hapeta, Bouri, Pera, Eeitene, Tuwdiera, Tamehana Teketeke (badly wounded), Te Munu, and two or three others. The following are the names of some of the men killed at Waioeka: — Hakaraia ATakika, Hira (Urewera), Timoti (a Whakatohea), Kohupaki, and eleven others. Chatham Islanders. Te Mapi, Tamati, Pera te Uetuku, Te Kaiera, Winiata, Wi, Hohepa (wounded at Eoturoa, and Timoti, carried on a stretcher to Waioeka), Hone Toki, and five others. Hakopa, Total killed, 30. A.bout a week after the fight, I came back with Te Kooti from Te Pato, and he gave orders to his men to go and bury the dead. I went with them and saw these men put in their graves. Te Kooti then went back to Pato, and I told him I would leave him, as I had lost faith in his Atua. I then came to Buatahuna. Te Kooti wrote to the Urewera by me, telling them to " build up the house," meaning for them to join him again. The Urewera wrote, telling him to keep away : that if he came to Buatahuna he would bring trouble upon them again. Gilbert Mair, Fort Galatea, 21st Alay, 1870. Commanding Arawa Flying Column.
No. 89. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Apanui and Others. To Apanui, to Wepiha, to Hori Kawa Kawa, — Whakatane, 25th May, 1870. Friends, salutations to you. This is my address to you. It is with reference to the people of the Urewera, of the Ngatiawa, who have come out and surrendered themselves. I propose to locate them at Te Putere ; but it would be better that you, Arama, Tukehu, and Te Wepiha, should look after and take charce of these people. Upon their quiet behaviour depends how they will be dealt with. From your friend, Donald McLean.
No. 90. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Eangitukehu. To TtTßEiiu— Whakatane, 25th May, 1870. Salutations to you. I have heard of the work on which you are engaged; it is very good. I have been considering what to do about those men, and have decided that Te Putere is the best place for them ; but they will be left for you, for Arama, for Te Kepa, for Hori, and Apanui to guard and watch them. From your friend, To Eangitukehu, Kokohinau. Donald McLean.
No. 91. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Te Keepa. To Te Keepa,— Whakatane,.2sth May, 1870. Salutations to you. This is a word of mine about the people who have lately come out of Te Urewera, and also Ngatiawa. I will locate those people at Te Putere, which will bo a place for them ; but you, Arama, Tukehu, Apanui, Kawakura, and Wepiha, will bo their guards, and will look after them. Your friend, To Te Keepa, Te Awa-a-te-Atua. Donald McLean.
No. 92. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Arama Karaka. Friend Arama, — Whakatane, 25th May, 1870. Salutations. I have heard of your deeds, and of your having been able to bring your tribe into the places of life. Your work is good. Now it has been decided to locate those men at Te Putere, if you, Tukehu, Te Keepa, and Apanui will guard them. As they live quietly, so will they be treated. Your friend, Arama Karaka Mokonuiarangi, Te Awa-a-te-Atua. Donald McLean.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
67
A.—No. Br.
No. 93. Lieut.-Colonel St. John to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Opotiki, 24th May, 1870. I have the honor to report that, according to instructions received from the Honourable Mr. Fox, I gathered together a Native force for the purpose of clearing the Waioeka, in pursuit of Te Kooti. William King, of Ngaitai, got together his men, and Te Hata's and Matenga's, whilst I obtained the Ngatipukeko and Whakatane. The force assembled was larger than I intended, being as per return annexed ; but the Natives did not like going in less numbers. Unfortunately the weather turned bad. I started on the 12th, and on the 15th the rain commenced, and the rivers rose. I had taken the Tutaitoko track, and on arriving at Eaepawa it was as much as we could do to cross half tho force over to Tahora. We decided upon falling back to Maraetahi to economize our provisions, and wait for the subsidence of the flood, I taking the right bank, and Wi Kingi the left. On the 17th we both got to Maraetahi. I had seen no traces, but King had seen tracks leading up the river. The flood was still such that we could not communicate, and here we were obliged to remain for six days. Scouting parties were sent out, who reported the other fords to be even worse than this. Attempts to bridge the stream by felling trees at narrow places failed; huge ratas and rimus being swept away like straws. At last Taniora, of Motu, hit on a very good plan. By tripods lashed together and connected with poles a sort of bridge was formed, by which we were enabled to cross the river—here some forty yards wide, and for half that distance four feet deep, with an awful current. By this time we had been ten days out, under almost incessant rain. The rivers were rising, and the information I received was to the effect that once the winter flood had begun, it would not go down again. . It was with great reluctance that I gave in at last to the unanimous ideas of the Natives, and turned homewards. To get back wo had to find our way as best we could through the bush, and it took us three days to accomplish the march Mr. Porter did in one. The Whakatohea, who had a sick man on a litter, had to come on by slow marches, and the rear is not even yet in. I am firmly persuaded that Te Kooti is on the upper waters of the Waioeka, or about those of the Alotu. Eru Tamaikowha .states he has not been seen in Waimana. An old man we found on our road up informed us that Nepia, with his men, was in search of him. At Maraetahi we found a dead body, which proves no one has been there since tho fight. Te Kooti was last seen at Te Huhu, a place a day's march beyond the spot where Hakaraia was killed; and Wi Kingi found not only tracks leading up stream, but also signs of recent work at cultivations at Tahora, as if a party had been taking away provisions. Beyond Tahora are no cultivations. It is therefore possible that, being without food except such as he could find in the bush, Te Kooti may have made his way across to the Motu, where there are quantities of wild pigs. To show the good feeling of the Natives who were with me, on my suggesting this, the answer was, that they were quite willing to follow up the tracks, even if they had to live on tawa and whinau, &c. Had it not been for the floods, we should certainly have kept on the track which I believe Te Kooti has taken. As it is, it was hopeless to attempt it. I have, &c., The Officer Commanding, Bay of Plenty. J. H. H. St. John, Lt.-Col.
Eeport not furnished.
No. 91. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. Sir,— Napier, 23rd May, 1870. I have reported by telegraph the arrival of Major Eopata's party at Te Wairoa, and that after sending Mr. Locke to communicate with him, and receiving his report, I came to the conclusion that it was undesirable to push Ngatiporou to do more this winter, and accordingly sent the "St. Kilda" to.take Eopata and his people back to their settlements. I transmit herewith copy of Mr. Porter's journal of the proceedings of the expedition, from which it will bo seen that the winter is thoroughly set in, in the Urewera country, and that constant wet prevailed nearly the whole time the expedition was out. It will be observed from the report of Mr. Porter that twenty-eight prisoners, of the Ngatikowhatu section of the Urewera Tribe were captured ; and that, in giving up the work for the winter, Eopata does so with the expressed determination to ask to be allowed to finish it in the spring, and his letter to me (which I scut without keeping a copy to the Hon. the Native Minister) was in similar terms. No doubt the advance of Ngatikahungunu was tho cause of his not pushing through with his work ; but they having got in advance, he was not content, to use his own words, " to follow in their trail." He has however written to them, telling them they are quite strong enough for the work, and urging them on, saying they ought to make a name for themselves as well as Ngatiporou. From Mr. Porter, I gathered that the prisoners taken describe the Urewera as worn out and in constant dread of being captured and killed ; they are said to have mostly dispersed in small parties, who are hiding in caves and living in other inaccessible places. I regret that Bopata did not persevere, as, if he had gone on to Buatahuna, as I had planned, I feel satisfied the whole of the Urewera would have surrendered. Mr. Borter was told by Eopata to inquire from me whether any remuneration would be given his people for their services, referring to the late expedition and the present, and I 18
A.—No. 8b
68
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
sent a reply to the effect that as Mr. McLean would be so soon at the Ngatiporou settlements on his way from Auckland, that the question had better be left to him. I am of opinion that it would be very impolitic not to reward the Ngatiporou for their services; for although they have not succeeded in capturing Te Kooti, they have done more than ever has been done before to reduce his prestige, and have also, for the first time, thoroughly humbled the Urewera Tribe, one whole section of which have been- captured and taken from the stronghold at Maungapowhatu, and are now prisoners at the Ngatiporou settlements. The " St. Kilda" left this on the evening of the 20th for tho Wairoa; and as the weather was very suitable yesterday, she will, I trust, have taken Eopata and his people home. I have, &c, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary, Wellington. J. I). Ormond. Enclosure in No. 94. Lieut. Porter to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Te Wairoa, 18th May, 1870. I have the honor to furnish, attached herewith, a copy of rough diary kept during the march of Ngatiporou from Turanga to Waikare-Moana, which latter place was not reached for reasons shown in the diary. The weather throughout the march was very bad indeed, and our supply of biscuit out, owing to the large number of men (439) on the expedition. We depended upon obtaining a supply of potatoes at Orewdia to carry us round the lake, but getting to Euakituri we found the place destroyed by Ngatikahungunu. I have the honor to request you will lay the diary before the Hon. the Defence Minister. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, T. W. Porter, Lieut. General Government Agent, Napier. Diary. 4<th May, 1870. —Bopata, with 300 men, started from Turanganui for Oweta, leaving me with the remainder of the men to follow after, when all rations, &c, were ready for the inarch. I started at 2 p.m., and marched to Oweta, at which pa I found Bopata camped. He told me to send for more biscuit, as a canoe had capsized, spoiling sixteen bags. We cannot now start to-morrowr, on account of this delay. sth May. —At 3 p.m. fifteen bags of biscuit were brought from Turanganui, which was all that could be obtained. Eopata has been very unwell to-day. It has been raining all day, with wind from south. If fine to-morrow, we start. 6th May. —This morning, weather having partly cleared up, food and ammunition were distributed fas t\ve wvaxek —10 tovvxvds xjet vaaw. Mtev all "pikans were prepared, the men stripped for a war dance. Ngaitahupo were the on\j ones whose footsteps were wrong. Our track is by Te Aral. Beaching Tapatahi, our advance found a kit hanging upon a tree, with a mat inside of it. Tracks also of three persons were seen. Our men were at once on the trail, and succeeded in capturing a woman and two children. The woman states she has been living here since Ngatapa. The eldest boy, of six years of age, had a charge of duck shot tied up in his blanket. The father is absent with Te Kooti. It is remarkable that people should have been living here so long and yet left for the Ngatiporou to capture. Ith May. —lt has been raining all day. We were therefore unable to march. lam afraid the season is very far advanced. We are in hopes of it clearing up to-morrow. The woman taken prisoner was sent with her two children to Pa Kiri Kiri. Bth May. —Camp Tatawhata. Soon after leaving Tapatahi this morning, when ascending the spur leading from Te Arai, it came on to rain very heavily. It continued showery all day, wetting all our food. Wind also blows very cold. 9lh May. —It has been raining all last night, and has continued without cessation throughout the day. This morning a Native came from Turanga, bringing news from Te Wairoa. He tells us that Ngatikahungunu had reached Whataroa, having killed two Hauhaus. We are extremely sorry to hear this, as it will very likely frustrate our whole expedition. It was at Whataroa and Erepeta we expected to find Ngatikohatu. The two guides of that tribe with us are greatly annoyed, as they say we could have captured them all easily, and now they will have gone to reinforce Te Kooti. Five men returned to Turanga to-day on sick list. 10th May. —Weather is still wet and cold. We started this morning and travelled two hours, though raining heavily. We reached an old camp at Waerenga-a-Kuri, where we deemed it best to stay, as our biscuit was getting wet. There is no appearance of clearing up. We have had but four fine days since 14th last month. 11th May. —Te Umu-o-tae. We started this morning, with every appearance of weather breaking, but had not marched long when it commenced to rain again, with wind from S.W., with slight showers of snow. As our track lay along the top of a range we could not camp,.there being no wood to put up whares with. On getting here we were all miserably cold and wet. One of the men, while cutting wood with a very sharp tomahawk, had cut through his instep with it. He will be sent back to-morrow upon a stretcher. 12th May. —Camp Panga Koroha. —Before starting this morning the wounded man was sent back with six others, told off to carry him; we could not succeed in stopping the bleeding. Our march to-day has been along the stream Mangaihiko. Last night was very cold, with heavy frost. Beaching our present camp we told off seventy men, with one of Ngatikohatu guides, to go in advance—to strike off by Tarewa to a place where we expect to find some Hauhaus living. Eopata intends, if they give themselves up, to save them, but if attempting to escape, to kill them. But any man not of Ngatikohatu will be killed.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
69
A.—No. Bb.
13th May. —At daylight this morning a kokiri of seventy men was sent on in advance to Pukewhinau, to search for Ngatikohatu. The main body marched at 7 a.m., our track lying along a high fern ridge, very different from the track to Maungapowhatu. Soon after our reaching Waihau, where we are now encamped, our kokiri sent out yesterday rejoined us. They report having reached Te Anapu-a-tai, where some of Ngatikohatu had been living ; but on surrounding the place, they found it bad been abandoned for some short time past. We expect they were warned by the man who escaped from us when on our way to Maungapowhatu in March last. Our guide thinks they must have bolted to Whakapunaki. All their cooking utensils were left behind them ; they must have departed in great haste. If we see their canoes down the river, we shall know they are at Whakapunaki. The weather has partly cleared up, although still cold. l<lth May. —Memo. I have heard our guide, Eewi, relating the doings of Te Kooti at Turanga. It was Te Kooti's intention, after redeeming this Island for his people, to himself return to the Chathams, there to make his home. At 1 o'clock a man came back from the kokiri sent out yesterday, to tell us they succeeded in capturing some Ngatikohatu, at Whenua-a-Kura, and that some more were on top of Whakapunaki, and some up Euakituri. On getting this information, we at once marched, and getting to Whenua-a-Kura, we found our men there with the prisoners. A party was still absent, having gone to surprise Whakapunaki, a mountain only second to Maungapowhatu in its reputation of terror. It is supposed a Moa is living there, surrounded by Ngarara. It is the first time this place has been attacked by a war-party, there always being a superstitious fear regarding it. In the night the party returned, bringing in some more prisoners from Whakapunaki. We have now in all twenty-two prisoners. One of the men prisoners told us that they had seen large fires at Whataroa and Orewha, both of which places had been destroyed ; also, very heavy firing had been heard in the direction of Waikare. They had taken tho alarm and gone to Whakapunaki. Eopata, upon getting this information, said it was Ngatikahungunu, who had gone on to Waikare and had disturbed the Hauhaus, who were all scattered in the bush. He then told them that it would be useless our following now, and that we would make our way to Te Wairoa, as our food was out and there was no prospect of getting more, as Orewha was where we depended upon obtaining a supply. He told the men that the conclusion of this work would have to be left to Ngatiporou; twice he had been deterred from carrying out his views. First, by rongo pai at Maungapiowhatu ; now, again, by the premature advance of Ngatikahungunu, which he attributed to the same causes which led Kemp to leave Opotiki in such haste on our return from Maungapowhatu, where he had been waiting twelve days previously, knowing where Te Kooti was all the time. Eopata said, Porter and myself are going to Poneke, when I intend asking Government to allow the Ngatiporou to have the killing of Te Kooti to themselves, as their name was at stake. We are now almost out of food. To-day is the first fine day we have had for nearly a month past. 15th May. —After prayers this morning, just before starting, the prisoners all being assembled before our tent, Eopata arose and spoke to the people. He said, "We have saved these prisoners, but it was the last time any one would be saved ;on our future expedition, all would be killed." He said, we are compelled to abandon this expedition on account of the perplexity which had occurred. He told them to be careful of their ammunition, as he intended to call. upon, the whole of the tribe in the summer to go in chase of Te Kooti till dead. On getting to Te Eeinga a party of fifty men went up the Euakituri, to a place where some more of Ngatikohatu were living ; they succeeded in surrounding the place and captured the occupants, who were mostly old people. Among them, however, was Mauku, who escaped from us when on our way to Maungapowhatu, and wdiose wife and children we took captive. He had only just arrived at the kainga when caught; he stated that he had been three times back to where we took his family from ; he thought them dead, and followed on our track some time. At one of our camping places he found some rags belonging to his children, which he collected, and has carried them round his neck ever since ; he is a fine-looking fellow, and would make a desperate enemy. Among our prisoners are some very old people, who are quite decrepit. We are compelled to leave them behind. Our prisoners remaining on hand are twenty-two —eight men, two women, twelve children, six left behind; total, twenty-eight. 16th May. —Te Marumaru. —We marched from Te Eeinga this morning, and sent most of the prisoners down by canoes. To-morrow morning I go on in advance with thirty men, to report and prepare rations. Eopata instructs me to write for a steamer to allow our return home. 17th May. —I came on in advance this morning, leaving main body to come on with Eopata. At night they arrived. Ngatikahungunu are still at the Lake. Eopata is determined not to return, as he thinks it would be quite useless to do so, and would be a bad omen to return so late in the season. An orderly has left with report of our return to Mr. Ormond. We expect a steamer to arrive to-morrow.
No. 95. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. Sir,— Napier, 23rd May, 1870. I have the honor to report that on hearing from Afajor Bopata that he had given up the Waikare-Moana expedition for this winter, I immediately wrote to Mr. Hamlin and the Ngatikahungunu, who were at Waikare-Moana waiting for Bopata, telling them of his determination, and urging them to complete the work themselves. I was aware there was some jealousy between the tribes, and hoped something from it. I have learnt since that this was much helped by Eopata and his people sending word to the Ngatikahungunu, that it was time for them to make a name for themselves as Ngatiporou had done. I now enclose a report from Mr. Hamlin, written after he and Ngatikahungunu were aware of the determination of Ngatiporou; and lam hopeful, from the spirit with which the Natives are going into their work, that Waikare-Moana will be thoroughly cleared out by them. Mr. Hamlin's report shows I had calculated rightly on the effect Eopata's action would have on the other Natives, and I
A.—No. Bb,
70
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
only trust favourable weather may allow of the objects of the expedition being carried out. There seems no doubt the enemy is in some strength on the Lake, and in possession of the whale boat taken there last year by our forces. I wish to call the attention of the Government to the readiness with which the Native expeditions meet their difficulties. It will be seen from Mr. Hamlin's report, that the enemy's principal pas are on the opposite side of the Lake, as they were last year, and to get at them measures have to be taken to cross the water, as the route round the Lake is very difficult and open to observation. The Natives this year have sot to work and made canoes in a few days from materials on the spot Last year the expedition was delayed weeks, if not months, whilst a Naval Brigade, boat builders, Ac, were obtained to build boats to achieve the same object. I hope soon to be able to report successful results from the expedition, and refer you to Mr. Hamlin's report for further information as to what is proposed to be done. In answer to the application from the Natives to be allowed some meat, I have authorized some sheep to bo purchased and sent up for the use of the expedition, but have limited the number and price to be given for them. In spite of all I can do, expenses are obliged to bo incurred, but I do my utmost to limit them. I have, Ac, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary, Wellington. ■■• J. D. Ormond.
Enclosure in No. 95. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to the General Government Acent, Napier. Sir,— Wairoa, 20th May, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter dated 15th instant, and by trooper carrying the same to Waikare-Moana, I learned that Major Eopata and the whole of his force had arrived at Te Wairoa; I therefore felt it my duty to come down and arrange with Eopata our plans for attacking the enemy, and communicate the same to you as requested. On arriving, however, at To Wairoa, I learned that Eopata had determinedly made up his mind to return home, and that Mr. Locke and Mr. Porter had started for Napier to communicate the same to head-quarters. I have much pleasure, nevertheless, to inform you that the steps taken by Major Bopata, instead instead of damping the ardour of my men, have created a large amount of emulation, and I have been requested by all the remaining Wairoa Natives not to ask the Ngatiporou to return, but to let them go home. I never yet-saw the Wairoa Natives in such a determined spirit. We have how two canoes about to be finished to-night, and another large one under way. The small boat we only found the day before yesterday, consequently have not had an opportunity of trying the sunken boats, which I am sorry to say I can give but little hopes of raising. As soon as the canoes are finished lam going to attack Tikitiki to begin with, and take the other pas in succession. Our fellows are at present in capital strength, numbering 300, with those now on the way up. They waited on me yesterday morning with a 'request that I should apply to the Government for them to be allowed a ration of meat, which, if I may be allowed to suggest, as they show such good spirit in the work they have taken in hand, might be allowed them. Should the above be approved of by the Government, would you be pleased to forward instructions respecting the same to Sub-Inspector JN'ewlaud, as I shall not have time to attend to it myself. I would here beg to inform you that I have taken the liberty of taking on the expedition the services of Mr. C. T. Saunders, who has been of great assistance to mo. His pay is at tho rate of eight shillings per clay. This gentleman was sergeant in the Napier Defence Force, and of course should answer his name on parade at Poverty Bay. May I therefore request that, as he is on public service, he will be excused from parade at Poverty Bay while the expedition lasts. I herewith enclose copy of diary up to the morning of the 19th instant, from which you will perceive that Paora Apatu and Te Hapimana aud myself have had some disagreement respecting the occupation of Wanganui Paru. Had my opinion been carried out, we should not only have killed about seven of the enemy, but also retaken the five-oared boat and captured a canoe from the enemy. There would have been no help for it, from the very position of the place. Yesterday morning, however, I met Paora and Hapimana, and it was at last agreed on, and a party of fifty picked men started out about 9 a.m., under Witty, Hapimana, John, and some others. I think I may safely say that the enemy have not the slightest idea that we are at or near Waikare-Moana. I trust shortly to have the pleasure of reporting favourably of the above detachment. There are a good number of the enemy spotted about the Lake. Te Waru is reported to be at To Matualia, or what is called Whakaari, on the Lake; Te Kooti we cannot tell where, but surmise at or near Buatahuna. I shall wait here till to-morrow morning, awaiting the arrival of the " St. Kilda" and any fresh instructions ; if she is not in by to-morrow, 10 a.m., I shall proceed to Waikare-Moana. I have, &c, The General Government Agent, &c, Napier. F. E. Hamlin. F.S. —Paora and I have cleared up all misunderstanding and are good friends as ever, and likely to work better together than before. —F. E. 11.
Kiri-o-Pukai, 19th May, 1870. 13th May, Friday.- —Provisions arrived ; sent despatch hy Tamihana ; packed up provisions, all very wet, axes in shocking condition; returned tent to store; on return to Tukurangi, served out rations; missed one bag sugar. 14sth May, Saturday. — Started for Te Kiwi; planted grapnels and rope at Tukurangi; served out remainder of rations, except two bags of flour, which we left for Matawhaito, when they came up. On arrival at Te Kiwi, found missing bag sugar among Maraki's people.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
71
A—No. _b,
15th May, Sunday. —Still at Te Kiwi. 16_. May, Monday. —Started to Waikare-Moana ; pitched camp at Kiri o Pukai; saw fires at Tikitiki and other places. I wished to start for Whanganui-Paru, but my opinion was over-ruled by Paora te Apatu and Hapimana. Found that the body of M'Noonan, the trooper who was shot a year ago, had been removed. 11th May, Tuesday. —Fires, Ac, as before ; boats and canoes crossing to Whanganui-Paru and other places ; again mooted the subject of going there, with the same success as before. Felled three trees for canoes and commenced dubbing out. 18.7. May, Wednesday. —Fires as usual, also at Whanganui-Paru ; boat and canoes to and fro ; found boat in Kuhua Creek, no oars; dug for axes, Ac, at the redoubt, but could not find them. Jeffries arrived with despatch dated 15th May, 2.30 p.m. 19th May, Thursday. —Hamlin started for Clyde. Witty and fifty men started for WhanganuiParu at 9 a.m.
No. 96. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. Sir,— Napier, 26th May, 1870. I have the honor to enclose a copy of Mr. Hamlin's last Eeport of what is going on at Waikaremoana; also of Mr. Witty's Diary giving an account of an expedition to Whanganui-Paru, when one of the enemy was shot and a canoe captured. The information given by Mr. Hamlin of a body of the enemy crossing to this side the Lake, from whence they could make a descent on either Wairoa or Mohaka, gives me some anxiety. I have warned the Mohaka Natives to be on the look out, and have also warned two European scouts stationed at Putere to watch carefully for any signs of the enemy ; I have also instructed SubInspector Newland to employ the Constabulary in scouting the approaches to Wairoa, and generally to keep an active look out. I trust Mr. Hamlin has taken the steps he proposed, of searching for the enemy's trail and assuring himself of his whereabouts. My own impression is that the party seen intends attacking Mr. Hamlin's force. It would appear from the information now received that the enemy is in some force at the Lake. Whether Te Kooti is there or not it is impossible to say. t enclose copy of a sketch of the Lake by Mr. Witty; also a sketch showing one of the enemy's pas, which is evidently situated in a position overlooked and untenable. I shall await the next information with some anxiety. The strength of Mr. Hamlin's force is over 300 men, but the Wairoa Natives have not generally distinguished themselves. I have, &c, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary, J. D. Ormond. Wellington.
Enclosure in No. 96. Sic, — Camp Waikaremoana, 24th May, 1870. I have the honor to report for tho information of tho Government that I arrived here yesterday, having been detained on the road seeing after the supplies. You will see by letter of Witty's to me, which I forwarded on, that on the 22nd instant a fleet of eight canoes and five-oared boat came across to Ohiringa well manned. Up to the time I arrived at Camp no party had been out to see after their trail. Immediately on arriving I sent a party under Ensign Witty and Mr. J. Large, who has volunteered for the front. He is a good plucky fellow, and I trust the Government will be pleased to admit of his services, and allow him a fair amount of pay. The services of such a man are greatly needed in sending out small parties. The party I sent out was, however, too late in the day to ascertain fully the enemy's trail. Although there may be no need of alarm, there should be a good look-out kept about the pas and townships, also Mohaka. I fully believe Te Kooti, is here; they are in good strength here, particularly at Tiki Tiki, Pukehuia, and Te Weranga. At the last place there is a large kainga, apparently a new formed one, in fact it looks like calico tents ; this is on the arm of the lake into which the tracks come from Euatahuna. A party of thirty men, under Mr. Large and Mr. Saunders, have started to endeavour to find out the enemy's trail, and if no trail can be found, I shall not send specially about the matter, but if, on the other hand, a party of them have gone down towards any of tho outside settlements, I shall follow them up. Since the alarm of the canoes coming across, it is a hard job to get natives to bring the provisions up, and we are just going to drag out one of our canoes, and another will be ready to be dragged out to-morrow, the third shortly after. Our people are anxious to commence attacking to-morrow. Major Boberts' party can now start in as soon as possible. I have, &c, The Officer Commanding, Wairoa. F. E. Hamlin.
Extract from Diary. 19th May, 1870.—Started with ten men from each hapu to Whanganui-Paru ; went by the inland bush track to avoid being seen, which brought us in at the back of the settlement of Motu Betere. Got to the edge of the bush at half-past three, and waited there till sundown. Whilst there, a canoe came over from the settlement immediately opposite to fetch potatoes ; we allowed them to go away unmolested, as we should have had to cross an open plantation, in full sight, to get to them, and the probability was they could get off before we could get down to the water. When dark we went down a gully and lit small fires, and had some tea ; came on a thunder-storm; groped our way down to some whares on the waters edge, at the landing place of canoes, quite drenched. 19
A,—No. Bb,
72
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
20th May. —Just before daylight, as the whares could be seen from the settlement opposite, we turned out, and planted ourselves in two parties at each end of the sand beach where the canoes land; laid by all day, and lit no fires till dark. It was very dark, and the wind blowing a regular gale ; too much sea for canoes to cross ; lit small fires and cooked potatoes. Crept into whares again at night; very cold. 21.. May. —-Some of the Ngarue, under Benehamine, and Hapimana and a few of his men went to a small settlement at the extreme end of this arm of the lake. On the opposite side of the lake saw two men in a canoe. Penehamine fired across, and one of the men fell in the water, the other ran the canoe on shore, and bolted into the bush. Our party then went round the lake, and brought away the canoe. There were two whares here, in one of them our fellows found a pair of blue cloth trousers, £2 in the pockets, a very nice waistcoat, lined with silk, an Inverness cape, a nicely bound Church of England prayer book, the first leaf torn out, where evidently the name had been written, but on the fly-leaf at the end there is written " Mary Christina." They also found an axe, adze, tomahawk, and a variety of other articles. In the evening the dingy arrived from Onepoto, with provisions, which was very welcome. Having effected our object of capturing a canoe, we were able to light fires. The Hauhaus, at Matuahu pa, were koreroing and firing all night. 22nd May. —Soon after breakfast, two men came in a canoe from Matuahu to within about 1,000 yards, and had a korero with Salmon and Hapimana They said they would go and hold a consultation at the pa, and would return with an answer back shortly. The next thing we saw was eight canoes, four of them very large ones, and the whaleboat, cross over to Tiki Tiki, and shortly afterwards they all crossed over to Oneringa, which is about five miles from Onepoto, under Panekiri Bange. After a short consultation, my party decided to return to Onepoto, which we did, arriving there just before dark. I estimated the force which crossed from eighty to a hundred, with the glass; I could see them distinctly, and counted twenty-five in one canoe. My own idea was that a strong reinforcement had arrived from Euatahuna, and perhaps Te Kooti himself, and from Oneringa they could, in a few hours, attack our party at Onepoto in the rear, or else Wairoa or Mohaka. James Wm. Witty.
No. 97. Lieutenant Porter to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— _ Poverty Bay, May 30, 1870. I have the honor to report for the information of the Government, the surrender on the 29th instant of the following men and one woman of the Ngatikohatu tribe, and from whom were received six rifles and one revolver. The names are Korohina Te Bakiroa, Ngarati Puketutu, Hone Whakari, Te Wiremu Waiharakeke, Paratene Kaukaranui, Ararutu Kahupo, Miriama. Total, 7. These people have surrendered in consequence of a letter left at Te Bunga by Major Eopata, during our last expedition to Waikaremoana, telling the refugees of the Ngatikohatu to come in and they would be spared. They are the remnant of the tribe, all of whom are now in our hands ; 51 captured at Mungapohatu, 28 near Te Eeinga, with the 7, making a total of 86 persons. The chief Bakiroa has been in rebellion for some time. He now reports Te Kooti as deserted by his people and quite disheartened. It is Major Bopata's wish that Bakiroa be given over to him for the purpose of obtaining information, and to shew the whereabouts of Te Kooti. Eopata begs the Government will favorably consider his request. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native and Defence Minister, T. W. Porter, Wellington. Liutenant.
No. 98. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Major Mair, B.M. Sir,— Opotiki, May 26, 1870. In the absence of Mr. Commissioner Clarke, I have to request that you will take general, charge of Native affairs in the Bay of Plenty district. The different settlements between Tauranga and the Kaha should be frequently visited by you and a general supervision exercised over those Natives who have recently surrendered, more especially the Whakatohea and those of the Urew rera under Hapurona Kohi, with others of the same tribe who are expected to follow. The Whakatohea are already provided with land ; and as it is highly important that the Urewera tribe should be got out of their mountain, fastnesses, land for cultivation will be assigned to them on the coast, in positions where they can in a great measure support themselves by fishing and cutting flax for sale to Europeans. The reserve at Putere, near Matata, will be devoted to this purpose, and the following chiefs will bo responsible for the future good conduct of the Natives placed under their charge : —Major Kemp of Tuhourangi, Tukehu, Arama Karaka, Te Apanui, Wepiha, Kawakura. For the better security of the Urewera, the above named chiefs may take parties of them to reside at their respective kaingas, it being understood that they have the Putere reserve to cultivate upon. A distinction should be made between those Natives who surrender of their own accord, and those who are compelled to do so by force of arms; in the latter case the Natives should be tried under the Disturbed Districts Act, 1869, in the former the giving up of their arms and an assurance from
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES
73
A.—No. Bb.
themselves and the chiefs under whom they may be placed, will be deemed a sufficient guarantee for their future good conduct. The Urewera who surrender will be protected from ill-treatment, but no conditions can be made with those who choose to ignore the clemency of the Government by continuing a hostile attitude in the Waikaremoana country; or who have committed such unprovoked murders or outrages as are inconsistent with the laws of humanity and justice. Those who have fought openly in accordance with the recognized usages of war as understood by the Natives, will not be subjected to any conditions beyond those previously referred to, viz.:—the surrender of their arms and withdrawal from the Urewera country. You will afford Lieut.-Colonel Moule every possible assistance in the discharge of judicial duties in cases where the Natives are concerned; and confer as fully as possible with him in reference to any attempt that you may deem it advisable to make for the capture of Te Kooti, who is supposed to be at the head of the Waioeka Gorge. You will keep the Government fully advised of all Native occurrences in tho district, and exert yourself by every means to bring about a restoration of general tranquillity. I have, Ac, Major W. Mair, * Donald McLean. Opotiki.
No. 99. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Major Eopata. Friend Major Eopata,— East Cape, May 29, 1870. Salutations. I have heard of what you have done against the Hauhaus, and also of the capture by you of the Ngatikohatu. The Government admire very much the energy displayed by yourself and your soldiers in gathering that tribe together in such severe weather. The Government bear in mind that it is through your energy in going into the Urewera country that this bad war, which has been going on for many years, has approached to a conclusion. Should there soon be peace in this district, the Government will remember tho energy displayed by this tribe, the Ngatiporou, in putting down evil that good might result, and that light might shine over this island, and the tribes might thereby be able to live in peace under the law. Tour friend, Donald McLean.
No. 100. Lieut.-Colonel Motjle to Mr. Commissioner Branican. Sir, — District Office, Tauranga, 9th June, 1870. I have the honor to enclose herewith, for the information of the Hon. the Defence Minister, a report from Captain Mair of his late movements on the border of the Urewera country. I have, &c, The Commissioner, Armed Constabulary Force, W. Mottle. Wellington. Inspector A.C., Tauranga District.
Enclosure in No. 100. Sir, — Tauranga, 9th June, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that I went out in the direction ol Fort Galatea on the Ist inst., with 30 men, and saw fires at Eaoraopatete. Crossed the Eangitaiki Biver at Waihua, and met a messenger from the Urewera, called Ngawaka, on the 2nd. He brought me a letter from the Patuheuheu saying that they were all camped at Eaoraopatete, on their way down to Te Teko, and also wanted me to send a party up to escort them. I sent Ngawaka back with letters telling the people to come out as soon as the weather cleared up. On the 3rd I returned to Fort Clarke for food. On tho 4th I again went to Waihua, by Waiohau or Hauraki. Eaining very heavily. Met the chief Wi Batene at the crossing place, but the heavy rains had so flooded the river that it was impossible to cross the women or children. Wi Patene and his companions told me that all their people (about fifty) would come out. The reason why they did not come out on receiving my first letter was that the Urewera, at Buatahuna, restrained them ; but two of their chiefs, Mohi and Bangiaho, came back from that place (where they had been attending a great meeting of the Urewera) on the 3rd, and brought news that the main body of the Urewera no longer opposed their leaving Horomanga Gorge, but, on the contrary, they told them (the Patuheuheu) to come out to the sea coast at once, as pioneers for the Urewera. Mohi brought letters from the Urewera to Captain Preece and myself, but up to the time of my leaving Te Teko on the 6th, they had not been received. I was obliged to leave the Patuheuheu at Waihua and return to camp at Te Teko, as my provisions were entirely out. During my absence from Te Teko, Captain Preece arrived from Taupo and Kaiteriria. He promised to send out a party to bring Wi Patene and his people in, as soon as the flood is low enough to enable them to cross the Eangitaiki, -at Waiohau. The Patuheuheu hitherto have occupied the Horomanga Gorge, the most direct approach to Buatahuna. The abandonment of their strong position at Tutaepukepuke will leave the road to Buatahuna quite clear. They are all well armed, and about twenty are fine young men, closely connected with the loyal tribe, the Ngatimanawa, and I would
A.—No. Bb.
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
74
suggest that they be allowed to settle at Parawai with the former, who have plenty of land at that place, and it is their own wish. I expect letters from Captain Preece in a day or so with further particulars. I have, Ac, The Officer Commanding District Gilbeet Maie, Tauranga. Captain Commanding Arawa Flying Column.
No. 101. Lieut.-Colonel Mottle to Mr. Commissioner Branigan. Sir, — District Office, Tauranga, 10th June, 1870. I have the honor to forward herewith, for the information of the Hon. the Defence Minister, a letter, with enclosures, from Captain Preece, reporting the surrender of Mohi te Wero, Wi Patene, 17 men and 23 women and children of the Ngatihaka tribe. I have requested Major Mair to dispose of the prisoners, and he proposes to locate them at Parawai, as he does not consider it advisable to have all the men who surrender placed on the lands at Putere. Bangiaho and Pera will be dealt with in the same way as other prisoners, pending instructions from the Defence Minister. With regard to Captain Preece's suggestion that a party of picked men should be sent to Te Pato to try and effect the capture of Te Kooti, I am of opinion that it would not be advisable to send an expedition into the Urewera country at the present time, when the whole of the Ureweras seem inclined to surrender, as it might have the effect of alarming them. Major and Captain Mair concur in my opinion. The bad weather and flooded state of the rivers render an expedition impossible just now, and, further, it is very doubtful about Te Kooti being up the Waioeka, as he was not there when Wiremu Kingi lately visited that place. Major Mair, commanding at Opotiki, will take advantage of any favorable opportunity for the capture of Te Kooti. I have ordered the arms given in by the prisoners to be placed in store at Te Teko or Matata. Eespecting Captain Preece's men being short of provisions, this has occurred through the necessary issues made to prisoners. A large supply of provisions is now on board the cutter " Hazard," for conveyance to Matata. I have, &c., The Commissioner Armed Constabulary Force, W. Mottle, Wellington. Inspector A.C., Tauranga District.
Enclosure 1 in No. 101. Sir— Te Teko, June 7th, 1870. I have the honor to report for your information that the Ngatihaka, under Mohi te Wero and Wi Patene, to the number of nineteen men and twenty-three women and children, have surrendered to me this day. Mohi and Bangiaho only left Buatahuna on the 28th of May. The Urewera are undecided what to do; they say we are telling them to come out one side and fighting them on the other, meaning the expeditions to Waikaremoana. lam of opinion, however, that with a little management a large portion of them will surrender. Paerau is at Waikaremoana; ho went there to see that portion of the Urewera, as they had heard they had been attacked there by our forces. I may mention that among the men who have surrendered is Bangiaho, who was engaged in the raid on Poverty Bay, and it is also said that he killed Mr. Pitcairn. There is a man, named Pera, a Chatham Island prisoner, who stayed at Eaoraopatete, being afraid to come in, as he had heard all Chatham Island men were to be hung. I purpose sending for him. Te Kooti is still at Waioeka ; the Urewera refuse to give him shelter in their country, and they propose that two of our men should go to all their kaingas to satisfy us that Te Kooti is not there. I am of opinion that if a party of picked men were sent up the Waioeka Gorge to Te Pato, and from there to the Motu Eiver, they might bo successful in capturing Te Kooti, as he has but a fow men with him. I should also recommend that Hoani Paiaka accompany such expedition, as he knows the spot where Te Kooti's camp is. I beg also to enclose translations of native letters from Buatahuna, together with list of names and arms of the men who have surrendered. I have to request that I may be instructed what lam to do with the said arms. I would beg to suggest that if the Natives_behaved themselves for any time that their arms might be returned to them. I shall be compelled to obtain a further supply of provisions from the storekeepers at Whakatane or Matata, as my men are rationed up to the 9th, and there is nothing in store. I have, &c, Lieut.-Colonel Moule, George Preece, Commanding Tauranga District. Captain Commanding Te Teko.
Sub-Enclosure 1 to Enclosure 1 in No. 101. Buatahuna, May 27, 1870. To Te WEPinA at Whakatane, — Friend —Salutations to you and your thoughts, your word is good concerning your relative Tipene. Listen, I will lay that death down (not revenge it), I will leave it with you to settle, but I will look on from here, then it will be for you and Kemp to see into it. From Tamaikowha, That is from all the tribe.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A.—No. SB-
75
Sub-Enclosure 2 to Enclosure 1 in No. 101. To Captain Preece, Captain Mair, Arama Karaka, Tukehu, that is, to all of you at Fort Galatea. Friends, listen, We are not clear at this time about going out as you desired. The reason is, we have told you Te Kooti is not here. Tou still persist in telling us to go out. This is why it is not clear. Part of our word is a Waiata. I will not move quickly ; my thoughts are not matured. As yet they are young enough. Tour word about Te Ahuru. You are wrong, he is our child ; that man is from here. This is his tribe, and his land. Enough of that. Concerning your word about Hiria, it is not clear to us why you detain her, because that woman does not belong to you, but to us ; both she and Te Ahuru are ours, that is why it was clear to us to ask for her, and also to capture Te Ahuru. Enough. From Tuhoe Potiki (the Urewera tribe).
Sub-Enclosure 3 to Enclosure 1 in No. 101. List of Ngatihaka (Patuheuheu) who Surrendered at Te Teko. Chiefs —Mohi Te Wero, Wi Patene Taranui, Bangiaho Te Whareharatuke. Ngahoro, Nikorima Perenara, Te Teira, Wiremu, Paratene, Mehaka, Waihua, Takerei, Hieke, Te Whati, Te Kahu, Te Tokoahu, Ngawaka, Hemi, Bameka ; twelve women and eleven children. Total —42. George Preece, Captain.
Sub-Enclosure 4 to Enclosure 1 in No. 101. List of Arms given up by Ngatihaka. Two Fowling Pieces ; two Muskets ; one Enfield Bifle. George Breece, Captain.
No. 102. Major Mair, E.M., to the Under Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir,— Tauranga, June 11th, 1870. In the absence of Mr. Clarke at Eotorua, I have the honor to report for your information that on the 9th instant, letters were received from Captain Preece at Te Teko, reporting the arrival at that place of the Patuheuheu and Ngatihaka hapu of the Urewera under the chiefs Wi Patene and Bangiaho; their numbers are nineteen men, twelve women, and eleven children.—total forty-two ; the rest, about twenty in number may be expected out in a few days. It has been suggested by Captain Mair, who has ascertained the feeling of the parties interested, to watch them at Parawaia, the settlement of the Ngatimanawa, ten miles from Matata. lam of opinion that this would be a better arrangement than placing them at Te Putere with Hapurona's people, as for obvious reasons it would be well not to have too many of these lately surrendered rebels together; by placing them at Parawai, where there is abundance of good land belonging to Ngatimanawa, they will become incorporated with the latter tribe, to whom they are closely related, and will, I believe, should their assistance be required at any future time, do good service for the country. The messengers sent in to the Maungapowhatu country from Whakatane have not yet returned, this is owing in all probability to the heavy freshes, and also to the fact that by the latest accounts most of the Maungapowhatu people were at Buatahuna. I have, &c, W. G. Mair, The Under-Secretary, Native Department. Eesident Magistrate.
No. 103. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. Defence Minister. Sir,— Napier, 12th June, 1870. I have the honor to transmit copy of a report by Mr Hamlin, of the movements of the Wairoa expedition in the Waikaremoana district. From it you will see that a great deal has been accomplished ; that our allies have marched round the Lake, a feat hitherto supposed to be impossible ; and that they have taken the enemy's principal position, and a great quantity of food. The severe weather prevailing at the date of taking possession of Matuahu pa prevented our force from at once crossing to Tiki-Tiki and Pukehuia, the positions to which the enemy had retreated; but an attack would doubtless be made so soon as the weather allowed. I shall defer making a full report on the Waikaremoana expedition until in receipt of further advices, and trust I may then be enabled to advise you of the successful termination of the operations. I also herewith enclose copy of a telegram from Captain Preece to Inspector Boberts, reporting the surrender on the Bth instant of the whole of the Patuheuheu hapu, of the Urewera. These people resided at Horomanga, and held one of the keys to the Urewera country. It is worthy of notice that on the same day as the Patuheuheu hapu surrendered the Wairoa expedition took the enemy's chief position on Waikaremoana Lake. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Wellington. J. D. Ormond. 20
A.—No. 8b
76
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
Enclosure 1 in No. 103. Sub-Inspector Newland to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sin, Te Wairoa, 10th June, 1870. I have the honor to forward you the enclosed report just received from Mr Hamlin (2 p.m.), and in consequence of all my mounted men being at the Lake it necessitates my putting a horse and man on pay to take this to Waikare, whom I have instructed to wait Tait's return. The orderly that brought the report from Mr. Hamlin, informs me that my mounted men, sent in charge of the stores and sheep, arrived at Onepoto safely, and expect they will be back to-morrow, also the fourteen pack horses that took the stores to the front, and on their arrival I will strike them off pay. I have, Ac, W. Newland, The Hon J. D. Ormond, Sub-Inspector A.C. General Government Agent, Napier.
Enclosure 2 in No. 103. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to Sub-Inspector Newland. Matuahu Pa, Whakare, Sir, —- Waikaremoana Lake, June Bth, 1870. I have the honor to report for the information of the Government, that the whole of the force under my command has moved on to Matakitaki, part of them overland, and the rest in boat and canoes. On arrival there, two of the Hauhau canoes came out to reconnoitre our position, but on being chased by two of our canoes, they quickly retreated to the other side, where they were covered by their land force. As we could see that the main body of the enemy were at Matuahu, I proposed that fifty picked men should start at night in the canoes, skirt along the side of the Lake under cover of Panekiri, and then just before daylight make a rapid dash across at Tiki Tiki. If this had been successfully accomplished, as I believe it could be, and the Natives were very anxious to make the attempt, it would effectually have turned the enemy's flank, but as usual Paora and Hapimana threw cold water upon any scheme which did not originate with them, and we were reluctantly compelled to abandon the attempt. The next day I induced about eighty of the best men to start with three canoes and boat to Whanganui-Paru undercharge of Ensign Witty, Messrs. Saunders and Large, and two of the Mounted Constabulary accompanying him. The alleged reason given for this expedition was to fetch potatoes from Whanganui-Paru in the canoes and boat; but as I felt convinced that unless a bold stroke was made, the main body of the force would never cross the Lake, I gave private instructions to Ensign Witty if he saw a chance, to make a bold push across the Lake and establish a position there, when we should, after once having broken the ice, be able to induce the Natives to go ahead; and by night this was successfully accomplished, for after examining Whanganui-Paru they crossed the Lake and effected a landing without any opposition, and after all had got across they went on to the Caves, where they found some whares and potatoes ; after halting for an hour to have something to eat, they proceeded up the Lake to Tauinatataua, a large clearing immediately opposite Matakitaki. The party in the boat and one of the canoes reached the clearing without opposition, and under the impression that the place was abandoned, were searching the whares of which there were about a dozen, when a volley was poured into them from the bush skirting the clearing, but although not more than 100 yards off fortunately not one of them was hit. At the same time a volley w ras fired from the bush hill overlooking the landing place for the canoes, at a party who were just landing, slightly wounding one man, Hira, of Pahawhera. Although taken by surprise our men behaved very well; and taking cover behind the logs, &c, in the clearing, kept up such a hot fire on the enemy that they held them in check until the return of the canoes with the rest of their party, as they were not able all to go in one trip ; they then charged into tho bush and drove the Hauhaus back in the direction of Matuahu, following them for about a mile, when, as it was nearly dark, they returned'to Tauinatataua. They then sent the boatand canoes across to Matakitaki, and I sent a party across to reinforce them. The next day about one o'clock the outlying picquet under charge of Patrick, a half-caste of Mohaka, was attacked by a party of the enemy. Our picquet held their ground, and shot one of the Hauhaus (Enoka) belonging to the Ngatikahungunu, Te Waru's tribe, and said to be his best fighting man ; and on being reinforced they soon drove the enemy back. They took a single-barrelled gun, eleven cartridges, and twenty-three caps from Enoka. At the same time that the picquet were .attacked we saw from Matakitaki the whaleboat, with a full crew, and five canoes, fully manned (two of them with not less than twenty men each), at a rough estimate numbering eighty, come round Matuahu with the intention evidently of attacking the force at Tauinatataua in the rear, and taking their canoes, but the enemy's attacking land party being so quickly repulsed (which fact was apparently signalled to them from the big hill above Afatuahu) they retired, and from that time we date their having formed the intention, which they afterwards carried out, of evacuating Matuahu. On Monday I crossed with all the Natives from Matakitaki to Tauinatataua, except about sixty, whom I left at the former place to prevent the enemy from crossing the Lake in the canoes and landing in our rear. I sent off three men to Wairoa with a despatch to you, but in the evening they returned with a confused account of having seen Hauhaus at Takarangi, but this afterwards turned out to be a party sent up with supplies. I was rather afraid at first this would upset our plan of advancing the next day, but although some of the Natives wished to go back and ascertain if there was any truth in this report, the main body refused to listen to this proposition for a minute, and were unanimous in ■their determination to go forward.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
77
A.—No. Bb,
On Tuesday morning, at nine o'clock, we started about 250 strong, and after three hours' march arrived at the foot of the big hill which commands the peninsula on which the pa stands. All the face of this hill is a large clearing at present full of splendid potatoes. It is a very steep ascent almost perpendicular but the natives ascended it in beautiful order in three parties, one on each flank and the third straight up the face, dodging from tree to tree, until they reached the summit which had been recently cleared. This was unoccupied and from here we could see that the pa was deserted. We arrived at the pa at one o'clock. There is only one large whare inside the pa, but outside there are sixteen whares. Shortly afterwards we saw the whaleboat and a large can oe come down the arm of the lake which runs towards the Huiarau ranges, full of men, and they landed at Pukehuia, wdiich is on the opposite side almost within rifle range of this place, we hoisted a white flag and called out to them to come in and give themselves up but received no reply, our canoes which were carrying our baggage did not reach here till late in the evening, or we should have gone over and captured the whaleboat, <&c. Last night and all day to-day (Wednesday) it has been raining incessantly, and there is such a sea on that it is impossible to cross the Lake, but failing to receive any reply to our offers of peace, if it is fine to-morrow we intend to cross to Tiki Tiki, and then the natives have made up their minds after examining and destroying all the different kaingas on the Lake to proceed to Buatahuna or wherever else they find traces of the enemy. I may remark here, that although Paora and Hapimana were rather vexed that they had not been consulted with regard to our first crossing the Lake, yet since that has been successfully accomplished, they, together with the other chiefs of the hapus, have acted far more cordially in carrying out my plans, and I think, for the future, I shall have no difficulty in getting them to accede to anything I propose. The amount of potatoes on this side of the Lake at the various clearings is something marvellous, and we all estimate the quantity already taken, eaten or destroyed at (including a large quantity of seed potatoes) certainly not less than 200 tons. The Hauhaus evidently did not think we should succeed in crossing the Lake which has always hitherto proved their great safeguard, for at each of the waerenga we have visited (six), large clearings have been recently made for cultivation next year, and an immense quantity of toetoe and raupo collected for building fresh whares. Last night I received your despatches, and communicated to the natives Eopata's opinion of them, which has determined them to still more vigorous action in this district, and they now wish tho Government to allow them to hold this position until the enemy is completely subdued. It is their opinion that a European force should be sent to hold this position until next summer but this of course is a matter for the consideration of the Government. I shall try and ascertain the whereabouts of the enemy, particularly of Te Kooti, and if I succeed in obtaining any reliable information, shall follow up the same and use my best endeavours to capture or kill him. If Eakiroa's account of the number here including Te Kooti's party can be relied on, I think it most likely Te Kooti is here, or at any rate was here, on Sunday last, as on that occasion the enemy numbered in the canoes and the attacking land party over 100 men. I feel it my duty before concluding this despatch to inform the Government that I have been warmly supported in the late operations by Ensign Witty, and also Messrs. Saunders and Large, more particularly Ensign Witty, who I beg to be allowed to place before the notice of the General Government ; and I feel proud of the way in which the Natives have behaved since we first crossed the Lake, and feel sure that no average Native force could have done better. I have, &c, Sub-Inspector Newland, Wairoa. F. E. Hamlin.
Enclosure 3 in No. 103. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. F. E. Hamlin. Sir,— Napier, 11th June, 1870. I have received with great pleasure your report of the Bth instant, addressed to Sub-Inspector Newland, and gather from it that after overcoming great difficulties, the Force you are directing has crossed the Lake and taken the enemy's main position at Alatuahu, also a great supply of provisions, and that your natives were in good spirits and intending to attack the enemy's other positions as soon as the weather would permit. From the way in which they are acting I feel satisfied that they will press on, and shall fully expect to receive still more satisfactory intelligence from you shortly. Now that all difficulties in the way of supplies are at an end, I have no doubt that the enemy, will be crushed and the Lake District thoroughly examined. I am sending instructions to Wairoa to send you up a further supply of groceries, and hope they may arrive in time to be of service to the expedition. I have communicated to the Government at Wellington what the expedition has accomplished, and am desired to convey to yourself, Mr. Witty, and the whole Force the high sense the Government entertain of the services rendered, and which I shall not fail to represent as they deserve. I feel it unnecessary to add more, and trusting the same success may attend you as heretofore, I have, &c, Mr. F. E. Hamlin, Wairoa Expedition, J. D. Ormond. Waikaremoana.
Enclosure 4 in No. 103. Captain Breece to Major Boberts. Sir,— Te Teko, June Bth, 1870. Ngatihaka (Patuheuheu) have surrendered to me this day. There are nineteen able-bodied
A—No. Sb
78
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
men, and twenty-three women and children. The Chiefs are Mohi Te Wero, Wi Patene Turanui, and Eangiaho. They had five stand of arms, which I have taken possession of. Eangiaho and Mohi left Euatahuna on 28th May. Urewera undecided whether to come out or not, say the Government give them the chance of coming in on this side and fight them on the other (Waikaremoana side). The men who have come in are from the Horomanga Gorge. Baerau is at Waikare. He went to learn about the fighting there. There is more chance of the Urewera giving in now than ever there has been. I think if a letter were sent them by the Government telling them to surrender it might go far to induce them to give in, but unless they actually come out there will be no dependence on them. Te Kooti is still at Waioeka. Urewera refuse to give him shelter in their country. I think a party of picked men might be successful in capturing him if properly managed, and should advise Hoani Baiaka accompanying such party, as he knows Te Kooti's whereabouts. I have, Ac, Major Eoberts. George Preece.
No. 104. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. Deeence Minister. Sir,— Napier, 20th June, 1870. I have the honor to transmit copies of correspondence referring to the Waikaremoana expedition. The unexpected arrival of the " Taranaki" has prevented me reporting upon the operationsat length, and I have only time to forward the correspondence. In his letter, dated 18th inst., Mr. Hamlin transmits correspondence with the Urewera, regarding their surrender, and I would particularly call your attention to those letters. lam not of opinion that Te Kooti is, as Mr. Hamlin has been informed, at Waikaremoana, and I also think that the Urowera letters do not justify the conclusion that they intend to surrender. I am unable to add more, or should lose the present opportunity of transmitting the correspondence. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, J. D. Ormond. Wellinton.
Enclosure 1 in No. 101. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Te Matuahu, June 11th, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that we have found out the nest of the Hauhaus. There are about 100 men at the foot of Huiarau, at the landing place, on the track to Buatahuna. They are very much alarmed, and have been reinforced from Buatahuna. Te Waru and people took off to Maungapowhatu. We have had communication now with them two days, and I expect some of them to surrender to-day, and once the ice is broken I think they will all give in. They are dreadfully afraid of our people that, after surrendering, they will be butchered. I have, however, assured them that their lives will be spared, and all terms with them will rest with the Government. I shall allow them ample time for surrender, after which all flags of truce will bo disregarded. If I get no decisive answer by Monday, I shall renew active operations. The whole of their women are sent into the bush towards Buatahuna. They say that from Euatahuna out, and down to Maungapowhatu, have accepted the Eongopai, and the Taupo side is the Taha Ngawari to surrender to. It is quite evident the Bongopai granted to them by Majors Kemp and Eopata are only nominal, and they can turn against any other Government party they think proper. The whole of their canoes are now penned up in a small arm of the Lake. We have been within 400 yards of one another conversing. The only reason lam giving them time is that I am in hopes once the ice is broken nearly if not the whole will give in, and it is utterly impossible to take them otherwise, as it is all bush work ; they will not stand fight, and the nights are too cold for night work. I have, &c, F. E. Hamlin.
Enclosure 2 in No. 104. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. F. E. Hamlin. Sic, — Napier, 15th June, 1870. I am in receipt of your report of the 11th inst, and gather from it that the enemy had retired to the extreme end of the arm of the Lake towards Huiarau leaving I conclude, Tiki Tiki, and the other kaingas in your hands. I also note that you had proposed to the enemy to surrender, and partly expected he would do so, I myself incline to the same opinion and trust it may be so. It is necessary under those circumstances to convey instructions for your guidance as to the course to be taken should the enemy surrender, and also in the event of his retiring upon Buatahuna or Maungapowhatu. In respect to the former the surrender must be as you have put it to them, an unconditional surrender, subject to what the Government may decide about them, and they would, of course, be taken by you to Wairoa until the determination of the Government in respect to them was made known. I regret to hear that Te Waru and his band have retired to Maungapowhatu and thus escaped falling into our hands. The natives now at the Lake, are, I conclude, the Urewera under Paerau and Whenuanui. In the event of the enemy retreating to Buatahuna or Maungapowhatu I have communicated with the Governnent as to the steps to be taken and have now to inform you it is not considered desirable
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
79
A.—No. Bb.
to run any risks in following them to those places. The difficulties of the country at this season are so great that it is almost unfair to ask men to undertake such a service, and from letters received from the chiefs, I gather that they would not do so heartily. Should, therefore, the Urewera retreat to those places, you will content yourself with making sure they have really left the Lake district and then thoroughly destroy all the kaingas and food you can find round the Lake before retiring with the force to Wairoa ; the canoes, Ac, you would of course destroy, except such as you can securely hide in case of future requirements, if you do so, entrust the hiding them to as few and as trustworthy men as possible. I enclose a letter for the chiefs, thanking them on the part of the Government for the services they have rendered ; and yourself, Mr Witty, and all engaged may depend that I will represent your services on the conclusion of the operations. I fully agree with the portion of your report in which you refer to the desirability of inducing the enemy to surrender, as it must be impossible in such a country to otherwise take them, and I trust your expectations of their surrender will be confirmed. It might perhaps be in your power in case of their surrender to get in Te Waru's people also, but if this bo done the surrender must be unconditional, as Government will not promise not to proceed against those who have been concerned in murders. I have, Ac, F. E. Hamlin, Esq., Wairoa Expedition, J. D. Oemond. Waikaremoana.
Enclosure 3 in No. 104. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to His Honor J. D. Oemond. Sir,— Matuahu Pa, Whakare, 16th June, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that since the date of my last despatch, no forward movement has been made by the force under my command, for two reasons, viz.: — Ist. From information received from you I was daily expecting Major Eoberts and his force would arrive, and had they done so they would have come in immediately in the rear of the present position of the enemy, who would thus have been placed between two fires, and either have been entirely destroyed or been forced to surrender. 2ndly. Without the co-operation of a force in the rear, from their present position, the enemy as soon as we proceed to attack them, which we must do from the front, have the option of retreating either to Buatahuna or Maungapowhatu, and under these circumstances I deemed it the best course, before proceeding with active operations, to try and induce them to surrender quietly. Through the medium of an old man, who lives in a whare about half way between us and the Hauhaus, we have been enabled to send several letters to them and receive replies, and yesterday (15th) under cover of a flag of truce, I went to the old man's whare, and there met threo of their chiefs— Makarini, Mokonuiarangi, and a young man named Hori —who expressed their willingness to surrender, but did not like the idea of being made actual prisoners, as they expected they would then be made gaol-birds, Mokaikai, and wished us to return to the Wairoa, and they would then come down and surrender. They owned to their having assisted Te Kooti at Poverty Bay, Mohaka, and Taupo. At the same time they stated it w ras a fact that the King was the fountain of the whole disturbance in the Island : he had backed Titokowaru, and all other disturbers of the peace, and was now backing Te Kooti. If our object was to make peace with them, to go against the King and exterminate him, they would join to a man and fight to the last to execute the work. They also stated that they were very much alarmed at the force I was bringing against them ; and that Te Waru and all his people had gone by way of Maungapowhatu, and had most likely joined Te Kooti, who by their account was still at Waioeka. They made strong allusions to peace having been made with them by Kemp, Bopata, and the Arawa. They had singled out all really offensive people from amongst them, and these were gone either to Buatahuna or Maungapowhatu. Paerau had returned to Buatahuna with a view to surrender on the Taupo side; they had sent all their women and children away. I informed them that it was not the wish of the Government to exterminate them, but to establish a firm and standing peace in the Island ; that they need not dread surrendering, as it would eventually prove a permanent benefit to them, that they would meet with every fair consideration ; that it was at their ow m request I ceased from hostilities for a time ; had I not paid attention to it, they would not then some of them be alive to talk to me; and told them not to dread those who had been sufferers, as the Government would settle all questions with them, and the best thing they could do was to surrender and go with us to Wairoa; that Bakiroa was now at Napier and several others. Eespecting the peace which had been made with them by Kemp, &c, I could not treat it with respect, as they had never come forward to meet the Government and accept of any terms, but on the other hand had since, and were still fighting against the Government, and no permanent peace could be established wdiile such was the case. In conclusion, I invited them to come over here and meet all the chiefs of our side, which they agreed to do to-day, when I hope, between gentle persuasion and hard rubs, to bring them to subjection. We parted with a request that I would present them with a shirt each, as it was very cold. With regard to our future proceedings, I am unable to write definitely by this opportunity, as they will depend greatly on the result of the korero tj-day. Should the Hauhaus not agree to my terms, I shall at once break off all treaty, and proceed with active operations ; but this I am anxious, if possible, to avoid, as, doubtless, on being attacked, they will retreat at once, and this would compel me either to follow them up to Buatahuna, and also Maungapowhatu, or to leave things in a very unsettled state. The season now is getting very advanced for camping out in this high bush country. Last night we had a very heavy fall of snow, and all round us now is a dazzling white, and although at present the natives are in very good spirits, I can hardly expect them, if this weather lasts, to stand 21
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
A,—No. SB
80
very much more of it. I shall send off to you immediately I have any definite information to give as to my future movements. lam very sorry that Major Eoberts has not come through. Had he done so, he would have had very easy work at Euatahuna, there being only old men and women left there, as all the fighting men they could muster are here, except those who have bolted with Te Waru, and we had got them driven up in such a corner, that with his force in the rear and ours in front, a few hours would have settled the, business satisfactorily. As the messenger who brought your despatch is now starting, and I know you are anxious toreceive this, I shall conclude for the present. Trusting that what I have done will meet with the approval of the Government, and that, with regard to future operations, they will be pleased to allow me to exercise my discretion to the best of my abilities, I have, Ac, His Honor J. D. Ormond, F. E. Hamlin. Agent for the General Government, Napier.
Enclosure 4 in No. 104. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. F. E. Hamlin. Sir,— Napier, 18th June, 1870. I am this morning in receipt of your report of the 16th instant, dated from Matuahu pa, and note the negociations you are engaged in with the Urewera. You would, shortly after the despatch of' your letter of the 16th instant, have received my letters of the 15th, conveying to you definitely the wishes of the Government in respect to the surrender of the Hauhaus, and the prosecution of operations. I am glad to see from your report that your action had been entirely in the direction the Government desire, and hope the negociations then proceeding have eventuated in the enemy's surrender. The proposal of the Urewera that you should withdraw from the Lake district, and allow them to follow you to the Wairoa, cannot be entertained, and in my opinion carries on the face of it an intention to deceive. The Government are desirous of dealing leniently with these people, and intend to do so, but a sine qua, non of their submission is that they surrender unconditionally, and that they be removed from their mountainous country to the coast, where they can be kept under proper surveillanceIt will be well for you to warn them that the opportunity now offered them may not be again open to them, and that contumacy on their part will lead to their speedy destruction. The best plan for them is to send for their women and children, and accompany you to Wairoa, where they will bo informed as to their future location. In all probability I shall come to the Wairoa myself, in the event of their surrender, and arrange matters with them. You can tell them they will meet with the same treatment on this side as those who have surrendered to the Arawa. There is nothing further to add to the instructions convoyed in my letters of the 15th, wdiich were definite, and will fully have advised you as to the wishes and intentions of the Government. I trust the negociations which were going on at the time your letter left will have resulted in the acceptance by the enemy of the terms offered, and in such case you will use your influence to get their women and children sent for, aud the whole removed as speedily as possible to Wairoa. I shall be glad if you will make enquiry from the Urewera as to the number of men who accompanied Te Waru to Alaungapowhatu, and also who they were. This information would be of considerable value; also, any reliable information as to Te Kooti's whereabouts and his force. The report of his being at Te Eeinga is one of those rumors that get about and is at variance with all the other information we have upon the subject. I shall hope to hear soon from you the result of the meeting with the Hauhau chiefs, which was going on when you last wrote. I have, &c., F. E. Hamlin, Esq., J. D. Ormond. Wairoa Expedition, Matuahu Pa, Waikaremoana.
Enclosure 5 in No. 104. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to His Honor Mr. J. D. Ormond. Sir, — Matuahu Pa, Waikaremoana, June 18th, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your despatches dated 15th instant conve3 ring to me the wishes of the Government in case of a surrender or otherwise by the Ureweras, and shall do my best to carry out the same. In my last despatch to you, dated 16th instant, I informed you that four of the Hauhau chiefs— Makarini, Paraki, Hori, Te Wao, and one woman —-were then at this place having a great korero with the Chiefs of my party. After a good deal of speechifying, the principal spokesman of the Hauhaus, Alakarini, agreed, as far as he and his people only were concerned, to give themselves up, but could not do so for the other tribes, and promised to go to Buatahuna and try to induce Paerau to surrender. We gave them some flour, &c, with which they seemed much gratified, and was the means of casting off a deal of suspicion, with which I need hardly say they not only were but still are full of. Makarini told us that Te Waru and his people had gone to Maungapowhatu with the intention of searching out Te Kooti and joining him. On the whole, I feel gratified that the present instructions all through are the full sentiments of my own mind.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
81
A—No. Sb.
Yesterday afternoon Paraki returned by himself, and stayed here last night. His visit was looked upon with great suspicion by our natives, as he refused to give us any information, and they think he merely came as a spy to find out our movements. If this was his object, he has not gained anything, but, on the contrary, our men contrived very cleverly, by conversation among themselves, which he could overhear, to convey to him a great deal of false information for the edification of his people, and your despatches to me and to them happening to come over from Onepoto just at this time, gave a coloring to their statements. The only news we managed to extract from Paraki was that Kepa is still at Buatahuna ; that the Hauhaus found the boat from the information of Hotoma ; that two of the Ngatimatewai are still with the party at this end of the Lake. Paraki has just gone back to his people, and has taken with him letters from all the chiefs, and also one from me. With regard to our present position, I may briefly state that this place is the key to the whole Lake (See sketch). We have already visited Tiki-Tiki, Mokau, Pukehuia, and Maruarau, and brought a large quantity of potatoes from those places. Pending the result of the present negociations, we have not yet visited Mangarerewai or Hereheretau, as both these places (about four miles distance from here) are at present occupied by the Hauhaus ; and, from a very important breach of Alaori etiquette on the part of Ihaka Makahue, in sending Te Paea back again, when he met her first in the canoe, without allowing her to come on here and see her people, our overtures were looked upon with great suspicion. I enclose copies of our correspondence with the Hauhaus. lam sending this off at once, and as soon as anything of importauce occurs I will forward intelligence at once. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, ~ F. E. Hamlin. Agent for the General Government, Napier.
Enclosure 6 in No. 104. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Matuahu Pa, June 18th, IS7O. I have the honor to report that just as I was on the point of starting my former despatch of this date, one of the Hauhau canoes arrived with Makarini and four others Makarini was the principal spokesman, and at first was inclined to take rather a bold tone, insisting that we should return to the Wairoa prior to their coming in. This, of course, we refused to accede to, and afterwards he yielded, apparently, to our proposition, and said he would try and induce his own people to come in. How much reliance is to be placed on this statement remains to be proved, for, whilst Alakarini was speaking in the pa, our people succeeded in extracting from one of tho other Hauhaus the following information, viz.: —That both Te Kooti aud Te Waru are now at the end of this arm of the Lake, at Maungarerewai or Hereheretau; that their object in trying to induce us to leave this end and cross to Onepoto, was to enable them, as soon as part of our force had crossed, to attack and annihilate the remainder. I would strongly urge that reinforcements should be sent up here, or, at any rate, a post established at Onepoto immediately, and if a force could be sent without delay from Taupo by Ahikereru, and Buatahuna, to make a simultaneous attack with ours, w re should be.able to end the present disturbed state of affairs at one blow. According to the natives, a force could march from Taupo to the other end of this arm of the Lake, by way of Buatahuna, in three or four days, and as soon as we saw their signal fires from the Huiarau, or heard them attack, we could then attack from this side. I shall therefore try and delay the present negociations to give time to have a reply from you. At any rate the force coming from Taupo could destroy Buatahuna, and cut off retreat in that direction If rockets are handy we could see them if sent up from the Huiarau, say at a certain hour some night. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, F. E. Hamlin. General Government Agent, Napier.
Enclosure 7 in No. 104. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. E. E. Hamlin. Sir,— Napier, 19th June, 1870. I am in receipt of your letters of yesterday's date, the one in reply to mine of the 16th, and also covering the Native letters between your people and the Hauhaus, and the other and later letter advising me information had been received from one of the Urewera that both Te Kooti and Te Waru are with the enemy at Heroheretau, and that the negociations for surrender by the Urewera are not sincerely entered into by them. I note also your recommendation that an attack should be made upon the enemy from Taupo, through Buatahuna, together with the other remarks contained in your letter. After careful consideration, and a reference to the Hon, the Defence Minister, I have now to advise you, that from other information recently obtained by the Government, it is not considered probable that Te Kooti is at Hereheretau, although it is quite probable that Te Waru may be; and that even if Te Kooti were ho would increase very little indeed the strength of the enemy. In regard to a movement from Taupo, by way of Ahikereru and Buatahuna. it is simply impossible. In the first place, it would take weeks to collect the force necessary, and at this season of the year no dependence can be placed on the possibility of being able to move in that district. Mr M'Lean advises me that the chief Hapurona has gone to Buatahuna and Alangapowhatu to induce the Urewera to surrender, and that he expects to be able to do so Under these circumstances Mr. M'Lean thinks you should give further time before renewing active operations agaiust the enemy,
A,—No. Sb
82
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
and meantime continue to hold the Lake District as at present. A short time will probably suffice to show whether the Urewera are likely to accept the considerate terms now offered them ; and you may apprise them that the present favorable conditions will not remain open for any lengthened period. I am further desired by Mr. M'Lean to convey through you to the chief's of the expedition the high sense the Government has of the service they are rendering There is one condition of affairs under which it would not be desirable that the foregoing instructions should be observed, that is, if it should prove that Te Kooti is at Hereheretau. If he were really there the Government would consider that further negociations were useless, and that the harbourers of that miscreant would deserve that no terms should be made with them. Should, therefore, tho information you have received of Te Kooti being at the Lake be confirmed, you will at once adopt vigorous measures, and do your best to drive the enemy from the Lake District. With the force you have, and with the absolute knowledge that if every man the enemy has is gathered his force will not exceed from 120 to 140 men —and these demoralized by continual defeat and want of ammunition— this will, I trust, if necessary, be effected by you in the same successful way the operations have hitherto been conducted. And you will please, in case of active operations having commenced, act up to instructions conveyed in my late despatches. You will please communicate the purport of this letter to the chiefs of the expedition, as containing the wishes of the Government after full consideration of the present position at Waikaremoana. I am instructing Mr. Newland, by this opportunity, to send up another supply of groceries, &c, for the use of the expedition. I have, &c, J. D. Ormond, F. E. Hamlin, Esq., Waikaremoana. General Government Agent.
Enclosure 8 in No. 104. June 11th, 1870. To Ihaka. To Paora. To Edward, (Hamlin), — Friends, we have seen your letter —it is good. Now, you must return to the Wairoa, and there wait for the good result of your talk, and of our talk. The reason that our talk is not ended is on account of Te Paea's being returned to us; through that our thoughts are confused. From Te Kowhai, Makarini Houa, Paerau. We are included in the peace-making of Te Kepa, of Eopata, and of the whole of the Arawa. Peace is made with Tuhoe (Urewera) —with all.
i Enclosure 9 in No. 104. June 12th, 1870. To the Urewera and to all the Hauhaus, — Friends, it is true that the person did wrong in sending back Te Paea—it was entirely his own doing to send back Te Paea. All of our thoughts are to offer terms of peace to you. Friends, Paerau and Te Makarini, if what you say is true that you made peace with Te Kepa and Eopata, come here both of you to see us, and let us see you. Come quickly ; but as to ourselves, we will not return. From Paora, Ihaka, Hamlin, Te Hapimana, To Paerau —to the Frewera. Hamana.
Enclosure 10 in No. 104. June 13th, 1870. Friends, there is a great deal of talk : let the talk be good, do not let the words be deceitful. The word to you is, that that place where you now are is the threshold of a war party ; return to the Wairoa, to the front of a kainga. Friends, do not distrust these words. Think of the peace made by Kepa. If these words are good, be pleased with them ;we will meet each other outside, in the front of the kaingas. 1 From Paerau, Te Kowhat, Te Whenuanui, Te Haunui, To Paora. To Ihaka. To Hamana. From the whole of Tuhoe. To Hamlin, and to Hapimana.
Enclosure 11 in No. 104. June 17th 1870. To Te Whenuanui, to Paerau, to Te Haunui, to Te Ahoaho, to Te AJanihera, to Te Puehu, to Matiu Tohatau, to Paora Eawaho, and to Hori Kurapa,—■ Friends, salutations to you ; this is our word to you all:—We have seen Makarini, Hona, and others of your young men. They have agreed that peace should be made ; therefore, this is our word, which we wish to convey quietly to you —to the chiefs. Confirm this peace-making of ours •
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
83
A—No. Bb,
it by coming to vs —come let us go outside together. Come to one side, come to where there is safety, do not stay any longer in darkness. Come outside (to the coast) so that the land may be clear for any disturbances that may shortly take place. There will be hard work shortly ; it will not end. Friends, you old men (chiefs) of the tribe, confirm this work of ours, that it may be binding. "Come, come to us, let us go outside together. In future you can return to your own places, as soon as the evil is cleared away. Do not be afraid ;do not remain away : come at once, and trust to the fair dealings of the Government; come quickly. This is our last word. From Ihaka, Baora, Hamlin, Hamana, Te Hapimana, Hone Te Wainoho, And from all the men at Matuahu.
No. 105. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. Defence Minister. Telegram. Napier, June 21st, 1870. I forward a despatch from Mr. Hamlin, dated 19th instant. As expected, the report of Te Kooti being at the Lake proves incorrect ; there may be something in his having been sent for. The reported attitude of Paerau and Whenuanui is not satisfactory, and is borne out by their letters sent by Makarini. We shall see if Makarini does surrender, and a few days will also tell us what position the Ureweras decide to take. If they are contumacious an effort ought, I think, to be made to force them to give in, and I would recommend that Captains Mair and Preece, with their contingents, should be ordered up to the Bangataiki, by Ahikereru, to meet Major Boberts and a body of constabulary. I believe a demonstration of force would suffice to bring them to reason, and would materially assist Hapurona's negociations. It was such a demonstration that brought Hapurona to book, and with Waikaremoana occupied, Paerau & Co. would not feel very comfortable if they knew a force was on the other side of them. If you agree to my view the sooner it is carried out the better. lam never certain of how long our Wairoas will hold on. The move to the Eangitaiki need end in nothing, and is merely a preparation for what may be forced on us. I hope you will approve ; a little firmness just now will wonderfully assist negociations. The Hon. Defence Minister. Ormond.
Enclosure in No. 105. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir, — Matuahu Pa, June 19th, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that I yesterday sent you a despatch stating, that from information extracted by the Natives from one of the Hauhaus who accompanied Makarini, Te Kooti .and Te Waru were both at the end of this arm of the Lake. At the time I sent you this information I could not get an opportunity of personally examining this native unknown to Makarini, but after he (Makarini) went back the other remained here, and last night I ascertained from him, and also more fully from two native women who stopped here, that the natives had jumped rather too hastily to the conclusion that Te Kooti is here. The real truth, as far as I can ascertain is this, Te Waru went off with the avowed intention of joining Te Kooti; after that a letter was sent from here to Te Kooti asking him to come here, and an answer has been received stating that he will come, and it is believed that he is on his road here. I lose no time in thus modifying my former report in order that the Government may not be put to unnecessary expense. I requested that reinforcements should be sent up and a post established at Onepoto, not because I considered my force insufficient to hold their own here and at the same time to attack the enemy, but simply to protect our rear and guard supplies which might be sent up, because I imagined that if Te Kooti and Te Waru were here, the first thing they would try to do would be to ambush the road from Wairoa to Onepoto. Under the altered, or rather I should say present state of affairs, I do not consider this now so absolutely necessary as it would be if Te Kooti and Te Waru were really here, and perhaps on hearing we are here, the former, if strong enough, might deem it a fair opportunity to attack the settlements. I would even still urge on the Government the advisability of sending a force into Euatahuna because although Makarini has promised as far as he and his own people are concerned (27 men) to surrender; yet still, from his report, the tone taken by Baerau and Whenuanui is still so defiant, that if true, it will be necessary to reduce them by force, and the present (excepting the season) is a most favourable opportunity. Makarini has promised to use all his influence to try and induce the others to come in, and I have tried my best to impress upon them that they will meet with every consideration from the Government. I have retained one of the orderlies here, and will inform you as soon as any change takes place up here, either surrender or otherwise, which I hope two or three days will determine. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, F. E. Hamlin. General Government Agent. 22 "
A.—No. Bb,
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
84
No. 106. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. Defence Minister. Telegram. Napier, June 27th, 1870. Despatches received from Waikaremoana, dated 23rd June, so that " Luna" will not bring anything very fresh. She is to return here from Wairoa to-night. I repeat Mr. Hamlin's despatch in full. From private letters from him, I gather our natives are sytematically destroying the kaingas and cultivations round the Lake. The amount of food seems enormous. The taking of the whaleboat and all the canoes ends the question so far as the possession of the Lake is concerned. It now requires to be seen whether the Urewera will surrender. If not, the question for determination is, are we to hold the Lake, and how ? I need not enter on question now, as I shall so soon be at Wellington. The Wairoas are behaving very well. They write to me they shall feel slighted if Government allow the Urewera to surrender to the Arawa. They claim to have forced the surrender. The Hon. Defence Minister. Ormond.
Enclosure in No. 100. Sir,— Matuahu Pa, June 23rd, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letters dated 19th inst., which arrived last night. My despatch of the 19th will have informed you that the native rumour that Te Kooti was then at Mangarerewai was not correct. Since then, finding that the Hauhaus did not come in according to promise, we proceeded in the boat and two canoes to Mangarerewai and Hereheretau. At the former place we found four men and a woman, but the latter was deserted. One of the men, Hori, who had visited us at Matuahu with Makarini, informed us that the bulk of them had retired into the bush, being afraid to come in until the return of Makarini, who had gone to Buatahuna, and from there intended to proceed to Maungapowhatu, not only to bring his own people in, but also to try and induce all the rest to surrender. As the capture of these few insignificant people would not advance the end in view, we allowed them, as a matter of policy, to remain at large at Mangarerewai, leaving them a few canoes to bring their people in, but brought away the five-oared whaleboat, and ali the rest of their canoes—one or two very large ones. Hori, on being asked to come in to Matuahu Pa, said he would rather wait until the arrival of Makarini, but that he and the rest would move up to Tiki-Tiki the next day, leaving a letter at Mangarerewai, to tell the rest to come in. This they did, and yesterday I went over there and had a long korero with them. Tawhai, a fine young fellow, informed me that he had been with Te Kooti to Mohaka, Taupo, the King's place, Pototiri, and in the fight between Mair and them, and back to Buatahuna, where he left him. As to Te Kooti's present strength, he had but a very vague idea. Te Waru's strength, when he left here, was about thirty, and he went with the avowed intention of joining Te Kooti. He gave me a full account of the whole affair from Mohaka right round. He says that Te Kooti has "Te Turuki" branded on his right arm, an old family name. From the information of Paora Kunaku, who left Te Kooti about five weeks ago ; his present strength is 50 men, and he is still, I believe at Waioeka. Hori says that he expects Makarini to return the early part of next week You will be pleased to accept all this information and these promises of surrender under reservation, as although the general opinion of the chiefs of my party is that the Urewera intend to surrender yet still we are of course suspicious, and do not like to have to state anything as being actually an accomplished fact which might possibly have to be contradicted in the next despatch. Under these circumstances I have determined to temporise for a few days. I believe that Makarini is sincere in his statement that he himself and his people will come in, but in the present state of affairs here, the arrival of Te Kooti would alter entirely the complexion of things. But even should this take place we are quite prepared for this alternative, and I may add that, with regard to the Ngatipawhara and the Ngaitu, I believe they would greatly prefer fighting to peace negociations, and you may rest assured that should Te Kooti come here he will meet with a warm reception. Our only fear was, that inspirited by his presence, they might attempt to cut off some unfortunate orderly or convoy in our rear, and this would throw a greater damp on the spirits of our men than ten men being killed in open fight; but now, I think, all fear of this is over, as we are virtually in possession of the whole Lake and most of the canoes. We have not shifted from here as this is the most commanding position on the Lake, but our canoes and boats are daily scouring all the different cultivations, of which there are about 100, and each of them is being denuded of potatoes, tons of which are being brought in here every hour in the day. From the almost fabulous amount of potatoes round this Lake, it is evident that this was intended to be the dernier resort of Te Kooti and his followers, as the quantity we have already got and destroyed would keep 1000 men for fifteen months. Yesterday, part of our fleet went round the Wairau and Maru Lakes, where there are a great many cultivations, I have communicated the contents of your despatch to the chiefs of my party, and they are all highly gratified at the terms in which their services are spoken of by the Government. At the same time, with regard to the surrender of Hapurona, they say that this should come by way of Wairoa, as no lasting peace will be made until this is done ; until they come to them, and the wounds he has inflicted are healed, they will still feel themselves the aggrieved party. Unless I have anything definite to report, I shall not send down specially again, as the few mounted men at present in the Wairoa have had rather hard work for their horses lately. I hope to be able, in my next, to inform you that Makarini has returned, but this will not be for a week. In the meantime we shall scour the Lake and collect or destroy all their provisions. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond, F. E. Hamlin. General Government Agent.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
85
A.—No. 8b
No. 107. His Honor J. D. Ormond to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Telegram. Napier, June 27. 1870. The " Luna" has arrived with news from Waikaremoana written yesterday ; I send despatch in full, also the letter from the Urewera. I make out that Makarini's hapu means to surrender, they number about thirty ; the peace referred to is of course Kemp's. The instructions I intend sending to Mr. Hamlin, are to accept Makarini's surrender if he offers ; and to defer any further action until instructions are sent him from Wellington after my arrival there. Ormond.
Enclosure 1 in No. 107. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir,— Matuahu Pa, 26th June, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that I have just received your letter of the 23rd instantj requesting the latest information from here. The troopers who brought your letter arrived at Onepoto last evening, but it was raining hard, very misty, the wind blowing a hurricane, and we did not see their signal fires or hear their guns ; and even had we done so Ido not think it would have been safe to have gone across. The troopers have to return by this evening, so I have only time to write hastily. Since the date of my last despatch, Hori and the four others who came to Tiki-Tiki have remained quietly here. On Friday, I went in the whaleboat with Mr. Witty and the other Europeans for a cruise round the Wairau end of the Lake. We called at Tiki-Tiki, and took Hori with us to give us the names of the different places. We first visited this end of the Wairau Lake, and explored the track wdiich leads from there through the bush across the Tiki-Tiki Peninsula to the other side, which brought us out at Mangarerewai to the water at the end of the arm of the Lake which runs up from here. After this we started to visit the further end of the Wairau Lake and the Marau, but it came on such a tremendous gale that we were forced to return at once here, which we had much difficulty in doing. Several of the Natives were out at the different waerengas round the Lake getting potatoes in their canoes, and being unable to return I had to send the whaleboat round to pick them up. All night before and since, with very little intermission, there has been a constant rumbling sound like artillery, which we suppose comes from Tongariro. The Wairau is a fine sheet of water, and, as far as I could judge from the partial view I had, contains about fourteen square miles of water. There are waerengas all round full of splendid potatoes. This morning, simultaneously with the receipt of your despatch, Hori arrived in a canoe from Tiki-Tiki, with the news that Makarini had returned from Buatahuna, bringing the enclosed letter from Te Whenuanui and the others there. Hori informs me that a great deal of discussion has taken place —some desire to surrender to us here, some to do so by way of Taupo, Napier, Tauranga, and Tamaikowha's people by Whakatane. Hori also says that Paerau has sent us some token of submission (a flag, or something of the kind), but I have not yet received it. You will see from the letter of Te Whenuanui, &c. (of which I enclose translation) that they harp very much on the peace made with them by Major Kemp, which they now style as Mr. M'Lean's peace (Eongopai.) As lam in complete ignorance of the terms of any peace that has been, as they state, made with them by the various parties who have been in treaty with them —-Majors Kemp and Bopata, Captains Preece and Mair—it places me at a great disadvantage in dealing with them; but as you are of course in full possession of all the facts of the case, you will be better able to determine how far they are sincere, and I shall be glad if you will favour me with explicit instructions how I am to proceed in the matter. We are inclined here to treat the whole with great suspicion, as not only myself but the chiefs of my party requested them at once to give up all the prisoners taken by them from Mohaka, which they have not yet done. The delay in our receiving this letter has arisen, they state, from very bad weather, of which I may add we have had our share. Hori says that Hapurona had not been to Buatahuna when Makarini left (23rd inst). As time presses I shall send this off at once, but I should like to have had a personal interview with Makarina first. Hoping to have early instructions from you, without which, unless anything special occurs in the meantime, I shall remain in statu quo. I have, &c., His Honor J. D. Ormond, F. E. Hamlin. General Government Agent.
Sub-Enclosure to Enclosure 2 in No. 107. (June?) 28, 1870. To Waikare ; to Erueti (Hamlin) ; to Paora ; to Ihaka; to Hamana ; to Te Hapimana; to all of you, —- Salutations to you, who have been treated kindly by the law and by man. This is our word: Take Te Makarini by the hand, for if you do it will be taking the tribe by the hand. This is another word : Friends, the peace has been established by the pakeha Alakarini (Mr. McLean) in Whakatane, Te Waimana, and Buatahuna —all my places ; but perhaps you will not respect it. Te Whenuanui, Te Haunui, Te Ahoaeo, Paerau, Erueti.
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
A,—No. Sb
86
No. 108. The Hon. Defence Alinister to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Telegram. Wellington, 27th June, 1870. The news from Air. Hamlin is most gratifying. He is behaving splendidly, and with much judgment. Donald McLean.
No. 109. The Hon. Defence Minister to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Telegram. Wellinton, 27th June, 1870. Have the goodness to inform Air. Hamlin and the Wairoa natives that the Urewera must come out to the coast before any peace is concluded, and that the Government will then determine what is to be done with them. The understanding at Whakatane was that they must come out to the coast there, and give up their arms. It is equally desirable, from the active steps taken by the Wairoas, that they should come out on that coast. Peace cannot be made wdth them on any terms involving their remaining as a back-bone for Te Kooti, and to make future raids on our settlements. Inform the Wairoa natives, also, that their conduct is fully appreciated, and that they will have their due share of credit for what they are doing. The natives who surrender, except Te Kooti, Kereopa, and one or two notorious murderers, will have their lives spared. Donald McLean.
No. 110. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. F. E. Hamlin. Sir,— Napier, June 28th, 1870. Yesterday morning I received overland your report of the 23rd June, which I had much pleasure in transmitting to the Government at Wellington an hour later. I received by the p.s. Luna your letter of the 26th instant, which reached me in little over twenty-four hours after you had written it; this letter was also at once communicated to Ministers, and I have now great pleasure in conveying to you the entire approval of the Government of the action you have taken, and have been requested to convey to yourself, Mr. Witty, the Chiefs, and all engaged, the high sense the Government has of the services that are being rendered by the Waikaremoana Force. In respect to the terms upon which you can treat with the Urewera, and in regard to which you feel some difficulty arising from statements made by them of terms said to have been arranged with them in the Bay of Plenty, I have now to convey to you the following instructions for your guidance. You will inform the Urewera that the basis of any peace with them must be that they surrender and come out to the Coast, when the Government will determine what is to be done with them, and that no peace will be made with them on terms involving their remaining in their own country. At the same time you will state to them that the Government is disposed to deal leniently with them if they embrace the opportunity now offered them; that the lives of all will be spared except in cases like that of Te Kooti, Kereopa, and other criminals who have been concerned in notorious murders. For your information I will also state that the understanding at Whakatane was that the Urewera must come out to the coast and give up their arms, and further that the Government now deem it desirable that their surrender should be made to the Waikaromoana force, to whose active operations so much is due. These instructions are so definite that you can have no difficulty in following them, and you will please inform the Chiefs of the purport of what I have written you. As regards future operations, so much depends upon the action the Urewera may take that it is better to leave that question until I am further advised by you of their intentions. In the meantime, the course you report you are taking is in accordance with former instructions, and precisely what the Government desire should be done. I leave to-day for Wellington, but shall be able to communicate with you as easily from there as at present, and instructions will be left to forward all your despatches by telegraph. You will please report at once, when in possession of further information as to the intentions of the LTrewera. I have, &c, F. E. Hamlin, Esq., J. D. Ormond. Waikaremoana.
No. 111. Mr. H. T. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, to the Under-Secretary Native Department. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir,— Auckland, June 25, 1870. I have the honor to report for the information of the hon. the Native Minister, that I left Auckland for Tauranga on the Ist instant, arriving there early on the following morning. Major Mair reached Tauranga the same evening from the Bay of Plenty coast settlements, and reported that Hapurona Kohi, HoaDi Paiaka, and other Urewera chiefs, were then on their way to Tauranga with the hope of meeting me.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES
87
A.—jNo. Bb,
On the morning of the 4th, Hapurona and party arrived. They had been detained by the Arawa at Maketu, and the Ngaiterangi at Ohuki. They were hospitably entertained at both places, and were -congratulated on having submitted to the Government. They were escorted to Tauranga by the Ngatiwhakaue chiefs Petera Te Pukuatua, Paora Te Amohau, and Bewi Tereanuku. At their first interview with me they were not very communicative, which arose, I afterwards found, form the circumstance of a great number of Native spectators being present. Hapurona said "We have come to give ourselves up, if for life, well; if for death, still it will be well." He said that he had received my letter addressed to them, and left at Ahikereru when the expeditionary force returned from the Urewera country last year, but that they were unable to avail themselves of it. Te Kooti, who appears to have been held in great awe by the Urewera generally, on account of his supposed supernatural powers, insisted upon their going with him to Taupo and Waikato, which they did. They, however, watched the first opportunity after their return to their own country, to separate themselves from him, and had now come to surrender themselves unconditionally. I replied that the Government would be glad to hear that they had at last yielded to wise counsels ; that we were aware that of all the tribes in the Island, the Urewera had not a shadow of grievance to -complain of, yet they had taken part in every fight against us; that they had assisted Te Kooti, a man whose name was associated with the murder of women and children, but that the Government did not wish to destroy human life. All that had been done, was in the punishment of crime and outrage, which it was resolved should be put down, and the perpetrators thereof brought to justice. That the Government did not intend to confiscate any more of their lands, so that they had nothing to dread on that score. Here I was interrupted by Hapurona, who said eagerly :—" You need not say any more, we are quite satisfied —your assurance regarding our lands is enough. Let me return to Te Urewera, and tell them what you have said. Ido not promise you that they will surrender themselves ; Ido not wish to •deceive you. But let me take your words to them." From Hapurona's excited manner, I have been led to believe that the fear of the confiscation of their country has been one of the causes which has delayed the submission of the Urewera, and has been a matter of discussion amongst them. Hoani Paiaka, a man of some importance connected with the Urewera, but brought up in Upper Whanganui, and related to Topia, said that wdiat Hapurona had stated was correct. The Urewera had misgivings about their lands, aud that when the question was discussed at the time Te Kooti was with them, he had told them that if they submitted not only would all the land be taken away, but that they would be removed to some other Island. Hoani suggested that our interview should terminate, and that a meeting of a more select character should be held on Monday, the 6th. To this I agreed. They returned to Te Alatapihi at their own request, as I could not obtain suitable accommodation for them at Te Papa. On Monday, although a wet and boisterous day, Hapurona and party returned. Hoani Paiaka was principal spokesman, and gave a full account of Te Kooti's proceedings from the time of his attemptsd return through Taupo, on which occasion Hoani joined him. The full statement made by Hoani has already been reported by Captain Mair, and I need not repeat it again. The conduct of the Waikato King party towards the Urewera appears to have caused great dissatisfaction. Hapurona states that, after the assistance they have rendered, and the losses they have sustained on account of the " King movement" from the first, they did expect that some attempt would have been made to overawe Te Kooti and give them an opportunity of detaching themselves from the man they so much dreaded ; instead of which they (the King party) behaved like cowards and left them to their fate, and therefore that he and his hapus did not wish merely to lay down their arms, but to become " Kawanatanga." Hoani stated that he loft Te Kooti about the end of April; that he was with him during the fight at Waioeka, and was one of the picquet surprised by Eopata near Maraetahi; he escaped very narrowly being captured by the Whanganui. When the expeditionary forces withdrew, they came out of their hiding places to bury the dead ; twenty-five men were buried on the spot, including old Hakaraia, and two Urewera were taken away to be buried at their own Wahitapu. He states further, that Te Kooti is either at Te Pato, a tributary of the Waioeka, which takes its rise to the eastward, or at Te Wera, a branch to the westward ; that Te Kooti had told him he would be found at one or the other of these places. At Hapurona's and Hoani's earnest request, I wrote a letter to the Urewera, a copy of which, with translation, I herewith enclose. Just as Hapurona and party were leaving intelligence was received that Wi Patene, Bangiaho, and the Batuheuheu had come in. They heard the news with evident satisfaction. The fighting men who have now surrendered amount to fifty, and about eighty women and children. In accordance with instructions left by the Hon. the Native Minister, the people under Hapurona and Hamiora, will be established at Te Butere, and the old chief Eangitukehu has given them permission to cultivate some of his forest land at Oheu, but I have declined to let them cross the Eangitaiki river. The Patuheuheu will live with their relations of the Ngatimanawa. The women and children taken by the Arawa last year, have been, for the most part, restored to their husbands and parents, in accordance with the promise given, or left at Ahikereru. On my return from Eotorua, I was informed that Wiremu Patene and Bangiaho were on their way to Tauranga to see me. I carefully considered the subject, and decided to write to them and request them to return to Te Awa-o-te-Atua till they heard further from me. I deemed it prudent to do so, on account of the report that had been circulated, and confidently believed, that Bangiaho was the man who murdered Mr Pitcairn at Ohiwa, but I am glad to find from enquiries made by Major Mair of Hira te Popo, the report is incorrect, and that the man who com--23
A.—No, Se.
88
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
mitted the deed was Wi Piro of Poverty Bay, who was subsequently killed at Taupo. Te Hira is a man, from what I. know of him, whose testimony may be relied on, and the statement he has made removes from my mind the difficulty which presented itself of receiving Bangiaho on the same footing as the other surrendered rebels. The Urewera who have come in describe the life they have been leading since their return from Waikato as unendurable. With the expeditions on foot at Waikaremoana, and the flying columns on this side under Captains Preece and Mair, they have lived in a state of constant alarm. In fact, our respective positions have been just reversed. They are now experiencing the harrassing care which they have for years inflicted upon us. I have, The Under-Secretary Native Department, Henry T. Clarke. Civil Commissioner.
Enclosure 1 in No. 111. Te Tapa, Tauranga, June 7th 1870. To Paerau, to Te Whenuanui, to Kereru, that is to say to all the chiefs of the Urewera throughout all its boundaries. Friends, —Salutation.—This is to inform you of the arrival at this place of Hapurona Kohi, Hoani Paiaka and Manuera. They have travelled through the boundaries of the Arawa even to this place, and all that they have found has been peace only, and the speeches made to them have been of one character only. Friends, —Come outside, there is no reason for your remainiug where you are. Do not hesitate. Our thoughts are as clear as noon day. Hapurona and his friends are the bearers of the words, but lest you should be doubtful the principal words shall be made clear. Ist. With regard to your lands, the Government will not hold them. Sufficient for the Government is that contained in the boundary line as before defined (confiscated block) which will not now be extended. 2nd. Eespecting Tamaikowha, Mr M'Lean has considered the subject and has already sent his word. The peace of Kemp will be acknowledged if Eru (Tamaikowha) will come out, and there will be no thought toward him on account of his alleged crime. If he will consent to come out (or surrender) the Government will cease to remember him as a criminal. Do not think about Tepene, the Government disapprove of the death of that man. But one is the word of this Government regarding that evil man,Te Kooti, the man who has caused death to the tribes. Never will the thought cease towards that evil murderer ; never until he is caught. Do not admit him into your district. He alone is the person who brings trouble upon other tribes. Should he be caught and brought hither to be judged by the law it will be well. Friends, let your consideration of these words be clear. Do not hesitate about your land, which I ask you to to forsake. "He kura kainga tena c hokia." (A proverb meaning that it is but leaving home to be again visited under more prosperous circumstances). Here also is another speech. I will send a word to the Government requesting them to withhold the war parties on the other side Waikaremoana that you may have time to consider maturely your words. I have, &c, H. T. Clarke, Civil Commissioner.
No. 112. Mr H. T. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, to the Under-Secretary, Native Department. Civil Commissioner's Office, Sir, Auckland, June 27th, 1870. I have the honor to transmit for the information of the Hon. the Native Minister a copy of a letter from Major Mair reporting the surrender at Opotiki of the Whakatohea Chief Hira Te Popo, and the greater portion of his hapu. 1 quite concur with Major Mair as to the probable effect of the submission of Te Hira upon the disaffected tribes in the interior, and I confidently hope that the day is not far distant when the wholeof the Urewera tribes will submit. I have, &c, The Under-Secretary Native Department, H. T. Clarke, Wellington. Civil Commissioner.
Enclosure in No. 112. Major Mair to Air Clarke, Civil Commissioner. Sir, Opotiki, June 21st, 1870. I have the honor to report for the information of the Government that, on the 17th instant, Hira Te Popo, and the greater portion of his hapu (Ngati-ira), viz., thirteen men, eleven women, and ten children, making a total of thirty-four, submitted at this place. The remainder of the hapu were engaged in searching for some women who were missing, and may bo expected in shortly. The submission of this well-known chief is an event of very great importance, and will, I have no doubt, produce a very marked effect upon the Urewera. Although never taking any active part in their operations, he has nevertheless been viewed by the King party as one of their greatest supporters in
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES
89
A.~-No. 8b
these parts, and his defection from their ranks, coupled with the destruction of their rendezvous in the Waioeka, will prove a severe blow to their cause. At the same time his accession to our party will be a great gain, as he is a man of considerable ability, and of good character. He has kept aloof from us hitherto, because the other chiefs of the Whakatohea made their peace with the Government without any reference to him —who had not shared in their offence, and his pride prevented him from following in their track. Even now he expresses a wish to have as little to do with them as possible. Hira informs me that his people have not seen anything of Te Kooti's party since the early part of last month, but he is of opinion that Te Kooti is still wandering about the sources of the Waioeka and Motu, where he will probably remain till the spring. Nepia Tokitahi, when last heard of, was going in search of Te Kooti; their united strength would be between forty and fifty men, who are a mixture of many tribes. If Te Kooti has left the Waioeka country, he will probabiy be heard of about Waikare. Nothing has been heard lately of Tamaikoha, but the weather has been very much against travelling. I have, Ac, The Civil Commissioner, W. G. Maie, Tauranga. Eesident Magistrate.
No. 113. Mr. H. T. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, to the Hon. the Defence Minister. MEMORANDUM. July 2nd, 1870. The enclosed is forwarded for the information of the Hon the Native Minister. This letter should be read in connection with a letter* sent by Tana to Ngaiterangi, in which it would appear that the boundary referred to was generally understood. Tana asked Te Kooti to give him Tauranga, which request was complied with, but faith wa-s broken by Te Kooti. I have, &c , The Hon. the Defence Minister, Wellington. 11. T. Clarke.
Enclosure in No. 113. Ngatiwhakaue Chiefs to Mr, Clarke, Civil Commissioner. To Mr. Clarke, — Ohinemutu, January 16th, 1870. Friend, salutations to you. Takerei and Ngahaki arrived here on the 16th of January. They escaped as refugees from Te Kooti. One of them was captured by Te Kooti, and the women. He may be dead or not, however, we believe he is dead. Te Kooti's permanent pa is at Pakaraka, on the Tapapa side of the forest. Te Kooti has said that Waikato is the boundary. Tawhiao has the other side, and Te Kooti has this side including Hauraki, Tauranga, and Eotorua; Eotorua to be Te Kooti's principal field for fighting. This is the song of the Ngatipikiao and Ngatirangiwewehi Hauhaus, which they chaunted to Te Kooti. (Song to tho effect that they were prepared to join him, and to fight at Eotorua.) From Ngaiiuruhuru, Ngawene Taupua, Warihi te Ahiwaru, And from all Ngatiwhakaue.
No. 114. TfIAKA Whaanga and other Native Chiefs to His Honor J. D. Ormond. To Ormond, — Waikaremoana, 2nd July, 1870. Friend, salutations to you. We have seen your letter, and approve of the words contained therein. Give heed. We think that we should go home, accompanied by the Hauhaus who are at present with us, and that you should come to Te Wairoa to see us and the Hauhaus also ; then we can lay down some plan with respect to the Urewera, so that we can send these Hauhaus to fetch their tribes, the Urewera. Our opinion is that we ought to settle the matter at Te Wairoa. We cannot do it here for the food has been destroyed. Some of it we have consumed. We have alsotaken some of the property, but the canoes we took care of. That is all. We will soon return home, but we are still on this side of the Lake. The weather is unfavorable. As soon as it is fine we shall cross to Te Onepoto, and then go on. We are also waiting for some Hauhaus to come here. They will probably arrive to-day. Friend come to Te Wairoa. That is all. Ihaka Whaanga, Paora, Te Hapimana, Hamana, Toha, From all of us, From all the force. * Vide Papers on Mifitary Operations, A. No. 8 8., letter No. 80
A.—No. Bb.
90
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS, &c
No. 115. Mr. F. E. Hamlin to His Honor J. D. Ormond. Sir, — Matuahu Fa, Waikaremoana, July 2, 1870. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of yours of 28th ultimo. Since my last, Hori (Makarini) has come in here with seven other men, three women and a child, and gave themselves up. The weather has thoroughly broken the last week; heavy falls of snow and such continued gales that it has been dangerous for the canoes to venture out Winter appears to have set in. Six of the Hauhaus died in the snow on the Huiarau ranges, and have been found and buried ; four others are missing, and two others drowned while crossing the end of the lake in a canoe. Under these circumstances the Natives decided that it would be impossible to go forward, and that as a matter of policy it would be better to return to the Wairoa with Makarini and the others, and not to risk a failure by attempting at the present season to bring coercion to bear on the remainder of the Urewera at present at large, but rather to try and induce them to come in by means of Makarini's influence, as this native appears to be anxious, after he has been to the Wairoa and made a formal surrender of himself, if he meets with the treatment he has been promised, to return here and bring in the remainder of his people, who, he represents, are at present too frightened to come in. The above was almost unanimously agreed to before the receipt of your last instructions; and being left with only a few supporters, we have been compelled very reluctantly to consent to the above being carried out. We are now left here with about eighty men, the remainder having already crossed the Lake to Onepoto (Hamana of course leading the advance guard homewards), principally at night when the wind is somewhat lulled, and they are only waiting for a formal consent to be off. I have refused this hitherto, and I shall endeavour to remain here with the few of the Ngaitu and Ngatipawhara that are left until I receive your consent to withdraw the expedition, but I am rather doubtful of being able to do this, as great pressure is being brought to bear upon my supporters, who lack the support of a leading chief by birth, although they comprise the pick of the whole force. I have, &c, His Honor J. D. Ormond. F. E. Hamlin.
No. 116. His Honor J. D. Ormond to Mr. Hamlin. Sir,— Wellington, July 5, 1870. I am in receipt of your letter of the 2nd instant, reporting the surrender of the Urewera chief Makirini and party, and also that in consequence of the severity of the weather, the Natives had relinquished the intention of proceeding further with operations at the present season, and desire to return to the Wairoa. The death of the six Urewera on the Huiarau ranges, and the other losses of the enemy from exposure, which you report, sufficiently shows the impossibility of pressing operations further. You will therefore be good enough to state to the Natives that the Government approve of their desire to return to Wairoa, taking Makarini and the other Urewera who have surrendered with them. Abu will further state to them that the Government consider the expedition has effected as much as could reasonably be expected and that their service will be duly considered aud suitably rewarded. The sum which will be paid them for their services will be settled at a meeting which will be held with them at Wairoa on as early a date as possible, and it will be desirable that Makarini should remain at Wairoa until then, when the future relations with the Urewera will be discussed. In the meantime the Government do not consider it desirable that you should make advances or give orders for goods in anticipation of pay, and prefer that the amount to be paid to the natives shall not be diminished in that way. Before leaving Waikaremoana, you will, I trust, be able to render the Lake District useless to the Urewera as a place of resort during the present winter, and by destroying the food, make it out of the question that it should become so ; with regard to the canoes and boats, it will be well to carry out the plan I named some time ago, and entrust to Mr Witty and a few of the most reliable Mohaka natives, tho secreting such as you may desire to retain in case of being required for future use. Upon the return of the expedition to Wairoa, it will be unnecessary for you to remain there, and further communication can be deferred until your arrival at Napier when the Government will communicate to you and Mr Witty its acknowledgments of the services you have rendered. Before leaving Wairoa you will please see that all outstanding accounts are rendered, and forward the same without delay. I have, &c, F. E. Hamlin, Esq., Wairoa Expedition, J. D. Ormond. Waikaremoana.
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS, &c
91
A. —No. Bb.
No. 117. Inspector Aloule to Air. Commissioner Branigan. Sir, — District Office, Tauranga, 18th July, 1870. I have the honor to enclose herewith for the information of the Hon. the Defence Minister a letter from Captain Mair, detailing his movements to 14th instant. I have, &c, St, John Branigan, Esq., Commissioner A. C. Force, W. Moule, Wellington. Inspector A.C, in Charge Tauranga District.
Enclosure in No. 117. Captain Mair to Lieut.-Colonel Aloule. Sic,— Camp Te Teko, 14th July, 1870. I have the honor to report for your information that I have just returned from Fort Galatea. The messengers have not yet returned from Buatahuna, but a party of Hauhaus whom I fell in with at the mouth of the Horomanga Gorge, informed me that the Urewera are pretty certain to come out; but at present are watching the results of the Waikaremoana expedition. They are all assembled in Buatahuna discussing matters. Hapurona and his companions have arrived there, and urge the Urewera to come in at once. Two men came through from the Whaiti last night, and gave me similar information. I slept last night at Eaoraopatete, where about twenty of the Patuheuheu have assembled from Buatahuna and Tutaepukepuke, under the chief Mohi Te Korira. They say they are only awaiting the arrival of Bangiaho and the remainder of their people (about thirty in number), when they will all come down together and join Wi Patene and his party at the Putere. I waited a day and night at Fort Galatea, expecting that Captain Preece would come down that way, via Opepe ; but being out of provisions, could not wait any longer. I am starting a man into Buatahuna at day-break in the morning, to ascertain what the result of the Urewera meeting has been. I expect him back in about a week. I am going myself to Whakatane to-morrow morning, to see about the supply of potatoes for the Urewera and Ngatiawa, who are located on the Putere Beserve. I have, &c, Lieut.-Colonel Moule, Gilbert Alair, Commanding District of Tauranga. Captain Commanding Te Teko.
No. 118. Lieut.-Colonel Motile to Mr. Commissioner Branigan. District Office, Sir,— Tauranga, 22nd July, 1870. I have the honor to enclose herewith, for the information of the Hon. the Defence Minister, a report with accompaniments from Captain Mair. I have, &c, St. John Branigan, Esq., Commissioner A.C. Force, W. Moule, Wellington. Inspector A.C, in Charge Tauranga District.
Enclosure in No. 118. Sir, — Tauranga, 22nd July, 1870. In continuation of my report of the 14th instant, I have the honor to inform you that upon returning from Whakatane on the 17th I found Manuera at Te Teko, with letters from the Urewera. I beg to enclose copies and translations of the same. Manuera, it will be remembered, accompanied Hapurona Kohi, Hoani Paiaka, Hamiora and others, on their return to Buatahuna in June last, taking with them letters to the Urewera from the Government and Arawa chiefs, inviting them to come out to the sea coast, &c. He states that they were detained some time at Ahikereru through the bad weather. That upon arriving at Tahuaroa they fired their guns, which created quite a panic in the valley below. The Urewera, thinking that it was an attack, all fled to the hills. A large meeting of the Urewera was at once held at Te Tahora, and then adjourned to Paerau's settlement at Tatahoata. This meeting had not terminated when Manuera left with Hapurona's letters, but he says that the Urewera had consented to come out and surrender, and that a messenger would be sent out to Te Teko in a few days by Paerau and Te Whenuanui, giving their ultimatum. In the meantime, there is every reason to hope for a favorable answer. All the Waikare-Moana Natives are assembled in Buatahuna, and a great dearth of food is the immediate consequence. Manuera states that the present wish of the Urewera is for all their chiefs to conic to Ahikereru and meet Captain Breece and myself, with the Arawa chiefs, there. With this object in view, Hapurona has sent men to Ahikereru to prepare food. The Urewera state that Te Kooti is at Motu (between Waioeka, Waikare, and Te Papuni). They are still firm in refusing him admittance to Buatahuna. Te Ahuru, it is said, has gone to see him with what object it is not known. The Urewera are quite willing to come out to the sea coast, but they cannot yet believe that it is from 24
PAPERS EELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
A.—No. Bb,
92
disinterested motives that the Government invite them to do so. Natives have been told recently that the Government are using patipati (treachery), and it is quite possible that a statement like this, made by a European, may have reached them, and p>erhaps have the worse effect. I have, &c, Gilbert Mair, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Captain Commanding Wellington. Arawa Flying Column.
Sub-Enclosure 1 in No. 118. To Mr. Clarke, at Te Papa, part of Tauranga,— Buatahuna, 12th July, 1870. O loving friend, salutations. We have arrived at Buatahuna, both personally and by letter also (alluding to letters to the Urewera from the Government and from Arawa chiefs). The answer to us from the whole of the Urewera is that it is good (c pai ana). Friend, we cannot go out yet —not during the days of the present month. Friend, make haste and send word to Waikare. Do not allow any expedition there (to advance from that side). The Urewera are undecided—are looking both ways. Enough. From Hapurona Kohi. Hoani Paiaka. Hamiora Potakurua.
Sub-Enclosure 2 in No. 118. To Captains Mair and Preece, — Baiatahuna, 12th July, 1870. Friends, salutations. We have arrived at Buatahuna, both ourselves and the letters. The answer of all the Tuhoe tribe is very favorable, but we will not return to you for some time. Wait patiently for us, as this is not a work of little importance ; therefore it cannot be completed in one day. This is all. From Hapurona Kohi. Hamiora Potakurua.
Sub-Enclosure 3 in No. 118. Buatahuna, 12th Jnly, 1870. To Biharoa, to Patene, and Te Barua, at Kaiteriria. To Te Amohau, to Ngaiiuruhuru, and all Ngatiwhakea, at Ohinemutu. To Matene, to Te Mapu, and Te Pokiha, at Te B.otuiti. To Petera Pukuatua, To Bewi Tereanuku, and Temuera Amohau, at Maketu. Friends, —Salutations in these days of goodwill. Ist. We have arrived at Buatahuna both personally and by letter. The word of the Urewera to us is favourable, but we will not be out for some time, as this is no small work, and cannot be completed in a day. 2nd. Soon a second letter will be sent to you, shewing further particulars. This is all. From Hapurona Kohi. Hoani Paiaka Hamiora Potakurua.
Buatahuna, 11th July, 1870. To Arama Karaka and Tukehu, at Te Awa o to atua. To Te Kepa, at Tarawera. To Petera Pukuatua, Bewi Tereanuku, and Temueiia, at Alaketu. To Mr. Clarke and Colonel Moule, at Tauranga. Friends, salutations. Friends, we are in trouble with the Urewera, because on our arrival here we told them that we were the only Government Natives (messengers). However, soon afterwards the Urewera scouts at Te Wharau caught a party of Government Natives coming up from Whakatane. They were Ngatiawa, Ngaitonu, and Ngatipukeko. Now, the Urewera don't like these people, and will not allow them to enter the boundaries of Buatahuna ; besides, it is wrong for them to come unasked by a different road—by the roads of the first peace-making of the Arawa and Europeans. The word of ail Tuhoe is that the road by which they will go out is the one by Eangitaiki, because Hiria, who went out by the Whakatane road, got into trouble. This is the word of all Tuhoe. Our word to you, and also to Mr. Clarke and the Colonel, is that the work of these people may be stopped. Wait till our work here is finished. It is wrong to intrude this way, and they (the Ngatiawa and Ngatipukeko) will not be well received. Twice have the Ngatiawa caused me trouble : First, when Te Kepa Toihau took a spear to me, and now this affair. Send a word to them that they cease this child's work. All Tuhoe have agreed to come out, but they will not be ready for some time, as it is no small work, and do not, therefore, be impatient, but wait. Do not listen to what Bakuraku says —the Urewera know nothing about him ; he is on his own account. O loving friends, salutations. All is well, but the cause of the delay is that Eru Tamaikowha has not yet arrived. Enough. From Hapurona Kohi. Hoani Paiaka.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
93
A—No. Bb.
No. 119. Captain Preece to the Hon. the Defence Minister. (Telegram.) Te Teko, 24th July, 1870. On my way down met an Urewera of the Ngatihaku hapu, who told me Bangiaho had gone down the day before to Te Teko with letters. I arrived here yesterday. Found Captain Mair had left for Tauranga on the 19th. Manuera had come in with two letters from the Urewera. I enclose you the copy of the one to the Arawa; the other, to Captain Mair and myself, had gone on to Tauranga before my arrival. I also enclose you tho letter from all the Urewera Chiefs, brought by Bangiaho, who. has gone on to Matata. I have not seen him ; but from what Kawana (the man I met) tells me, the Urewera are inclined to surrender, and will send another messenger out shortly. Te Waru and all the men who retreated from Waikare are at Buatahuna. Kohi is on his way out with a lot more men; they will be at Eaoraopatete to-morrow. lam sending them up some food, as they are without any. Some of the Urewera have just come back from Waioeka. Te Kooti is there with a few men. I leave here for Tauranga to-day, to get pay for my men. Shall be back on the 30th. George Preece, Captain Commanding Te Teko.
Enclosure 1 in No. 119. Hapurona Kohi to Arama Karaka and others. Euatahuna, 12th July, 1870. To Arama Karaka, Tukehu, Te Kepa,— Friends.—We have arrived at Buatahuna. We came and delivered the letters. The only reply made by the whole tribe of Tuhoe (Te Urewera) was that it was very good. However, we will not soon get to you, for this is not a small matter which can speedily be disposed of. After tho next letter their intentions will be known. That is all. Hapurona Kohi.
Enclosure 2 in No. 119. Urewera Chiefs to Arawa Chiefs. Buatahuna, 16th July, 1870. To Arama, Tukehu, Te Kepa, Tawa, TeTeko; To Paora, Temuera, Ngahuruhuru, Plori, Te Pokiha, Petera, Maketu; To Mr. Clarke, Tauranga. Friends, salutations to you all. Friends, Hapurona and Bangiaho have arrived, and we have seen them ; their words are good, and so are your letters. Salutations to you all. The words of greeting end. Friends, give heed. The peace has been consented to ;it is very good, and very just. We have nothing to add to it. As for me myself, I will not go to you, because lam confused by the many words from you, the Government. That is all. If you approve of these words, send Bangiaho. From Te Whenuanui. Te Haunui. Paerau. Indeed from the whole of Tuhoe-Potiki [the Urewera].
No. 120. Captain Porter to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Gisborne, 26th July, 1870. I have the honor to make a hurried report of events that have transpired since my leaving Wellington. lam about to take the field again. I landed here on the 24th, Bopata going on to Opotiki by the " Luna." It was intended I should go by land to Waiapu, and meet him on his return. It was my intention to start on Thursday, 28th, taking with me the money for Ngatiporou. The news received to-day has quite altered my plans. From Tologa Bay we have news to the effect that at daylight this morning some few natives who were out early from the pa were surprised by thirty or forty Hauhaus, who fired at them, wounding two. They (the Hauhaus) then fired at the pa from a hill some short distance off. Such was the state of affairs when the messenger left. Major Westrup has now ordered some Volunteers and Armed Constabulary, with some Natives, to proceed to re-inforce. Sub-Inspector Bichardson and myself go in charge lam in hopes Eopata is on his way back from Opotiki, and that on hearing of the affair he will at once ship men in pursuit. Failing Bopata's early arrival, I will endeavour to get Uawa Natives to go. I deem this affair a badly conducted surprise party foiled in its object. It may be fortunate the Luna is on the coast, to enable celerity of movement. I will continue my report on arrival at Tologa Bay. I have, &c, T. W. Porter, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Wellington. Captain and Adjutant. 25
A.—No. Bb,
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
94
No. 121. Major Bopata to the Hon. the Defence Minister. To Mr. M'Lean,—- Opotiki, 26th July, 1870. Salutations to you. We have arrived at this place, and have seen the Whakatohea. I was glad to find that they had carried out the arrangement we made with them when we left last time, viz., that they should remain peaceably, which promise they have kept. I was especially pleased to find that they had fulfilled their promise to the Government. Both Ferris and myself saw their friendly disposition, and have not been disappointed with the result. T have also seen the person I appointed, whose name is Te Biaki (half caste) to look after them. He is now engaged in carrying out the works set on foot for the benefit of the people generally. I have also seen Te Hira Te Popo, and Uaaterangi. I have addressed these men in a friendly aud conciliating spirit, and I was at the same time impressed with a good opinion of their bearing. I enquired of these two, how it was that they and their tribe came in so quickly 1 They replied, "We were afraid of being attacked by the Government forces, who are now going through, and subduing the length and breadth of the land, and we also believed that it was owing to the suspension of the operations during the winter season that we have been saved, and that when the summer season came in again, we should run great risk of being taken and killed. Another reason that induced us to come in and surrender was that the lives of all the prisoners had been spared under your merciful treatment. Hence it was that this remnant of the Whakatohea has come in and surrendered. If it be true that yours is a mission of friendship to these tribes, then let your clemency be great towards them under the laws of the Queen, so that we may be spared. Our evil and stupid proceedings have ceased to be ;we shall never return to them again. When we joined Te Kooti's rebellion we believed at the time that the salvation of the people was in that direction, but instead of that we have found it to be the reverse. We have nothing further to say to you on the occasion of this your appearance amongst us." Having finished their address, I then got up to speak in reply. I said to them,—-" I approve of what you have said to me, and since you have now discovered the right way for promoting the well-being of the people, do so ; follow it up. Be guided by the law which gives peace and quietness to all men ; that is to say, by the Queen, our protector, who has given to us light in times of trouble. When the Christian faith was first brought to these islands, we were in a state of cannibalism, and then we, the whole of the people of this island became Christians, and, this being done, you then sought to establish a King for the Maori people. This was the commencement of your downfall. Now, then, listen you two : The dog that has been tamed by a particular person, he will not follow or be led by a stranger ; no." This finished my address in reply to theirs, and they showed the usual signs of acknowledgment for the kind treatment and safety that had been held out to them. After this was over, I then enquired of them as to what led to their separating themselves from Te Kooti, and Te Kooti from them ? Baora te Uaaterangi and Hira Te Popo said, in reply—" The reason that led to our separation was this :Te Kooti had ceased to incite the Natives in his cause; he discovered that his own schemes and devices had failed and broken clown, and that the Natives, his allies, were deserting him in all directions." I then enquired of them as to what the particular error was on Te Kooti's side that induced them to separate from him t Paora and Te Hira replied —" The chief causes was the frequent deaths amongst his followers, and the frequent desertion of the men. He (Te Kooti) had also stated, or led the people to believe, that his own God had the power of destroying his enemies, and we waited to see whether his God had the power of destroying the forces against him, but we found it to be all a false statement, and that instead of the Government forces falling into his hands, it was, on the other hand, we who suffered the loss, and then it was that we determined to separate from him, for we reasoned thus: if we stay with him we shall die ; and if we go, we cannot fare worse: the risk is equal." I said to him, " You appear only now to have discovered Te Kooti's error, while you must have heard long ago of our condemnation of his proceedings; we, who thus condemned him being now in the ascendency, while you, who approved of his acts, now find yourselves bewildered and cast down.' I then enquired of them as to where Te Kooti really was at this time. They replied that he was at a place called " Te Wera," in the district of Waioeka, at the source of that stream, on the road that leads to Turanga. Te Hira said that he had heard that Te Kooti was preparing a plantation there. I then enquired what the strength of his force was. They said fifty, but they are without powder and caps, not very many guns ; but even those, of what use are they without powder and caps? The whole fifty are not supplied with guns. They also stated that the Urewera had ceased to think with Te Kooti. The report that he had 150 men is false, and that there were 300 of the Urewera with him is a false statement. Where are those many people to come from 1 The report was got up for the purpose of intimidation, I said to them, " Will not the Urewera come out and surrender ?" They replied, that if they hear that we are spared, and in safe hands, they will all come out. I then thought thus : the final destination of the prisoners now at Wellington will influence the movements of those people who are now wandering about in the bush. I say, then, let those people be brought down and set at liberty, so that the course to take with respect to those men who are guilty of heavy crimes may be soon made clear, for I know that some of these fellows are here. Ferris can bear testimony to the truth of these statements, because he was present and heard them spoken. I waited for some time to see if Bakuraku would come to Opotiki, so that I might talk with him as to the best means of inducing the Urewera to come out; but. I conveyed my wishes on this head to Hori Kawakura, of the Ngatiawa. My address to him was as follows:—"Friend, Hori Kawakura, salutations to you. My request to you is this : that you should, under the sanction of the law, send a messenger to the Urewera, inviting them to come out and surrender, that we may be able to deal with Te Kooti in the proper way. Should they obey your summons, then I promise you that the Government will treat you in a frank and friendly
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
95
A.— Km. SB-
spirit." This finished my address to Kawakura, and he agreed to my proposals. This man has suffered much in consequence of what he has done on behalf of the Government, and in his constancy in upholding the law. The Europeans are to blame; for concealing from the Government the good conduct of this man Kawakura. It is for you to consider what is due to these two men, Hori Kawakura and Biaki, halfcaste, belonging to the Whakatohea. Major Mair has now arrived here, at Opotiki, on the 29th of July. I have enquired of him with reference to Whakatane, the settlement which is visited by the Urewera. He said that Eakuraku had come from Buatahuna to Whakatane. Eakuraku stated that the Urewera had agreed to come out; the majority of them had already come to Euaatoki, and are now waiting for those at Buatahuna to come, and then to come out in a body. Already Te Whenuanui has requested the Ngatiawa to build him a house at Whakatane, so that when he arrives it will be ready to receive him. Major Mair has given directions to Wepiha to build a house for him, and it is now being done. Tamaikowha has sent a message, requesting tho people on the coast to go and bring him out. I have requested Kawakura. to do this, and he has gone. It is now ascertained for a fact that Te Kooti is at present at a place called " Te Wera," which bears out the statement of Eakuraku, and which is also borne out by the statement of Te Hira te Bopo and by Baora Te Uaaterangi. This is all the information I heard on this subject. With reference to the powder about which Hori Bura spoke : what he said was so far true, but he was to a certain extent mistaken. Te Hira te Bopo states that it was the same powder that was formerly taken. There was no other powder; and he further stated that he had no object for concealing the truth with reference to this matter. Eakuraku paid me a visit on the evening of the 29th July, and I took the opportunity of ascertaining from him the intentions of the Urewera. He stated that there had been a meeting of all the hapus of that tribe at Buatahuna, on the 27th July, viz., the people of Maungapowhatu, Buatahuna, Toreatai, and Tauaki, I then enquired of him the object of this meeting at Buatahuna. He (Eakuraku) said it was to discuss the question of coming out and surrendering. I said to him, " Have the Urewera made up their minds to come out?" He said, " Yes; they have sent me word to say that on the Ist day of August they will commence their march out." I said to him, "Is this quite true?" He replied, "There were five other Government Natives who went with me." I then said to him, "Give me the names of the men, that the truth of your statement may be quite clear." He then gave me the names, viz., Nepia Baruhi, Eria, Eeweti, Hemi, Boihipi, Eakuraku,whereupon Wepiha confirmed the statement made to me by Eakuraku, together with all the other men who came to see me with Eakuraku. I, therefore, believe this statement to be in every respect correct. This was the substance of what I heard. You will receive a letter from Te Hira and Baora, requesting to be provided with a piece of ground for themselves and their people, for they have no ground of their own for growing food upon. The bearing and disposition of these men is exceedingly good, and Berris will corroborate what I have said of them. This is another subject upon which I wish to inform you, viz. :—On the 29th of July I made the following communication to Te Hira Te Bopo :— " To Te Hira Te Bopo. " Friend,- —Salutations to you. I wish to make the following proposition to you. I request you to .send a messenger to go and fetch Nepia Tokitahi, that is to say, if you know where he is now living. Should you succeed in bringing him out, the Government will be favourably inclined towards you. " From your friend, " Major Bopata." The orderly started with this letter on the 30th July, the day on which we sailed from Opotiki. This is another address I wish to make to you. I have been looking for a piece of ground for myself in the town, upon which I have already conversed with you, when I told you of the piece I lost through the decision of the Court at Opotiki. While I was engaged in fighting, that land was brought into Court, and taken by the Whakatohea. My intention was to have had this place upon which to have assembled the Natives near to the town. I have given you the numbers above of the allotments (168 to 207). Here are the soldiers that I send under the authority given to me by the Government. I hope the Government will not be annoyed with the delay. I did not feel willing to remain here any length of time,as I had ordered the movement of the soldiers. Those I have engaged to come I obtained from the settlements between Opotiki and Waiapu. The number I have engaged is sixty. Captain Ferris has the names of them. Betera has behaved very well. He it was who wrote and induced Eakuraku to came here to Opotiki. From your friend, Bopata Wahawaha.
No. 122. Tie Hon. the Defence Minister to Major Bopata. Sik, — Wellington, 4th August, 1870. Salutations to you. The Government is much pleased at receiving your report, dated Opotiki, 26th to 30th July, 1870, and I have to thank you for all your judicious proceedings. The decision of the Government is not yet finally arrived at as to the prisoners now in gaol here, only that they are not to be hung. You will hear more about this soon.
A.—No. Bb,
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
96
The Governor and Ministers are very pleased to hear of your prompt march in pursuit of Te Kooti, After his attempt to attack Uawa (Tologa Bay). We hope soon to hear that you have succeeded in capturing him. Your friend, Donald M'Lean.
No. 123. Major Westrup to the Hon, the Defence Minister. SIR,-^ Boverty Bay, 2nd August, 1870. I have the honor to enclose herewith a dispatch and statement of Natives in reference to Te Kooti's attack on Tologa Bay, rocived by me from Captain Borter, for your information. I have, <fee, The Hon the Defence Minister, Chas. Westrup, Wellington. Major Commanding District.
Enclosure in No. 123. Captain Borter to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir,— Tologa Bay, 28th July, 1870. I have the honor to forward herewith the statements of Natives who fell in with Te Kooti on his attempted surprise upon this place, which you will perceive has failed. He appears to be quite crestfallen. lam in great hopes of his being either killed or caught this time ; it is one of his last efforts made in desperation. He has now got himself into just the kind of difficulty I often looked forward to. Captain Bichardson and myself start iv the morning to chase him, with about One hundred men. The natives here go with us willingly. We have news from the coast that a party of Ngatiporou are going from the back of Tokomaru. Eopata and the " Luna" are still absent. The weather is extremely bad, wet and cold. We are very sanguine of success this time. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, T. W. Borter, Wellington. Capt. and Adjutant.
No. I.—Statement of Hone Bahoi. I was at my kainga when two kolciris of the Hauhaus came ;it was early on Monday. Huhana, Kooti's woman, was in the first kokiri, I said, "You are rebels;" she said, "No ; we are from Waiapu." We came on to Aratoha, and Te Kooti was there. He told me to sit down. I did so. Te Kooti said, " Let us go out side to Uawa." I said, " I cannot, but will go back, Te Kooti; but mind and don't leave ;my soldiers are going out." I went back; the rebels followed and killed my pig, and brought me back I was brought on among them, and came to Waiatana. Te Kooti got up and read service to his men, after which we came on, and then the kokiris were sent out to Mangakuku and Uawa. Te Kooti said the reason they had come was to collect the relations of his wife Huahana; it was Rongopai. I counted the rebels about fifty. Te Kooti asked me how many stores of powder we had. He said he was Major Eopata, and not to fear. He said if there was plenty of powder, to sell some. He asked how manymen there were at Uawa. I said "100." He said, " Where did you get thatnumber from." Soonafter this I heard firing. It was then two men from the pa were wounded. We went to the kainga of Beka, and Erimana's wife and children were taken. When the kokiri came back, having failed to surprise the pa, Te Kooti said to me, "My word is : go back, and tell them to remain quiet." I am going to Tokomaru and Buatai ; I will take Bepika with me, and will send a letter back to the Government. Te Kooti said they had come from Waioeka ; their food was rotten corn and whinau. No. 2. —Statement of Hohua Bawhea. When Erimana came in on. Tuesday; he told us it was the Hauhaus,; and that his wife and child had been taken. Eleven of us went out, and descending the hill we saw the Hauhaus—three men and a woman. I called out to the woman, "If you are Huhana come in and be spared." I called out our names, that she might know us. They ran away; we followed, and came up to Erimana's wife. We asked, "Where are the Hauhaus?" She replied, "I don't know." From the opposite side of the water we heard Mateaha call out, " Huhana is here." The Hauhaus called out, "If any of you wish to come to us. let one come ;we all went and saw the Hauhaus, who welcomed us. They had guns, and were inclined to fire. The Hauhaus asked me if we wanted to fire. We said, "No." They then said, "Be cautious, and let us all go outside. Te Kooti is here, and gone round the other way." We then felt anxious for our pa. We came, Hauhaus and all. Henare took Huhana upon his horse, but afterwards dropped her. The Hauhaus also remained behind. When we got to the pa I told them to assemble ; that Te Kooti was near, and professed Ilowjopai. No. 3.—Statement of Baora. Three of us left the pa, and getting to the top of a hill saw the Hauhaus. Seven of them came to us. Te Kooti also came with about twenty men ; Te Kooti came to my side ; when close to me I saw he had lost two fingers of his right hand. Te Kooti shook hands with me, and rubbed noses. He said, " Welcome, my father ; come father to father, children to children." He said, " It was not you that becan the evil work; it was I who began it." He said, "Tell me if the Arawas are here, or at Waiapu." Te
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
97
A.—No. Bb.
Kooti said, "'Go, lest we remain standing here." He said, "Hone has gone with a kokiri to Tokomaru and Kaimana to Puatai ; I alone am here. Go, salute your friends from me." He said, " I will not touch anything here." Te Kooti went away, and Pirihi, a Hauhau, came to me and said, "Do not listen to Te Kooti; he is deceiving you ; but remember. Huhana, who belongs to us here, told us to be warned, as Te Kooti had come to kill men and obtain powder."
No. 124. Major Westrup to the Under Secretary for Defence. Sib, Boverty Bay, 2nd August, 1870. I have the honor to enclose herewith a dispatch received by me from Sub-Inspector Eichardson for your information. I have, &c, The Under Secretary Defence Office, Chas. Westrup, Wellington. Major, Commanding District.
Enclosure in No. 124. Sub-Inspector Eichardson to Major Westrup. Sir,— Tologa Bay, 28th July, 1870. We arrived here about 2 p.m. It was reported that Te Kooti had possession of the range Tekohikohi, as firing had been heard at Boutae. This occasioned some delay, as I deemed it necessary to proceed cautiously. We saw no sign of the enemy having been there. A party of forty man were out scouting when we reached here. On their return they reported that Kooti was retiring by the track he camo down. We start at daylight, about 100 strong, and hope to catch up with him. quickly, as he is not supposed to be more than seven or eight miles away. The people here have had a narrow escape. The enemy nearly succeeded in deceiving the friendlies. Some of them appear to have been face to face with Kooti, and were only made aware of their danger by Te Kooti's wife, warning them that the party had come to kill. They do not appear to be a very strong party—-from fifty to sixty in number—and they are badly off for arms and ammunition. The Natives are very angry at the attempt made to deceive them, and are anxious to go after him. Captain Borter is getting a full account from the Natives, which you will see. He seems to think that we are likely to be successful this time. They are going back in the direction of Waioeka, from which place they came, and I think it probable that they will lay in a stock of provisions before they start. They had nothing but rotten corn and raupo roots on the march down. You may expect some more definite news in a couple of days. Warn Sub-Inspector M'Donnell, please, to look out, as it is just possible a small party have come in the direction of Waerangahika. I have, &c, Major Westrup, Commanding Boverty Bay. Wm. A. Eichardson, A.C.
No. 125. Major Westrup to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Steamer " Luna," Gisborne, Boverty Bay, Sir,— 2nd August, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that intelligence reached me on the evening of the 26th July that the settlement of Tologa Bay had been attacked by a party of between forty and fifty Hauhaus, who had wounded two Natives, and taken prisoner a family of the name of Feka. The population of the district sought refuge in the pas, but were momentarily expecting an attack. Immediately on receipt of the news I ordered a force of about twenty Europeans and twenty Natives to proceed at once to Tologa Bay, under command of Sub-Inspector Eichardson, A.C, and Captain Borter, with instructions to employ the men either in assisting to defend the pas, or attacking the enemy, if practicable. I also sent another force, consisting of Natives of this district, to scout the road by which the enemy might retreat inland in the direction of Boverty Bay, though, owing to the heavy rains which have lately fallen, the rivers were too high to allow them to pass before Monday morning. On the arrival of the force at Tologa Bay, the enemy was found to be in retreat, as, owing to the treachery of some of Te Kooti's party, the population of the district had been timely warned of his approach, and no harm had, therefore, been done by him, except wounding the two men already mentioned. From the evidence given by the Natives in the district it was discovered that Te Kooti himself was in command of the rebels. Sub-Inspector Eichardson and Captain Borter proceeded at once to follow up the enemy, and had almost succeeded in carrying out their plan of capturing him, when, owing to the excited state of some of the Friendly Natives in commencing firing before the disposition of the force was carried out, the enemy was not only alarmed, but the remainder of our force rendered useless, as the direction of the firing prohibited an immediate advance. Our force succeeded in capturing Huhana (Te Kooti's wife), six rifles, and the greater part of the enemy's baggage. 26
A.—No. Bb,
98
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
It appears from the prisoner's statement that when their camp was surprised only ten or eleven men were in it, the other ten having left some hours before. This gives twenty as the entire party with Te Kooti. On learning this, an advance was at once made and continued until nightfall, but without capturing any of the retreating party. I have to-day been to Tologa Bay, and have seen Major Eopata, who will proceed at once with some seventy of his men in pursuit of Te Kooti. They are provisioned for fifteen days. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, Chas. Westrup, Wellington. Major, Commanding Boverty Bay District.
No. 126. The Under Secretary for Defence to Major Westrup. (Telegram.) Government Buildings, 4th August, 1870. Government has read with much satisfaction your letter reporting proceedings at Tologa Bay, and thinks the action you took was very judicious. "Luna" has ammunition and supplies, to be made available if required. Hope to hear of further successful movements by return of " Luna." G. S. Cooper.
No. 127. Sub-Inspector Eichardson to Major Westrup. Sir, — Gisborne, 2nd August, 1870. I have the honor to inform you that in accordance with your orders, I proceeded to Tologa Bay on Wednesday, 27th July, 1870, with the Boverty Bay Mounted Volunteers, and four Armed Constabulary. Owing to the strong north-east gale blowing on the beach, we were unable to get beyond Barakai, a distance of sixteen miles. On the morning of the 28th we advanced towards Tologa Bay, feeling our way cautiously, having met all the Natives living in the district on their way to Turanganui, from whom we heard that Te Kooti held possession of the road about four miles from our destination. In the meantime Captain Borter, with a number of Poverty Bay Natives, joined us, and we marched into Tologa Bay, seeing no sign of the enemy on our way. On our arrival we were informed that Te Kooti had retired, having perpetrated no damage beyond wounding two men in a skirmish two days previous. About forty natives were out at the time scouting his track. On their return they reported that Te Kooti was retiring by the same route he had come. Three days' rations were procured, and we started in pursuit on the following morning, the 29th, about 120 strong. About three o'clock in the afternoon we found that he had camped the previous night, iuid judged from its appearance that he could not have more than forty men with him. Pushing on his trail, we proceeded through a nasty piece of bush for several miles, and camjied at the edge of it about half-past five p.m. Scouts were sent out, who reported presently that the enemy's camp fires were visible about two miles ahead. Arrangements were made to attack him in the morning, but our plans were frustrated by a torrent of wind and rain which came on about midnight. Every one was drenched to the skin in a few minutes and rendered miserable, as we had no covering, and were unable to light fires from the proximity of the enemy. When daylight came, the Natives refused co inarch, alleging they could not depend upon their powder, and also that the enemy would not move, as the rain was still pouring clown heavily. About three p.m. on the 30th the rain began to cease ; Captain Porter and I went out to reconnoitre the enemy's position, and determined to attack it at daylight on the morning of the 31st instant. Our plan was to make a detour through the bush, and so get in rear of them. Accordingly, about seven a.m. on the 31st we marched through a dense bush, making a circuit of more than three miles, guided by a native who knew the district. This guide brought us immediately above the enemy's camp, at a distance of something less than one hundred yards. I ordered the men to extend right and left through the bush, to enable us to drive him into the open. Whilst this was being done, some of the natives opened fire upon the whares, and before we could get round, the enemy escaped past our left flank, leaving behind him all his food, baggage, and six Enfield lifles. One woman, Te Kooti's wife, was captured; and a second, who had been carried off from Tologa Bay, came in shortly after. They reported that Te Kooti with ten men were the only force in the camp, and that the others, to the number of twelve, had left in the morning at daylight. Had the firing been suspended for a couple of minutes longer Te Kooti must have fallen into our hands. We pursued him through the bush for eight or nine miles, but were unable to come up with him. The party that had started early in the morning were seen and fired upon, but they fled without firing a shot, abandoning their food. On the morning of the Ist August we marched back to Tologa Bay, and arrived here to-day, the 2nd instant. From information received from Te Kooti's wife, Huhana, we learned that the party consisted of Te Kooti himself, twenty men, and four women; that they had come from Waioeka, and had been three weeks on the way, their intention being to obtain arms and ammunition, and if possible a reinforcement of men. They have only fourteen rifles remaining, and about three or four cartridges per man. Captain Porter is furnishing a lengthy report of the whole affair to the Defence Minister.
A.—No. Bb.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
99
I might state, however, that the inhabitants in the district may safely return to their several houses, as there is no danger to be apprehended from Te Kooti in his present despicable condition; but two of his original men are remaining with him, and they are represented as being desirous to surrender. The rest are Ureweras. I have, &c., Major Westrup, Commanding District. Wst. A. Eichardson, Sub-Inspector A.C., Commanding.
No. 128. Captain Porter to the Hon. the Defence Minister. Sir, — Steamer "Luna," 2nd August, 1870. I have the honor to continue my report from Poverty Bay. On the 29th ultimo, Sub-Inspector Eichardson and myself started with about 100 men, Natives and Europeans, getting to the Mangahi Stream. Our scout reported Te Kooti's track leading up a creek. We followed, but found some difficulty in keeping it, as heavy rains had fallen since his (Te Kooti's) passage. At night we camped, and sent men out to reconnoitre, who returned and reported Te Kooti s camp in a bush gully, about a mile off. We determined to attack in the. morning. July 30th.—At midnight it came on to rain heavily, and having no shelter or fires, we soon became drenched and shivering with cold. We dare not light fires lest the enemy should be aware of our approach. There being no sign of clearing up, we were afraid to attack as purposed, as we could not depend upon our guns going off. A messenger was sent out to Tologa Bay (Uawa) to bring up Ngatiporou, if arrived. Just before night the weather having partially cleared up, we climbed to the top of a hill overlooking the enemy's position, which was situated on a stream at Waihapu, with a range of hills in front, covered with high fern and scrub, and in the rear a dense bush extending along both flanks. We determined to advance by the rear, keeping possession of the bush, and, if possible, to surprise the enemy, leaving him only the comparatively open ground in front. If he attempted to escape, our chances of capturing him would be greater, as he iuvariably seeks the bush as a refuge. July 31st.—At 4 o'clock a.m. we called all the men up to start, but found it next to impossible to get through the bush until daylight. At dawn of day we started with forty men as an advance guard, the main, body following close in the rear. We travelled through some very thick bush, feeling our way carefully, taking us much longer to reach the enemy's position than we had anticipated. Getting close up, the advance guard had orders to extend along the left of the enemy's position, keeping under cover of the bush; the main body to extend from the centre rear along the right flank of the enemy. While the advance was extending with orders to open fire when in position, two or three shots from the main body, fired without orders, frustrated the object of completely surrounding the enemy, as immediately the shots were fired the enemy bolted, without attempting to make any resistance. A random fire was then begun from our men, which, owing to the density of the timber, made it extremely dangerous for anyone going to the front being shot by them in the rear, as the firing was commenced prematurely. When we took possession of the enemy's camp we found they had abandoned everything belonging to them, consisting of six rifles, kits of food, Te Kooti's boots, shawl, blankets, and the whole of his personal property. When firing first began, I ran to the left flank, and saw some Hauhaus retreating, and nearer to me a woman, whom I captured. She turned out to be Te Kooti's wife, Huhana. I was compelled to retire again, as the firing from the rear was very hot. One of the three men whom I saw was Te Kooti, who had his carbine under his left arm. At the moment I did not recognise him. Had it been safe for men to advance in chase at the time, he must have been captured, but the firing from the rear we were unable to suppress. After obtaining information from Huhana of the direction in which Te Kooti had bolted, some men were at once sent in pursuit, but returned in the evening without falling in with any of the enemy, who, being light and unencumbered, travelled swiftly. Huhana reports Te Kooti to have twenty-one men and five women with him, all of the Urewera. I shall take the statement of Huhana in detail for the information of the Government, and will forward it by next opportunity. I am unable to accompany Major Bopata's expedition, starting to-morrow, on account of ill-health. I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister, T. W. Borter, Wellington. Captain and Adjutant.
No. 129. Captain Fairchild to the Hon. the Defence Minister. (Telegram, via Napier.) Boverty Bay, 6th August, 3 a.m., 1870. Eopata has gone into the bush from Tologa Bay after Te Kooti, and a party of Natives has gone in from Poverty Bay to try and cut Te Kooti off. They are on his tracks. We go on to Tologa Bay to see if we can do anything for Eopata. I send this by the s.s. " Keera." John Fairchild.
A.—No. Bb,
100
PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS
No. 130. Captain Preece to the Hon. the Defence Minister. (Telegram.) Tapuaehararu, 7th August, 1870. Hapurona arrived on 30th July. Could not persuade all the Urewera Chiefs to come in, but he brought Te Haunui (Te Maniera) eight men, twelve womeii and children; one of the latter, Te Puehu's son. George Preece, Captain.
No. 181. The Hon. the Defence Minister to Captain Breece. (Telegram.) Wellington, Bth August, 1870. Beceived your telegram respecting Natives who have surrendered. The course to pursue with all who come in is to locate them on the land set apart for that purpose at the Butere, near Matata. You will keep a careful watch on the line of retreat taken by Te Kooti and those parties passing to the Waotu. Neither Mair nor you are allowed to leave your commands by going to Tauranga. Eopata is following the enemy from the coast, and you must be on your guard against his retreat towards Waikato. At present it is undesirable for you to attempt operations within the Urewera country. Donald M'Lean.
No. 132. Mr. Locke, 8.M., to His Honor J. D. Ormond. (Telegram.) Napier, Bth August, 1870. Skipworth has sent me a statement of Huhana :it is very long, but interesting; also, the names of the people who are with Te Kooti. Bopata has started with 103 men, and says he will follow Te Kooti, and live as he does, until he catches him. Porter has started from Poverty Bay with some Natives, and Huhana, in chase. Te Kooti had thirty-three men with him at Tologa Bay (I have their names), and twenty-two left behind; I have their names also. That is all his force, fifty-five. Statement of Huhana Whakarau. " When the Government came to Waioeka, I, with tho rest of the womeii with Te Kooti and soldiers, fled into the bush. We were pursued, and, after halting on the top of the hill, we found we were very closely pursued. We all fled except Te Kooti, Hohepa Waikore, and Matenga Taihuka, who took up a position on the hill, and fired at the Government people. We went on to Taweka, a branch of Waioeka, and in the morning we came to the main stream of Waioeka, to an old puni, and there we found three bodies that had been killed by the Government—Winiata Hakitara, Hapeta Kepatu, and Te Karehama Te Kawau. We followed the stream up, and we found other three bodies near another old puni, one a woman. These were the bodies of Hakopa Karekaiapuke, and Naira Hohepa, Kiriki Turuhaturuha, and Harata, his wife ;we buried them. We then followed down the stream until we came to Te Taora, the puni of the Government, and halted there. Te Kooti told off twenty soldiers to go and follow the Government up to endeavour to rescue their prisoners. When they ai'rived at Maraetahi they saw the Government people, and one of their party—a Whakatohea—escaped to the Government party. When they found that this man had escaped, they returned to Te Taora. On their arrival there, Te Kooti gave orders for us to follow up the stream Waioeka. When we had gone some distance, he, with his two women, Horinia and Honia, went towards the mouth of the creek called Otane. When Te Kooti. reached the bank, he saw two of the Government soldiers on the other side of the river. They beckoned to him. He returned to us, and told us that the Government were there. We fled, leaving all our food. We ascended a very high hill, and slept there. In the morning we went on until wo reached another branch of the Waioeka. We remained there three days, and then returned down the Waioeka stream. All the soldiers went out scouting to see if the Government had returned. When they arrived at Marakaro, near Tahara, I and Meri, a half-casto, went ahead of the party some distance, to endeavour to make our escape to the Government. We found three bodies at an old puni — Hone Toki, Te Kahupaki and Hieu. We all returned to Tokararangi. We went from there to Parangiora, another branch of tho Waioeka. Our people commenced clearing the bush for cultivating. When this was completed we all left there and went on to Te Weranga; we made that our fixed abode, building whares, &c. Te Kooti smt a message to Waikare, Buatahuna, Tawhana, and Maungapowhatu, to assemble all the Urewera soldiers. Hone Tauwehe was the messenger who went. He did not return, but Heta, of Ngatiporou, came from Buatahuna and said that the Urewera would not join him ; they had all gone over to the Government. We remained at Te Weranga some time, and had no communication with any one. Te Kooti with his soldiers were sometimes employed snaring kaka in the bush ; after they had obtained sufficient they returned to the kainga. The night they arrived Te Kooti called us all together, and told us that he was going to make a kokiri. He told Te Kepa A hura that the kokiri was not to kill, but to capture a tribe that he wished to nave with him. He did not say what tribe, but he said he wished to bring them safely to our kainga at Te Weranga ; and if he caught any Europeans he would do the same with them. He then pointed out the people for the kokiri and those who were to remain and plant food. He mustered about thirty men, armed with rifles ; the remainder who were left in charge of the kainga had no rifles, but two or three fowling pieces. We started on the kokiri ;we left on a Tuesday; we slept at Buhirua. The next day we went as far as Matu, and the following day to Waikopu. We followed down near the mouth of the river to Makokoanuko ;we halted there a day getting a supply of pigs and honey. We then went on to Waingaromia. We lost the track there, and struck off over the ranges towards Uawa (Tologa Bay). We remained a day in the bush gathering mamaku. The next day we saw Uawa from the top of a hill.
AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES.
A.—No. Bb.
101
We went on to Whakaau and slept there, thence to Parikanapa, where we saw a cultivation at a distance; Te Kooti halted his soldiers, and looked at the cultivation with his glass. He sent me, together with Te Kepa Miharo and Te Bauna, to reconnoitre; we found an old man, Hone Pahoi, in his whare. I asked him where Te Aitangaahauiti were, and he said they were all at the pa at Paremata; but that some people were living at Mangakaka and Mangakino; while I was talking with him, some of my companions returned to Te Kooti to tell him that we had found a man. Te Kooti himself soon arrrived, and then I sent a messenger to the soldiers to come on : this was about mid-day. We all partook of food, and started for Mangatane. When we arrived there Te Kooti told off ten men with me to go to Mangakaka. It was evening when we started." The rest will be sent if required. S. Locke.
Permanent link to this item
https://paperspast.natlib.govt.nz/parliamentary/AJHR1870-I.2.1.2.12
Bibliographic details
FURTHER PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES. (In continuation of Papers presented 5th July, 1870.), Appendix to the Journals of the House of Representatives, 1870 Session I, A-08b
Word Count
95,444FURTHER PAPERS RELATIVE TO MILITARY OPERATIONS AGAINST THE REBEL NATIVES. (In continuation of Papers presented 5th July, 1870.) Appendix to the Journals of the House of Representatives, 1870 Session I, A-08b
Using This Item
No known copyright (New Zealand)
To the best of the National Library of New Zealand’s knowledge, under New Zealand law, there is no copyright in this item in New Zealand.
You can copy this item, share it, and post it on a blog or website. It can be modified, remixed and built upon. It can be used commercially. If reproducing this item, it is helpful to include the source.
For further information please refer to the Copyright guide.
Log in